:; 
 
 * 
 f 
 A} 
 
 ne 
 
 +3 
 
 « 
 
 ae) 
 
 ¥ 
 
 mt 
 
 b 
 
 rhe 
 
 att 
 
 a 
 
 3 
 
 > 
 
 brah 
 
 i 
 
 ae 
 as 
 
 f° 
 
 batt 
 <a 
 
 Sit otiehs 
 
 ; 
 
 33 
 
 é cite 
 > " 
 
 Higiy 
 4 
 
 Gre 
 
 penny 
 Can 
 
 ‘ 
 this 
 
 i 
 ij 
 
 & 
 
 Peaseiiy’ 
 
 ee 
 
 at 
 fy yt 
 
 . 3* 
 pains 
 
 te 
 - 
 
 os 
 
 Bey 
 
 iH 
 
 q° 
 pata! 
 q 
 
 ~ 
 
 Sy 
 
 etd 
 
 at 
 
 or 
 oa 
 
 ttle 
 
 4 
 ty 
 
 # 
 
 Serer 
 Pears 
 
 
 
- .T/ 
 
 : , > | 
 rh ai b —- Te 
 
 Ad GHINASAAd 
 
 C<S) 
 
 AGSUAL MAN - NOLAONTUd 
 
 AAMUIIMIE JH91H0josYD, 949, Jo havaqny 
 
 
 

 

 
Po OLN LAL 
 
 OF 
 
 NEW TESTAMENT GREEK 
 

 
 OF 
 
 JUN 29 1953 : 
 Lav oayy 
 NEW TESTAMENT GREE: 
 
 
 
 BY 
 
 JOHN HOMER ‘HUDDIISTON, A.B. (Hanv.), 
 PH.D. (Municu) 
 
 Prorgessor OF GREEK IN THE UNIVERSITY OF MAINE 
 
 author of “ Greek Tragedy tn the Light of Vase-Patntings,” “ Lessons 
 from Greek Pottery,” etc. 
 
 New Work 
 THE MACMILLAN COMPANY 
 
 LONDON: MACMILLAN & CO., Lrp. 
 
 1924 
 
 All rights reserued 
 
PRINTED IN THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA 
 
 CopyRIGHT, 1895, 
 By MACMILLAN AND CO. 
 
 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1923, 
 By JOHN H. HUDDILSTON. 
 
 Set up and electrotyped. Reprinted, August, 1907; 
 August, 1909; September, 1910; December, 1912; Jan- 
 uary, 1914; January, 1915; August, 1916; April, 1917; 
 July, 1918; August, 1919; January, December, 1920; 
 May, July, 1922; May, 1923; February, 1924. 
 
1953-7 
 
 PARC od ACO By 
 
 —~>———_- 
 
 TuHE publication of the Revised Version of our 
 English New Testament, in 1881, marked the begin- 
 ning of a new interest in Bible study. Since that time 
 not only the English, but the Greek and Hebrew have 
 been studied with a zeal quite new. ‘The sources are 
 being more carefully examined to-day than ever before. 
 Students are becoming more and more awake to the 
 great importance of being able to judge of a certain 
 passage for themselves rather than accepting without 
 doubt or question whatever the authorities say in 
 regard to it. 
 
 Can anything be done to bring the language of the 
 New Testament within the reach of a larger number 
 of Bible students? Through the great maze of gram- 
 matical difficulties that surround the language, can a 
 way be mapped out along which the student may work, 
 and, without sacrificing essentials, gain the same end 
 that usually requires many months of hard study? 
 Can the absolutely essential parts of the language, as 
 used by the New Testament writers, be set forth in 
 small space? ‘This little book is an attempt to answer 
 
 these questions, and I believe that it lies within the 
 Vv 
 
vi PREFACE. 
 
 power of the earnest Sunday-school worker or other 
 Bible student to acquire a reading knowledge of New 
 Testament Greek, provided only a substantial part of 
 one’s time is thus devoted for a few months. 
 
 In my teaching of elementary classes in Garrett 
 Biblical Institute, I have been accustomed to begin my 
 work with the first list of verbs in Bradley and Hors- 
 well’s New Testament Word Lists, Part I. All of these 
 words occur several hundred times, and furnish the 
 student thus at the very first with a substantial hold 
 on what proves one of the main difficulties in Greek 
 or any other language, —the vocabulary. The work 
 was in part inductive. Those words that presented 
 fewest difficulties of form, and which at the same time 
 were of the most frequent occurrence, were presented 
 first. ‘The second declension was introduced before 
 the first, as being altogether simpler and more easily 
 comprehended by those who had not made _ the 
 acquaintance of an inflected language. I aimed to 
 keep rare adjectives and tenses of the verb till a later 
 time. The optative mood, which does not occur in 
 the Johannean writings, was omitted entirely from the 
 elementary work. Each lesson was accompanied with 
 illustrative exercises taken as far as possible from the 
 New Testament. 
 
 The present volume has grown out of this plan of 
 work. It represents the results of class-room experi- 
 ence. ‘The work has been tried in manuscript form, 
 both with my classes and with private students, and 
 has, therefore, the advantage, so important in this 
 class of books, of having been given a practical test. . 
 
PREFACE. vil 
 
 Part I. includes the thirty-two lessons, which will afford 
 sufficient preparation for the reading of the Greek, 
 the first letter of John, the Beatitudes and the Lord’s 
 Prayer from Matthew, the chapter on the Prodigal 
 Son from Luke, and the thirteenth of First Corinthians. 
 These selections are given in Wescott and Hort’s read- 
 ing and are followed by notes and vocabulary. Of the 
 epistle there is given a translation of three chapters, 
 two literal and one quoted from the Revised Version. 
 This translation may serve for retranslation in case 
 the reading is taken up inductively apart from the 
 lessons. In Part II. are found the essentials of the 
 grammar, embracing, in the first part, the alphabet, 
 table of consonants, vowel and euphonic changes, 
 in the second part, the declension of nouns, pronouns, 
 adjectives, participles, the conjugation of verbs, the 
 optatives of the New Testament, a table of about eighty 
 irregular verbs, and the special study in the classes of 
 verbs and the most common irregular verbs. 
 
 In all verbal forms the aim has been to confine the 
 forms given, to New Testament usage. In the third 
 part of the grammar the main features of the syntax 
 are illustrated with quotations from the New Testa- 
 ment Greek. The prepositions also are. discussed 
 somewhat and accompanied with sentences illustrating 
 New Testament peculiarities. 
 
 I have made the explanations in the lessons so full 
 that much progress may be made by private study, 
 without a teacher. ‘The lessons as arranged represent 
 but one way of applying the Word Lists. The Greek 
 text, the convenient form of declensions and conjuga- 
 
vill PREFACE. 
 
 tions, afford opportunity for the teacher to exercise 
 his own judgment in putting the student in control of 
 the elementary work. 
 
 I wish:-here to acknowledge my great indebtedness 
 to Professors Bradley and Horswell for the use of their 
 Word Lists, which they so very kindly put at my dis- 
 posal. Without the great labour which they had already 
 performed, my work would have been either impossible 
 or the labour of producing it would have been very 
 greatly increased. 
 
 I wish especially to express my great indebtedness 
 to Rev. Charles Horswell, Ph.D., Professor of Hebrew 
 in Garrett Biblical Institute, for invaluable assistance. 
 Without his suggestion the work would not have been 
 begun, nor completed without his encouragement and 
 co-operation. Whatever of merit this little book may 
 have, it owes much to his rare scholarship and his wide 
 experience as a teacher of the New Testament lan- 
 guage. Forno errors, however, which the work may 
 contain is he at all responsible. For valuable assist- 
 ance in correction of the proof I have to express my 
 thanks to Mr. E. A. Bechtel, A.M., and Mr. W. W. 
 Bishop, A.M., Instructors in Classics in Northwestern 
 University. The proof has been read, in part, also, 
 by Professor Milton S. Terry, D.D., Garrett Biblical 
 Institute, and by Professor Henry A. Buttz, D.D., 
 Drew Theological Seminary. I owe much to the 
 valuable suggestions of these well-known scholars. 
 
 J. H. HUDDILSTON. 
 
 NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY, 
 Evanston, ILt., May 29, 1895. 
 
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 
 
 i 
 
 ASIDE from the corrections of typographical errors, 
 few changes have been introduced in this new edi- 
 tion. My. time since the publication of the book has 
 been so occupied in other lines of study that it has 
 been impossible for me to enlarge certain parts of 
 the grammar which the favourable reception of the 
 work would have warranted. 
 
 I am under special obligation to Professor John 
 Humphrey Barbour, Middletown, Conn., who has 
 very kindly gone over the whole work and favoured 
 
 me with his valuable criticism. 
 J. H. H. 
 
 BERLIN, GERMANY, 
 August, 1896. 
 
CONTIENEL Ss 
 
 ———_ 
 PAGES 
 INTRODUCTION -..022 « ve-is a) a ee) ee 
 BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . oO ES ae ee 
 SUGGESTIONS TO THE STUDENT 5 DSF -: Sane Res XxVli | 
 PART I. — LESSONS; TEXT. 
 Lessons 1.-XX X10 2 Sa es I-90. 
 SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION . . . - + + + «+ QI-IIO 
 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS = 2y"5)oes0 st - 6 500 eee Ili 
 NoTES ON SELECTIONS . . + = -; |.) oe eee ee 
 TRANSLATIONS OF First EPISTLE OF Tous d mer pel Teo 
 VOCABULARY OF ‘SELECTIONS >. "= 739750 75) geese ee pee 
 PART II.—GRAMMAR. 
 
 1. Writinc AND Sounp: Alphabet, Vowel Changes, 
 Accent, Ete.) ©.» ta) 's)) suites 50s aerate 
 
 2. AccIDENCE: Declension of Nouns, Adjectives, 
 
 Pronouns, Participles; Conjugation of Verbs; 
 
 Optatives of the New Testament; Irregular 
 Verbs... +) + el) ml = a) bale gn 
 3° SYNTAX «9. © gp  ©) 8 cee ae 
 INDEXES . . . . . ° e . . ° ° ° . . . 223-233 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 ae 
 
 My purpose is to offer here a few considerations 
 on two questions. 1. Why was the New Testament 
 written in Greek? 2. What are the main points of 
 difference between this Greek and that of the classical 
 period ? 
 
 Every one knows that Greek was not a native of 
 Palestine, but that in some way this exotic plant found 
 root there, and, to the exclusion of the native language, 
 became the organ of the everlasting Gospel. How 
 then did this occur ? 
 
 It will first be necessary to understand something 
 about the languages which were used in the countries 
 to the east from the Mediterranean, prior to and con- 
 temporary with the advent of the Greek. All of this 
 part of Asia, including the countries from Assyria on 
 the north to Arabia on the south, had one separate and 
 distinct family or branch of languages, — the Semitic. 
 Of this primitive Semitic nothing is left us. Long 
 before the curtain of history rises, the early language 
 had assumed marked grammatical and lexigraphical 
 peculiarities among the various peoples. Accordingly 
 we know nothing of the parent speech except through 
 
 x1 
 
xl INTRODUCTION. 
 
 the tongues of these early nations. The Assyrians 
 (whose language is known from cuneiform inscrip- 
 tions) and the Aramaeans, who comprised a large 
 part of the population of Assyria and Babylon and 
 to whose language, the Aramaic, we shall refer later, 
 represented the most northern group of the Semitic. 
 South of these we find the Hebrews of Canaan, in 
 whose language the most considerable portion of the 
 Old Testament was written, and akin to them the Phoe- 
 nicians, whose language is known to us imperfectly and 
 through inscriptions only. Further south the Arabic 
 and Ethiopic make up what is sometimes termed the 
 South Semitic. Of these three groups, the North, the 
 Middle, and the South Semitic, we shall confine our 
 considerations to the first two; for here it is that we 
 have to look for the language of the Jews. Their 
 Hebrew was early exposed to the dialects of the sur- 
 rounding tribes and especially open to Aramaic influ- 
 ences on the north. Indeed as early as 700 B.c. 
 we read that the messengers of the king Hezekiah 
 requested the ambassador of the king of Assyria to 
 speak to them in Aramaic, “for we understand z¢” 
 (ii. Kings 18:26). The Jews would not long retain 
 their language in its early purity beside that of another 
 people who, as a conquering nation, were continually 
 insinuating themselves into their life and politics. The 
 result was that long before the breaking up of the 
 Jewish kingdom in 586 B.c., the Hebrew had departed 
 considerably from its original integrity. During the 
 long years of captivity in Babylon and throughout the 
 Babylonian empire, the Aramaic, which was the official 
 
INTRODUCTION. Xiil 
 
 language of the Babylonian court, must have become 
 quite as much a part of the Hebrews as their native 
 tongue. The books of the Old Testament written after 
 the exile, Ezra and Daniel, are known as the Aramaic 
 books, owing to the fact that considerable portions of 
 them are in tke Aramaic. We must not understand, 
 however, that this large admixture of Aramaic is due 
 wholly to the years of exile in Babylon. It has been 
 the accepted view since the time of Jerome that in 
 this period the Israelites ceased to speak and write 
 Hebrew and turned to the use of the Aramaic only. 
 Hence the term Chaldee, so often used to signify the 
 speech of the Jews, as though the language of the 
 Chaldees — the Aramaic — was introduced into Pales- 
 tine by the returned exiles, and that subsequent to this 
 the Hebrew died out and the Chaldee or Aramaic took 
 its place. In recent years scholars have generally 
 parted with this view, and have attempted to show that 
 the change was more gradual. This seems by all 
 means the most probable. A people retains its lan- 
 guage long after its institutions and customs have 
 ceased to exist. A conquering nation rarely succeeds 
 in supplanting the language of the conquered. Slowly 
 and gradually do the forces work that bring in the ele- 
 ments of a new speech. ‘The English, for example, 
 has not after five centuries entirely displaced the 
 Celtic of Ireland, nor has Welsh ceased to be a very 
 important factor in the literature and life of the United 
 Kingdom, notwithstanding the fact that more than 
 500 years have passed since Edward built his castles 
 on the Welsh frontier. 
 
xiv INTRODUCTION. 
 
 We must conclude therefore that for centuries the 
 Aramaic gradually gained in popularity over the 
 Hebrew, until the latter became at last the language 
 of scholars and the learned few, while to the great 
 mass of Jews the Aramaic was the only language known. 
 This change must have occurred before the time of 
 Christ ; for we find then that the common people no 
 longer understood the Hebrew of the Scriptures, but 
 used instead versions known as Targums, written in 
 Aramaic. This then is the language of Palestine at 
 the time of Christ, and the same which in the New 
 Testament is called Hebrew. 
 
 A great distinction, however, must be made between 
 this Jewish-Aramaic and the Hebrew. The literature 
 of each is sacred, but of the Hebrew we have left us 
 the scant remains of the Old Testament only, while 
 the former has extant a vast literature of the Talmud, 
 Targums, and interpretative works, and has lived on in 
 a more or less changed condition till the present time, 
 and forms the basis of the language much used by the 
 Jews to-day throughout the world. 
 
 At the close of the fourth century B.c., Alexander of 
 Macedon crossed the historic Hellespont, overtirned 
 the Persian empire at Arbela, destroyed the famous 
 city of ancient Tyre, overran all western Asia, even 
 crossing into Egypt, where he founded the world’s new 
 metropolis bearing his own name (332 B.c.). It is 
 hard to measure the results of this conquering of the 
 world. By no means the least important of the many 
 that might be described was the spread of Greek 
 letters and Greek civilization. ‘This nobie language 
 
INTRODUCTICN. XV 
 
 of ancient Hellas, so rich and beautiful, so full of 
 power and sweetness, was destined to work far greater 
 results in the minds and hearts of men than the brief 
 rule of Alexander and his successors. They soon 
 passed away, and the Greek kingdom in Asia ceased 
 to exist; but the Greek language which came with 
 them still remained and spread with great rapidity 
 throughout this whole territory, revealing to these 
 Semitic races a new world of beauty and power. 
 Although Greece soon fell under the conquering hand 
 of Rome, Greek art and Greek letters took captive 
 her captor. Rome was then the world, while through 
 all her borders the language of Greece became the 
 speech of trade and intercourse. Greek was even the 
 language of the Roman court, and Roman boys were 
 taught their Homer along with their native Vergil. 
 The wide use of Greek at that period can be best 
 compared with the English of to-day. It may be said 
 with little hesitancy that, at the time of Christ, Greek 
 was known in all parts of the Roman world. What 
 more fitting language than this in which to send forth 
 the Gospel of peace ? 
 
 In Palestine there was of course a Greek population 
 which existed alongside of the Jewish, and which 
 became more numerous and distinct with the spread 
 of Roman civilization. Of these two languages, Greek 
 and Aramaic, we must suppose that a considerable 
 part of the population knew enough for conversation 
 at least. It is necessary to turn only to Alsace-Lorraine 
 with its French and German, or to Wales with its Welsh 
 and English, to find in modern times such a fusion of 
 
Xvi . INTRODUCTION. 
 
 two tongues as must have existed in Palestine at the 
 beginning of our era. 
 
 The question as to whether Christ and his disciples 
 knew and spoke Greek has been one that has long 
 been debated. Some of the most illustrious of modern 
 critics have been found on either side. It is not for 
 me to enter upon it here, but simply to state my belief. 
 It is more than probable, from what has been stated 
 in regard to the two languages of Palestine at this 
 period, that Greek, as well as Aramaic, must have fallen 
 upon the ears of our Lord and his first followers from 
 their earliest boyhood, and that all of them grew up 
 in continual association with two languages. A few 
 examples of this native speech are left us; Mark 5 : 41 
 and Mark 7:34 may be referred to. Instances when 
 we may conclude that Greek was used by Christ are, 
 Mark 7:26, 27, and John 12:23. Matthew, from 
 his duty as a tax-collector, would have required both 
 languages, while Luke, the most cultured of the evange- 
 lists, exhibits marked power in his use of Greek. There 
 was but one way of reaching “all nations”’ and send- 
 ing to them the new message. ‘There never could have 
 been any doubt in the mind of Luke, Mark, or John 
 regarding the language they should employ in writing 
 their histories of our Lord’s life and works. Matthew 
 appears to have written first in the Aramaic, but no 
 doubt followed this immediately with a Greek version. 
 A parallel to this may be observed in the case of 
 ‘the historian Josephus (A.D. 38-103), who wrote his 
 history of the Jews first in Hebrew (Aramaic), and 
 afterwards in Greek. it is not necessary to note 
 
INTRODUCTION. XVii 
 
 concerning Paul that “all who are at Rome” and the 
 “church at Corinth” and “the churches throughout 
 Asia”’ could have been addressed in no language but 
 the Greek. 
 
 A considerable portion of the population at Alex- 
 andria was Jews, for whom the Greek had displaced 
 their native Aramaic, and as early as 275 B.c. they 
 had so far forgotten the tongue of their fathers that 
 they required a Greek translation of the Old Testa- 
 ment. This was made at Alexandria by Jewish-Greeks, 
 and is known as the Septuagint or the translation of 
 the LXX. For the Jews scattered throughout the 
 world in Cappadocia, Cyprus, Phrygia, Rhodes, Greece, 
 and Rome the Septuagint became the Bible. So 
 general was its use even in Palestine that the evange- 
 lists quote quite as frequently from the Greek version 
 as from the Hebrew. Paul, himself a Hebrew and 
 reared according to the strictest sect of the Pharisees, 
 often agrees more nearly with the Septuagint when he 
 quotes from the Old Testament. 
 
 After the fall of Jerusalem the Jewish population of 
 Rome, Alexandria, Antioch, and other seaport towns, 
 rapidly increased. Then, as now, the Jews were a 
 commercial people; Greek was the one language of 
 commercial intercourse. Thus we see this wonderful 
 language served as acommon bond to hold together 
 Jew and Gentile, Greek and Roman. Then it was 
 that men were for the first time united by one speech 
 and made, so to speak, into one family. With the 
 overturning of old, worn-out kingdoms, and the break- 
 ing down of ancient myth and fable of the pagan world, 
 
XVili INTRODUCTION. 
 
 a new soil was prepared ready for new seed,— the 
 Gospel of love. 
 
 Secondly, we come to consider the characteristics of 
 the Greek of the New Testament. Does it differ very 
 widely from classical Greek? ‘To this the answer is 
 “yes,” and we may well rejoice that it does. Had 
 the Janguage as used by Plato and Demosthenes become 
 the organ of the new message to the world, how dif- 
 ferent would have been the effect! Imagine the 
 result if the simple grace of our English Bible were to 
 be replaced by the swelling periods of Milton or Bacon. 
 A far simpler language was and is needed by the lowly, 
 and this we shall see the later Greek to be. 
 
 The language of the Macedonian Greeks, which was 
 the same as that carried into Asia by Alexander, was 
 essentially the same as that which Plato, Sophocles, 
 and Demosthenes had used. From this wide diffusion, 
 however, many changes were effected in the gram- 
 matical structure of the language, and especially in the 
 vocabulary. Much of the rigidness which had charac- 
 terized it in the hands of the great Athenian writers 
 was cast aside. The language was popularized, so to 
 speak. This new form of the Greek was called Hel- 
 lenistic Greek, and the people who learned and used 
 it were known as Hellenists. We have had occasion 
 already to refer to the Hellenistic Jews in Alexandria 
 and other cities. 
 
 In Palestine, however, as well as in the other 
 Semitic countries, this Hellenistic Greek was greatly 
 corrupted by the native tongue. Hebrew, Aramaic, 
 and Syriac words were being continually introduced 
 
INTRODUCTION. xin 
 
 into the Greek. To a large number of people who 
 would use the Greek, it would amount to nothing other 
 than a translation of their native tongue, together with 
 the native idiom. ‘Their thinking was all in Aramaic, 
 while their words were in Greek. ‘The literature of the 
 Hebrew and Aramaic was entirely of a religious nature. 
 The religious fervour of the Jews gave a strong bent to 
 the tone of their language. It was the language of the 
 human heart longing for the kingdom of God and 
 the coming of the Messiah. ‘The words in common, 
 every-day use were the same as those in which had 
 been cast the revelation of God to his chosen »deople. 
 Even at an early day this must have given a deep 
 religious colouring to the Greek —hitherto a pagan 
 language. The translation, however, of the Old Testa- 
 ment did most to fix the idiom and form of the Greek 
 for the expression of religious ideas. ‘Then it was that 
 Greek meant something to the Jews beyond a con- 
 venient means of intercourse for commercial life. 
 For two centuries and a half this Greek Bible worked 
 into the hearts and minds of the dispersed Jews, and 
 the words that before in pagan Greece and Rome had 
 meant little beyond the mortal and perishable of this 
 world, took on a new meaning — fired with the flame 
 of the sacred Hebrew. 
 
 When we come to the language of the New Testa- 
 ment, we have crossed a wondrous gulf. To quote 
 from the words of the celebrated Dr. Schaff: “The 
 language of the apostles and evangelists is baptized 
 with the spirit and fire of Christianity, and receives a 
 character altogether peculiar and distinct from secular 
 
XX INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Greek. ... The Greek was flexible and elastic 
 enough to admit of a transformation under the inspir- 
 ing influences of revealed truth. It furnished the flesh 
 and blood for the incarnation of divine ideas. Words 
 in common use among the classics, or in popular 
 intercourse, were clothed with a deeper spiritual 
 significance ; they were transplanted from a lower to 
 a higher sphere, from mythology to revelation, from 
 the order of nature to the order of grace, from the 
 realm of sense to the realm of faith.” It is worth 
 while to note the word “ transformation ” in the above. 
 Here is the key to the whole question. How rich this 
 baptism of the pagan words has been may be seen by 
 _ comparing the New Testament and the classical sense 
 of such words as “ove, Saith, Lrophel, sin, glory, peace, 
 Joy, mercy. 
 
 The purity of the New Testament Greek differs 
 very considerably in different authors, and indeed in 
 one and the same writer we can observe two extremes. 
 Luke, for example, in the first four verses of his gospel 
 furnishes a specimen of as pure and elegant Greek as 
 may be found on the page of any classical author. 
 Immediately, however, he drops off into the vernacu- 
 lar, as though aware that he is addressing the many 
 and not the few. In considerable portions of his 
 gospel and the Acts are to be found the harshest 
 Hebraisms. ‘This is especially noticeable when he 
 quotes from the Old Testament. In all the writers of 
 the New Testament, the Hebrew of the Old Testament 
 quotation appears distinctly through the thin veiling 
 of the Greek. 
 
INTRODUCTION. Xxi 
 
 Of the four evangelists Luke was the best educated, 
 and therefore used the purest Greek. Matthew may 
 be placed next, with Mark last. Concerning John, 
 there is great difference of opinion. Some scholars 
 declare his gospel the most thoroughly Hebrew of the 
 four. It is said to have a Hebrew body with a Greek 
 dress. On the other hand, there are those who main- 
 tain for him the purest Greek. ‘The fact is, his short 
 sentences would fall naturally into the idiom of almost 
 any language. Paul’s Greek exhibits nearly every 
 variety of classic elegance. However, it does not 
 come within the scope of this article to give the pecu- 
 liarities of the individual authors. 
 
 It is necessary to speak more definitely as regards 
 the linguistic differences between the Greek of the 
 New Testament and that of the period of classical 
 Greek, which we may consider to have closed with 
 Aristotle (B.c. 384-322). 1. The vocabulary of the 
 New Testament furnishes nearly 900 words that are 
 not found in the classical writers. Many of these 
 occur in subsequent authors, as Polybius and Plutarch 
 and in the Septuagint. 2. Compound words are 
 especially common. Rare combinations are used. 
 The etymology always reveals the force of the expres- 
 sion. 3. What is called the doctrinal sense of certain 
 words, as love, hope, faith, introduces a new element 
 quite distinct from anything earlier. 
 
 Grammatically, very wide changes from the classical 
 Greek may be noted. 1. The dual number has dis- 
 appeared entirely. 2. Adjectives of the third declen- 
 sion in -wy (-07) and -vs (-ws) are especially rare. Of 
 
Xxil : INTRODUCTION. 
 
 adjectives in -ys (-és) there are but two or three com- 
 mon examples. 3. The comparison of adjectives has 
 been simplified, and is usually done by the use of an 
 adverb, and the positive degree, except in the case 
 of a few adjectives of irregular comparison. 
 
 In the verb a great breaking away from classical 
 usage is seen. 1. The optative mood is comparatively 
 rare. It does not occur at all in the writings of John, 
 and is found in the epistles and the Acts more than in 
 the gospels. Except in the optative of wzsh or desire, 
 the subjunctive regularly takes the place of this mood. 
 2. In the uses of the voice and tense the changes are 
 not so marked. In the subjunctive rarely any tense 
 occurs aside from the present and the aorist. 3. It 
 may be observed that in the verbs those in -w (-m7) 
 tend to break down into the ending in -w (-0), while 
 verbs in -iCw (-¢ds0) are much more common than 
 in other Greek. 4. The forms in -yw (-mz) in the 
 present system are comparatively rare. Hardly ever 
 does the present subjunctive of these verbs occur, 
 while the second aorist system has few forms in this 
 mood. 
 
 The syntax is too difficult a question to discuss here, 
 and so but few points shall be presented. 1. Especially 
 characteristic of New Testament Greek are the various 
 uses of fva (Aina), which in classical Greek is confined 
 for the most part to the introduction of f#a/ clauses. 
 Of this conjunction there are no less than six well- 
 defined uses in the New Testament. 2. While in 
 classical Greek the conjunction ore (ost) is used 
 with either the indicative or infinitive to denote result, 
 
INTRODUCTION. Xxiil 
 
 and with nearly equal frequency in both constructions, 
 the indicative occurs but twice in the New Testament. 
 3. The participle still continues a fundamental form 
 of construction, but shows signs of weakening in such 
 instances as Jobn 11:1 and Luke 15:1, where the 
 simple imperfect of the verb would have been expected. 
 This form of expression is most common in Luke. 
 
 The prepositions present a great variety of uses not 
 inherent in the Greek word, thus betraying Hebrew 
 influence. 
 
 These are only a few of the most marked pecu- 
 liarities of the language of the New Testament, but 
 perhaps enough to show that it is much weakened 
 and simplified as compared with classical Greek. If 
 one adds to the grammatical peculiarities here men- 
 tioned the strong colouring in idiom and vocabulary 
 that arises from the Hebrew, a general notion may be 
 formed as to the structure of this language. 
 
 To know thoroughly the real force and value of this 
 language, a wide familiarity with Semitic — especially 
 Hebrew and Aramaic —is indispensable. Not only 
 this, but the investigator must know Latin, of the 
 influence of which I have taken no notice, as well as 
 Greek from its earliest beginning in Homer. Such 
 preparation as this few are able to acquire. A student 
 may, however, gain a very satisfactory facility in 
 handling the New Testament language, who knows 
 nothing of any language except his own. Careful, 
 assiduous labour for a few months will put the average 
 student in control of the essentials, and this slight 
 acquaintance will be found to repay one a thousand- 
 
XXIV . INTRODUCTION. 
 
 fold. No one can ever attain to the ability of reading 
 and understanding the grand simplicity and power of 
 John’s brief sentences, ringing as they do with the 
 imperishable grandeur of the Greek, without seeing 
 an entirely new power in the Word. Any translation 
 must ever fall far short of rendering the grace and 
 force of the Greek. As a rose when plucked loses 
 its sweetness and the fragrance is soon blown, so 
 perishes in translation that fleeting, indescribable 
 something that makes Greek the noblest of lan- 
 guages. : 
 
 The following list of books is recommended as rep- 
 resenting perhaps the most helpful works for students 
 of the New Testament Greek. ‘Those marked * are 
 particularly valuable for the beginner. 
 
 For assistance in making up this list the author has 
 to express his indebtedness to Professor C. IF’. Brad- 
 ley, D.D., Garrett Biblical Institute. He has very 
 kindly given me the benefit of his wide knowledge 
 of New Testament bibliography. 
 
 Text. *The New Testament in the Original Greek 
 (School Edition). Westcott and Hort. Macmillan 
 & Co., New York, 1893. $1.25. 
 
 This edition is also published with a lexicon, by the 
 same publishers. $1.90. 
 
 LEXICON. *Thayer’s Grimm’s Wilke, Greek-English 
 Lexicon of the New Testament, “Corrected Edi- 
 tion.” Harper & Brothers, New York, 1889. 
 $5.00. 
 
BIBLIOGRAPHY. XXV 
 
 GRAMMAR. *Winer’s Grammar of New Testament Greek 
 (Ninth English Edition). Trans. by Moulton. 
 T. & T. Clark, Edinburgh, 1882. $3.60. 
 
 CONCORDANCE. *Bruder’s Concordance of All the Words 
 in the Greek New Testament (Fourth Edition). 
 Leipzig, 1888. 25 M. 
 
 A new edition of this monumental work, which will 
 
 include the readings of Westcott and Hort, is to be 
 published. 
 
 Bagster’s Englishman’s Greek Concordance of the New 
 Testament. London, 1883. £1, Is. 
 
 *Bradley and Horswell’s New Testament Word Lists. 
 Greek-English. Series I. and II. Garrett Biblical 
 Institute, Evanston, Ill. 35 cents each. 
 
 *Burton’s Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New Testa- 
 ment Greek. Chicago University. Press (Second 
 Edition). $1.50. 
 
 *Buttman’s Grammar of the New Testament. Trans. by 
 Thayer. W. F. Draper, Andover, Mass. $2.75. 
 Hatch’s Essays on Biblical Greek. Macmillan & Co., 
 
 New York. $2.75. 
 
 Robinson’s Greek Harmony of the Gospels. Ed. by M. B. 
 Riddle. Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston, 1885. 
 $2.00. 
 
 *Schaff’s Companion to the Greek Testament and English 
 Version (Fourth Edition). Harper & Brothers, New 
 York, 1892. $2.75. 
 
 Simcox’s (W.H.) The Language of the New Testament. 
 Thomas Whitaker, New York, 75 cents. By the 
 same author, The Writers of the New Testament. 
 Same publishers and price. 
 
 Terry’s Biblical Hermeneutics. Hunt and Eaton, New 
 York. $4.00. 
 
XXVi BIBLIOGRAPHY. 
 
 *Thayer’s Books and their Use, A Lecture, to which is 
 added a list of books for students of the New Tes- 
 tament Greek. Houghton, Mifflin & Co., Boston. 
 75 cents. 
 
 An exceedingly helpfui little volume. 
 
 Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Eleventh 
 Edition). Macmillan & Co., New York, 1390. $3.50. 
 
 *Warfield’s An Introduction to the Textual Criticism of 
 the New Testament. Whitaker, New York. 75 cents. 
 
 Westcott’s Introduction to the Study of the Four Gospels 
 (Seventh Edition, American Edition). Macmillan & 
 Co., New York. $2.25. 
 
 *Westcott and Hort’s The New Testament in the Original 
 Greek. 2 vols. Harper & Brothers, New York. 
 
 Vol. I. includes the text. Vol. II. has an Intro- 
 duction to Textual Criticism and an Appendix. Price ~ 
 per vol. $2.00. Complete $3.50. 
 
SUGGESTIONS TO THE STUDENT. 
 
 ee 
 
 1. All vocabularies must be thoroughly mastered. Writ- 
 ‘ng the words several times will greatly help to fix them in 
 the mind. Pronouncing the Greek aloud is helpful. 
 
 2. The acquisition of forms (z.e. declensions and conju- 
 gations) must keep pace with the matter of a vocabulary. 
 
 3. It is recommended that at least thirty lessons be mas- 
 tered before the reading of the Greek text is attempted. 
 
 4. Care should be taken in learning points of syntax 
 that occur in the lessons. 
 
 5. When the text is finally begun, the table of irregular 
 verbs (§ 88) should be committed to memory. Also the 
 verb forms in §$ go-110 should be carefully studied. 
 
 6. When the Greek Testament is taken up, the syntax 
 in Part III. may be studied to best advantage. At no time 
 should the student fail to keep up the review of Part II. 
 
 7. Finally, learn words, words, words. Only steady 
 application and continual review will bring satisfactory 
 
 results. 
 XXV1i 
 

 
PART I.—LESSONS: TEXT 
 

 
john EN ICINAM We 1G e 
 Ni Wee Po LAW ENG GRE BK 
 
 ——-0595,00—_——_ 
 LESSON I. 
 ik: VOCABULARY. 
 axovw, J hear. Btw, 7 wish, will. éyw, 7 say. 
 ywookw, 7 kuow. dadréw, J speak. mortevw, / believe. 
 éxo, [ have. AapBave, 7 Zake. mow, J do, make. 
 
 a. Each of these words occurs more than 200 times in 
 the New Testament, and some of them I500 times. 
 
 2. Notes on the Vocabulary. 
 
 a. a-kov-w, a-kot-6, 7 hear; cf. ACOUSTIC. a=a in 
 father ; k=hard ¢, as in can; ov is a diphthong com- 
 posed of o and v (English 0 and wz) and pronounced like 
 ou in group; w=6 in note. The mark (’) over the initial 
 vowel of this word is called the breathing. Note the turn 
 from right to left. This is called the szooth breathing, 
 and it does not affect the sound of the vowel. The mark 
 (‘) over the ov is the acute accent. The ending -w equals 
 / in English. 
 
 b. yi-vii-oKw, gi-no-ské, 7 know. y=hard g, as in 
 get; u=z in machine; v=n; o=s. Observe the same 
 accent and on the same syllable as in dkovw. 
 
 B I 
 
2 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 c. é&yw, é-chd, J have. e=e in let; x =ch, of which 
 there is no equivalent sound in English. It is found in 
 the German duch. Cf. chasm pronounced in a harsh gut- 
 tural tone. The accent and breathing, when they occur on 
 the same syllable, are written together, as here. All words 
 beginning with a vowel have a breathing mark. 
 
 d. 6é-u, thé-l6, 7 well or J wish. O= thin thin; X=. 
 
 e. Na-Aé-w, 1a-lé-6, 7 sfeak. The accent occurs on 
 what syllable of the verb so far? 
 
 f. Xap-Ba-ve, lam-ba-no, J take. p=; B=. 
 
 g. dé&yo, lé-gd, [ say. 
 
 h. xi-orev-w, pi-stea-d, 7 believe. m= p; T=%; €v 
 =the diphthong ew in fewd. When the accent comes 
 on a diphthong, it is placed over the second vowel, as 
 here. Cf. dxovw. 
 
 Z. ToOl-€-w. poi-e-, I do, or make; cf. POET, POETRY. 
 ou is a diphthong pronounced like o¢ in o7/. 
 
 3. Topics for study. 
 
 a. The vowels in this lesson are a, €,t,0,v,. The 
 following diphthongs occur: ov, ev, ot. The consonants 
 Alea a ye §=th, k=h, A=), p=mM,v=N, =f, 
 PosG eis Ye 
 
 b. In the matter of the accent of verbs the following 
 must be noted. 1. The accent is always recessive, 7.é. it 
 goes back as far as possible from the last syllable. 2. The 
 last syllable determines the position of the accent. 3. If 
 the last syllable is long, the accent always occurs on the 
 next to the last syllable—the enw ; otherwise on the 
 third syllable—the antepenult. 4. A syllable is long if it 
 has a long vowel or a diphthong in it. 
 
 4. In English we have the personal pronouns 
 written generally before the verb and always 
 
PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 3 
 
 separate from the verb. In Greek, on the con, 
 trary, the pronouns are often found as an 
 integral part of the verb, forming what is called 
 the personal endings. Cf. -w in the verbs given 
 above. In the case of most verbs the ending 
 -wt of the I per. sing. pres. ind. act. is dropped, 
 and the preceding vowel is lengthened in com- 
 pensation. “.¢. the primary form of Aéyw is 
 Néy-o-t, Of Akovw iS aKov-0-pwL: axov = stem, 0 = 
 ‘variable vowel, ws = personal ending. 
 
 LESSONS 
 5. PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 I. A€éy-w, 7 say. I. €y-0-pev, we Say. 
 2. A€y-ets,) you say. 2. A€y-e-Te, Ve Say. 
 3. N€y-er, Ze, She, or zt savs. 3. A€y-ovor, they say. 
 
 Observe from tie translation appended that 
 the indicative mood has in Greek the same 
 declarative force as in English. 
 
 a. eas in deyes is a diphthong and equals ed in height. 
 
 6. Note in the conjugation of Aéyw: 1. The 
 theme Aey- appears unchanged throughout. 
 2. A vowel occurs after this theme. 3. The 
 
 is at the close of a word, but o in the middle of a word. 
 
4 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 vowel is o or e (often written %), called the 
 
 variable vowel. 4. The variable vowel is fol. 
 
 lowed by an ending, as -yev, -7e, in the plur., 
 
 which is called the personal ending. See 4. 
 How many distinct parts has Aéy-o-pev? 
 
 7. The personal endings of the active voice, 
 primary ! tenses, are seen in the following: 
 
 Sing. 1. -pr, J. Plur. 1. -pev, we. 
 2. -s, thou. Z. -Te, Ve. 
 3. -ov (tt), Ae, she, zt. 3. -vor, they. 
 
 8. The variable vowel and the personal end 
 ing may be seen in the following: 
 
 O-pt O-[Lev 
 €-S €-TE 
 €-OL 0-vot 
 
 Note that o occurs before pu, prev, and vor, 2.2. 
 before p and », e occurring in all other places. 
 
 9. Certain changes take place in these primi 
 tive forms, which give the following: 
 
 -a, J. -Opev, WE. 
 -es, thou. -€Te, Ve. 
 -er, ie, she, it. -over, they. 
 
 These forms must be absolutely mastered. 
 
 1 See § 52 for the meaning of the word primary. (Where 
 reference is made to the grammar, a section mark [§] precedes the 
 figure, otherwise the reference is to the first part, — the lessons.) 
 
PRESENT INDICATIVE ACTIVE, 5 
 
 10. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. Translate into English: 
 
 / 
 I. ANapBavet, axover, OéreTe. 2. TicTEvoO, Aap- 
 / BA / / / 
 Bavovot, Exovot, Trovew. 3. AauPBaveTe, Oérets, 
 fi 7 
 TLOTEVELS. 4. YLVWOKELS, UKOVOVGL, EyomEV, Né- 
 / 4 
 yeTe. 5. OéXovEL, yLVOOKETE, TLOTEVOMEV, AKOVELS. 
 , / Se 
 6. AapBavels, Tid TEVETE, AKOVEL. 
 
 II. Translate into Greek: 
 
 1. I take, you wish, they know. 2. I have, 
 ye say, they have, we say.. 3. You take, he 
 hears, we have. 4. You believe, ye believe, 
 they hear. 5. We know, they know, I say, they 
 do.t 6. We wish, we speak,! ye do. 
 
 Let the student analyze each verb form carefully, point- 
 ing out the theme, variable vowel, and the personal end- 
 ing. Apply also the principles of accent given in 3, d. 
 
 1It is recommended that the teacher allow the matter of 
 contract verbs to pass unnoticed, till the principles of contrac- 
 tion appear gradually in the lessons. No harm need arise from 
 the student’s writing uncontracted forms. The frequent occur: 
 rence of these verhs in -ew explains their appearance here, 
 
6 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 THE SECOND OR O-—DECLENSION. 
 
 11. VOCABULARY. 
 aptos, bread. Xpovos, ¢2777e, CHRONO/ogy. 
 Opdvos, THRONE. ayyedos, ANGEL. 
 Koopos, world, COSMIC. avOpwrros, 77a71, ANTHROPO/ogy 
 Alos, stone, LITHOgraphy. amdartodos, APOSTLE. 
 Adyos, word, LOGIC. €pynpos, desert. 
 vopos, daw, eCcONOMY. Oavatos, death, THANATOPSZS. 
 oxAos, crowd. kvptos, Lord. 
 
 romos, Place, TOPOgraphy. 
 
 The student should learn thoroughly the mean- 
 ings of the words in each vocabulary, pronounc- 
 ing each word aloud, so as to be sure to get the 
 proper accent. The case endings are to be abso- 
 lutely mastered. Some of the words in this 
 vocabulary occur 1000 times in the New Tes- 
 tament. 
 
 a. apros, ar-tds. p=r; 0o=o in on. 
 
 6. In ayyedos the first y is pronounced like wg. This 
 is always true of y when followed by k, ~. or x. 
 
 c. In épypos, the y=, aud is pronounced like e in 
 they. 
 
 d. vin kvpios =z. There is no similar sound in Eng- 
 lish. See §1. The sound approaches ¢ in key. - 
 
 This includes all the vowels in Greek. 
 
THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 7 
 
 12. It 1s to be observed: :. All these nouns 
 end in -os. 2. All these nouns belong to the 
 O-declension. 3. They all have the acute 
 accent. | 
 
 13. All nouns in Greek come under one of 
 three declensions, 5 16 and 17. The following 
 is the second or O-declension : 
 
 Sing. lure 
 Nom. Aédyos, a word. Adyou, words. 
 Gen. Adyov, of a word. Asywv, of words. 
 
 Dat. Ady, Zo or fora word. dsyors, to or for words. 
 Acc. Adyov, a word (obj.). Adyous, words (obj.). 
 Voc. Adye, O word. Adyou, O words. 
 
 a. The ending -w in the dat. sing. is for -o. o is 
 lengthened to w, and t (zo¢a) is written underneath. This 
 is called zota-subscript, and can never be wanting in the 
 dat. sing. of this declension. 
 
 14. Observe from the above that there are five 
 cases in Greek: Nominative, Genitive, Dative, 
 Accusative, Vocative. The nominative equals 
 English nominative; the genitive equals Eng- 
 lish possessive or the objective with of, the 
 dative corresponds to the English indirect objec- 
 tive, Zo or for which anything zs or zs done, the 
 accusative is the English direct objective; the 
 vocative, which is rarely used, is the case of 
 address. Cf. § 21. 
 
8 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 15. In verbs we noted that the exdings are 
 especially important as showing the person and 
 number. So in nouns also the relation of nouns 
 to each other, and to the other parts of the sen- 
 tence, is denoted by the case endings. While in 
 English we have to depend (for the most part) 
 on prepositions such as /o, for, dy, zn, at, on, of, 
 etc., to express case relation, the Greek has 
 this relation expressed by the exdings of the 
 several cases. 
 
 (There are, of course, prepositions in Greek, 
 but these case endings are always observed 
 apart from the prepositions). 
 
 16. Observe that the accent on Adyos remains 
 on the same syllable throughout the declension. 
 This is the fundamental principle of accent in 
 nouns. The accent remains on the same syllable, 
 
 af possible. 
 
 17. Learn the declension of av@pwrros, § 23. 
 
 a. When the last syllable becomes long, as in the end- 
 ings -ov, -w, -wv, -ols, -ouvs (8, 4, 4), the accent cannot 
 remain on the antepenult, but removes to the penult. 
 Cf. the same principle in verbs, 3, 0. 
 
 6. Final o, although a diphthong, is considered short 
 in determining the place of accent in the O-declension. 
 
 c. The accent of the nominative must be learned by 
 observation. 
 
THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 9 
 
 18. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. amroctodkw, Opovwv, voor, ypdvots. 
 2. avOpwirot, Koopmov, AOyot KUplov. 3. OyrOs 
 > / , eg | v > / if: 
 avOpwtrav, vou@ kai! dydw. 4. aTdaToNos Aéyet. 
 5. amdaToXos eyes Adyov. 6. amTOaTOAOS RéyeEL 
 
 f ? , ” 5) f , 
 Noyov avOpoT@. 7. ayyerot akovovat. 8. Kodc- 
 
 a ” yf 
 fos mlaTevel. 9. AauwBaveTe ApTov. 10. dxXos 
 yiwooKker. 1. avOpwrrot Eyovaot vomovs. 
 
 II. 1. Of a man, toa throne, words of men. 
 2. Angels and men, to the world, of a desert. 
 3. Death of apostles. 4. He takes a stone. 
 5. Words of man to a world. 6. Ye say to 
 a crowd. 7. We have a place. 8. An angel 
 of (the) Lord. 9. We hear law and believe. 
 10. He has bread for apostles. 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 THE O-DECLENSION CONCLUDED. 
 
 19. VOCABULARY. 
 
 adeXds, brother. opPadpds, eve, OPHTHALMO- 
 Ocds, God. logy. 
 
 ads, People. vids, 5072. 
 
 vexpos, deceased, NECROlogy. 086s, way. 
 
 otpaves, Heaven. Sotdos, servant. 
 
 1 The acute accent ("), on a final syllable, is changed to the 
 grave E> when other words follow in a sentence. 
 
10 BSSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 olkos, House. mardiov, little chila. 
 epyov, work. mAoiov, boat. 
 
 tepov, fenzple. mpscwtrov, face. 
 ipariov, garment. ocdBBarov, SABBATH. 
 
 réxvov, child. 
 
 90, a. ddeAdds, 4-déi-phis. d=ad; 6=Ph in Phase. 
 
 6. In otpavos observe that the breathing occurs on the 
 second vowel of the diphthong. 
 
 c. The diphthong w, as in vids, is pronounced like wee. 
 The breathing is always rough (°), z.e. the explosion of 
 breath is so strong as to give an # sound. vi is, then, 
 pronounced whee. 
 
 d. Note the rough breathing on tuarvov, hi-ma-ti-6n, 
 and tepov, hi-é-r6n, 600s, hé-dés. 
 
 é. at as in waddov = az in azsle. 
 
 21. There are two principal accents in Greek, 
 the acute (“) and the circumflex ("). The acute 
 can occur on any one of the last three syllables, 
 while the circumflex can occur on one of the 
 last two. 
 
 22. Learn the declension of vids, soz, § 28, 
 and note that in every gen. and dat. the acute 
 (‘) is changed to a circumflex (°). 
 
 23. Learn the declension of dodXos, servant, 
 § 23, and observe that the circumflex accent 
 occurs on a /ovg syllable only, and when at the 
 same time the last syllable is short. When the 
 ultima becomes long, the (”) changes to the (’). 
 
THE SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. Il 
 
 24. Nouns of the O-declension end in -os 
 masc. (rarely fem.) and -oy neut. The inflection 
 of neuter nouns is the same as that of masculine 
 nouns, except that the nom., acc., and voc. sing. 
 end in -ov, and the same cases in the plur. end 
 in -a. Cf. dapov, gift, 5 93. 
 
 29. All adjs. in Greek are declined, and agree 
 in gender, number, and case with the words 
 they modify. The definite article ¢#e, 0, is an 
 adj. and is declined ; ¢.g. 0 do0Xos, the servant ; 
 Tov Oovrou, of the servant; to tékxvov, the child; 
 To Téxvo, to the child; ta téxva, the children; 
 TaV NOoywr, of the words. Learn the masc. and 
 
 neut. (o and 70) of the article, § 24. 
 
 26. EXERCISES. 
 
 a f A cal , 
 I. 1. T@ ROY@ Kai Tots Adyols. 2. THY SoUL@D 
 \ Lae / \ , tal > V4 
 Kal TO Taloiw. 3. TO caBBaTov Tols avOpwrTrais. 
 , a 4 
 4. 0 KUplos TOU GaBBaTov. 5. 0 adeAdos yive'- 
 oKeL TO TéExvov. 6. 0 aos EEL TOUS VOMOUs. 
 / 
 7. NapBavete aptov Kai ipatia. 8. ol atoaTo- 
 4 a . n A 
 Noe akovovot TOY Taidiov.! 9g. €v (iN) TO lep@ 
 , val é 
 Néyomev. 10. TOV KUPLOV TOU KOT MOU YLVWOKETE. 
 
 II. 1. In (év) the temple and in the boat. 
 2. To the people and of the people. 3. The 
 
 1 Verbs of hearing may be followed by the genitive case, as 
 the case of the direct object. 
 
£2 FSSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 eyes of the servant. 4. For the work and for 
 the garments. 5. Ye hear the people! 6. The 
 apostle knows the law. 7. I speak to the ser- 
 vants, and they hear. 8. The Lord has a 
 temple in Heaven. 9. We have the garments 
 for the children. to. The son of God knows 
 the world. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 THE PRESENT PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 
 
 27. VOCABULARY. 
 ayaa, J love. éyelpw, J raise up. 
 Bodro, 7 throw. wplvw, 7 judge. 
 Brérrw, 7 see. méptrw, / send. 
 ypadw, 7 write, GRAPHZC. otTé\d\w, / send. 
 
 Si8do0Kw, 7 teach, DIDACTic. cde, / save. 
 
 a. In owlw, save, € is a double consonant, ds, and 
 pronounced like dz in adze. 
 
 28. The passive voice, as in English, repre- 
 sents the subject as being acted upon. The 
 personal endings of the passive distinguish it 
 from the active. 
 
 Following are the primary pass. endings : 
 
 Sing. 1. -por, /. Plur. 1. -peOa, we. 
 2. -rat, you. 2. -7e, ye. 
 3. -Tar, he. 3. -vtTat, they. 
 
 1 See footnote, p. II. 
 
THE PRESENT PASSIVE INDICATIVE. 13 
 
 a. The variable vowel % is found as in the active 
 voice. Before mw and vy, o occurs, and before all other 
 endings ¢ is found. 
 
 29. The following is the conjugation of the 
 pres. pass. ind. of Av, / loose: 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 I. Av-o-pat, 7 az loosed. 1. dv-6-peOa, we are loosed. 
 2. Av-e, you are loosed. 2. db-e-0¥e, ye are loosed. 
 3. Adv-e-rar, Ae zs loosed. 3. Nb-0-vtTar, they are loosed. 
 
 a. Observe that the 2 per. sing. Aver is for Aveoat. 
 oa is dropped, and e and ce form the diphthong e«. 1 may 
 be found instead of ec. 
 
 6b. The same principle of accent is to be noted as 
 in 3, 4. at is considered short in the personal endings, 
 hence the accent occurs on the antepenult. 
 
 30. - EXERCISES. ‘ 
 
 / 
 I. 1. Barre ANNETAL, TTEMTTELS, TWéEMTTE- 
 2 
 / / / / 
 aOe. 2. xpiver, Kpivetat, duddoKxo, didadoKopat. 
 / , > 4 > / 
 3. AapwBavete, AauPavere, akovoval, AkoVOVTAL. 
 / 
 4. aterromeOa, Br€Errovat, ypadhomev. 5. owlere, 
 e 
 eyelpovol, TiaTEevomeV, ypadetar. 6. of avOpwrtrot 
 ° \ , 
 KplvovTa. 7. éyelpomeOa eis (into) Tov ovpavov. 
 . na , ic / 
 8. ypaderat év (in) TO voww. Q. 6 Vlogs avOparrov 
 a A 4 
 awverat. 10. €v Tw vaw! rAéyer Kal aKoveTaL. 
 II. 0 amécToXoL €is TOY KOGMOoV oTédAOVTAL. 
 ‘ee 4 
 12. mictevouev eis (on) Tov KUpLovy Kat owlo- 
 
 peda. 
 1 Temple. 
 
14 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 II. 1. He sees and is saved. 2. You believe 
 and are saved. 3. We judge and are judged. 
 4. Llhey sena*and are sent) 5," Hie taiseomun 
 the dead. 6. It is written in the laws. 7. We 
 see the brethren. 8. The son of man is judged. 
 9. The Lord hears inthe temple. 1omipsnes. 
 and am heard. «1. We are saved and are raised 
 up into Heaven. 12. Ye take the bread. 
 
 ‘ed 
 
 13. They know that \o7v) the Lord saves men. 
 
 We have so far met in the vocabularies 52 words, which 
 give more than 4oo different forms by their inflection. 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 
 
 31. VOCABULARY. 
 ayw, lead. xaréw, call. 
 Bamriftw, BAPTIZE. paptupéw, bear witness, 
 éxBiw, cat. ™ SRTYR. 
 taw, deve. péeAAw, a772 about. 
 {yréw, seek. pévw, “EMAIN. 
 
 For the tenses of the indicative mood see 
 $$ 50 and 52. The uses and meanings of the 
 various tenses will be explained as we advance. 
 
 32. The imperfect indicative represents an 
 act as golig on in time past, — continued, accus- 
 tomed, or repeated action; e.g. éypadov, J was 
 writing, édvov, 1 was loosing ; éBantibe, he was 
 baptizing 
 
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 15 
 
 33. All active secondary tenses (§ 52) have 
 the same personal endings, as follows: 
 
 Sing. I. -v Plur. 1. -pev 
 2a -S 2. -TE 
 3. none 3. -v Or -wav 
 
 34. The imperfect indicative of Ato: 
 
 Sg. Plur. 
 I. €-Av-o-v, J was loosing. €-AV-o-pev, we were loosing. 
 2. €-Av-e-s, you were loosing.  &-Nb-e-Te, ye were loosing. 
 3. €-Av-e, He was loosing. €-Av-o-v, they were loosing. 
 
 35. Observe: 1. The variable vowel % as in 
 inesvresentea¢ense. 2. Ihe e« before the stem 
 Av. This is called augment. 
 
 36. The secondary tenses, besides having dif- 
 ferent endings from the primary, have also an 
 augment. This augment is of two forms. 1. If 
 the verb begins with a consonant, € is prefixed 
 —syllabic augment. 2. In tue case of verbs 
 beginning with a vowel, tris vowel is length- 
 ened to the corresponding long vowel (except a 
 gives )—Zemporal augment. In diphthongs 
 made with t the first vowel is lengthened, and 
 t appears as iota subscript. Other diphthongs 
 do not ordinarily have the augment; ¢@.g. axova, 
 hear; *jxovov, 1 was hearing; adyw, lead; hyryov, 
 l was leading ; éc0iw, cat; noO.ov, [ was eating. 
 
16 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 ot EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. Bardo, éxpive, éypadete. 2. éxpivoper, 
 ’ , yy ld Voy / 
 nKovopmev, EBreTTOV. 3. TWiaTevduEeBa Kal eypado- 
 i 
 fev. 4. Hryerpes, noOleTe, eytvdoKeTe. 5. €uévo- 
 b) = / > \ 4 Wd 
 fev Ev TH TAOLW. O. Ayes Ta TéxVa. 7. HaOLov 
 “ ” ¢ ) , ’ , \ 
 Tov aptov. 8. ot amoatoro. éBamtilov Tovs 
 i 4 n 
 avOpwrrous. 9. eixov! tovs Sovrous ev TH Ol KO. 
 
 II. 1. We were hearing. 2. He was be- 
 lieving. 3. They were taking. 4. You were 
 saying. 5. Ye were beholding. 6. They were 
 raising up. 7. He was judging. 8. I was eat- 
 ing the bread. 9. He was leading the sons 
 of men. 10. We saw the face of the Lord. 
 11. The God of Heaven saves the children of 
 men. 12. Ye were remaining in the law. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE. 
 
 38. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aitéw, ask for. Bewpéw, see, observe, THEORY. 
 akorovléw, follow. Knptoow, preach, announce. 
 yevvaw, beget. welOw, Dersuade. 
 
 So0falw, vlorify. tmAnpow, ///, PLEnty. 
 
 épwrdw, ask (a question). Kpdle, cry. 
 
 1 €yw is an exception to the principle stated in 86, 2, and takes 
 the syllabic augment. €exov is contracted to elxov, § 6, 7. 
 
IMPERFECT INDICATIVE PASSIVE. + 
 a. In dofalw, glorify, occurs the double consonant €, 
 
 from «x + o, and pronounced like 4s in rzcks. 
 
 39. The personal endings in the secondary 
 tenses of the indicative passive are: 
 
 Stug. 1. -pyy Plur. 1. -pe@a 
 2. -co 2. -08e 
 3. -To 3. -vTO 
 
 40. The conjugation of \vw is: 
 
 Sing. — Plur. 
 I. é-Av-d-pyv, 7 was being loosed. I. é-Av-6-peba 
 2. €-Av-ov, you were... 2. €Av-e-obe 
 3. €-At-e-To, etc. 3. €AU-0-vTo 
 
 a. In the 2 per. sing. -ero changes to -ov, « drops 
 between the two vowels, and eo contracts to ov, § 5, 7. 
 
 Review the present and imperfect indicative 
 active and passive of \va, § 56. 
 
 41. The personal endings of the verb give us 
 the following: 
 
 a. The ferson of the verb. 
 
 6b. The number of the verb. . 
 
 c. The ¢ense, whether primary or secondary, and by 
 this whether past or not. 
 
 ad. The voice of the verb. 
 
 é. The mood to some extent, as we shall see later cn. 
 
 Cc 
 
18 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 42. The changes in the endings that are to 
 be particularly noted are: 
 
 ACTIVE. PASSIVE. 
 “OWL = -W “EOL = -€ Cl -T 
 “oO = -€LS “ETO = -OV 
 “ETL = ~Eb 
 OVOL == -OVTL 
 
 The importance of mastering the personal 
 endings of the verb, and, indeed, the whole 
 matter of the verb, cannot well be overestt- 
 mated. It is safe to say that the student who 
 has thoroughly learned the detail of the verb 
 given thus far has mastered the greater part of 
 the difficulty in the regular verb, and has gone 
 far towards gaining a reading knowledge of the 
 New Testament. 
 
 The student shouid now be familiar with more than Soc 
 different forms. 
 
 43. EXERCISES. 
 
 7 
 
 [. 1. HyeTo kal hye. 2. éBamrifero, Bamrive 
 Tal. 3. edvddoKEeTo EV T@ lep@. 4. expivduEBa. 
 / > / i i > / > 
 5. oTéAXeTat Kal éotéXreoOe. G6. écwbov. 7. &p 
 T@® oikm eboEafero. 8. 6 KUpLos NKOVETO. Q. Ob 
 4 L ws 
 er. > \ > \ ” % 
 aTooToNeL els TOY oUvpavov EPBNeTrOV. 10. Ta 
 réxva éxpate.! 
 
 } A neuter plural nom. takes a verb in the singular in Greels. 
 
FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 1g 
 
 II. 1. We believed and were saved. 2. Ye 
 were glorified. 3. He was preaching to the 
 men. 4. The son of man was being glorified. 
 5. I was judging and I was being judged. 
 6. The world trusted in (eis) the Lord. 7. The 
 angel of Heaven was heard. 8. We persuade 
 the sons of men. 9g. The law was taught in the 
 temple. 10. The work of man is judged. 
 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 FIRST OR A—DECLENSION. 
 
 44, VOCABULARY. 
 apxh, n, eginning, ARCHAIC. éxkdnola, n, church ; cf. EC 
 ypahn, 1, Scripture, writings. CLESIASTICAL. 
 évToAn, 1, commandment. éEovrla, , Power. 
 ton, 4, fe, ZOOLOGY. kapdla, 4, Aeart; cf. CAR- 
 rapaBoAn, i, PARABLE. DIAC. 
 cvvaywyn, 1, SYNAGOGUE. érrayyeAta, n, Promise. 
 pavy, n, voice, PHONOgraph. olkla, 4 house. 
 vx, 4, soul, PSYCHOlogy. copia, 4, wzsdom, SOPH- 
 dpaptia, n, 5272. astry. 
 
 Most of these nouns occur as many as I00 
 times in the New Testament. 
 
 a. w in Wyx7, soul, is a double consonant, pronounced 
 like Zs in “ps. This now gives us all the letters in Greek. 
 Learn the classification of consonants in § 2. 
 
 6. Observe the gender of the nouns in the vocabulary 
 {n what letters do the nouns end ? Cf. $$18 and 19. 
 
20 ‘ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 45. The following paradigms of apyy and 
 copia will serve as models for the remaining 
 nouns of this form: 
 
 apxh, beginning. codla, wisdom. 
 Stem apya- Stem codia- 
 Sing. Plur.- =. Sing. Plur. 
 N.V. 4px} apxal sodla wodlat 
 G. a&px fis apx av codlas sodiav 
 D. apxq apx ais copia soplais 
 A. a&px hv dpxas codlay sodtas 
 
 46. Observe: 1. The stem ends in 4@, hence 
 the term A-declension. 2. The case endings 
 are somewhat similar to those already learned 
 in the O-declension: (@)*the dat. sing. must 
 have zota-subscript ; (6) the acc. sing. ends in -p; 
 (c) the gen. plur. in -wv; (@) -o. of the second = 
 -at of the first, and -o:s of the second = -ais of 
 the first. 3. That nouns having -y in the nomi- 
 native retain -n throughout the sing., and nouns 
 with sa in the nominative retain the « in all 
 cases of the sing. 
 
 47. Nouns that have the acute accent on the 
 last syllable (the z/t7ma) are called oxytones ; 
 e.g. apxn, Foy. Rule of accent: A// oxrytones of 
 the first and second declension have the circum- 
 Jlex accent in all genitives and datives. 
 
FIRST CR A-DECLENSION. 21 
 
 48. Learn the fem. of the art.! » (§24), and 
 compare this with the case endings of apy7. 
 
 43. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. at dpaptiat avOpwrav. 2. 7) évtorAn 
 Cons. 3. 9 €Eovcla THs éexxAnolas. 4. 0 KUpLOS 
 héyet trapaBornv. 5. évTodkjv ypado. 6. év 
 > a e / > / Fo hg \ \ 
 apyxn o NOYyOos HKOVETO. 7. O OYAOS THY havi 
 jKove. 8. al ypadhat éypadhovto. 9. ab amoaTo- 
 hee THY erayyeniav Tois avOpdmos Eremtrov. 
 10. €V TO KOTLM 1) apuapTia méver. 1. THY é£ov-. 
 
 / € CN > Q "6 BA 12 € % Md na 
 ciav o vlos avOpwrov eye. . 1 dovn év TH 
 éonuw éxpate. 
 
 II. r. In the synagogue. 2. In the heart ol 
 Men sen hearasvoice:, «4-6 lhe: soullis7saved. 
 5. The parable was spoken in the temple. 
 Smlicescht the read ofeiite tomen: 37 lhe 
 church has power. 8. They were speaking 
 a parable in the synagogue. g. It is written 
 in the scriptures. 10. We have a promise of 
 the Lord. 11. Men preached wisdom to the 
 world. 12. In the beginning we heard the 
 word. 
 
 1 The forms of the article 6, 7, of, ai, are called proccitics 
 (wrpo-kdlvw, lean forward), since they have no accent, and are 
 pronounced as part of the following word. 
 
 2 épnuos is a fem. noun in -os. 
 
22 * ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 A-DECLENSION CONTINUED. 
 
 50. VOCABULARY. 
 ayarn, 7, love. elpqvn, 1, Peace. 
 GAnGera, yn, Zrvth. nBEépa, 1, day, ePHEMERAL. 
 Bacwrela, 4, k2ngdom. Odrkacca, 1, Sea. 
 Yi, 1, earth, GEology. kehoadn, 4, Aead. 
 yAdooa, 4, cougue, GLOSSArY. payrhs, o, disciple. 
 Sikarordvn, 4, *Zghteousness.  -mpodhrns, 6, PROPHET. 
 Sofa, , glory. Xapa, 1, Jay. 
 
 apa, 4, Hour. 
 
 Most of these nouns occur more than 100 
 times in the New Testament. 
 
 51. The following paradigms furnish models 
 for other nouns of this declension : 
 
 Séta, 4, elory. tpodytys, 6, Prophet. 
 Stem dofa- Stem mpopyrta- 
 
 Sting. Plur. Sing. Plur. 
 N.V. 86 N.V. Sf N. tpopytns N. V. rpodfrar 
 G. 86éns G. S0fGv GG. rpodiron G. mpodyntav 
 D. 86 D. 86fars =D. rpodaqry D. rpopfrats 
 A. 86€av A. 86fas = A. raobtrny A. tpopftas 
 
 V. mpodfjra 
 
 52. Learn pa and copia. § 22. 
 
FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 23 
 
 53. Observe: 1. When e¢, ¢, or p precedes a 
 of the nom. sing., a is retained throughout the 
 sing.; and when other lecters precede a, as in 
 dd&a, the a is changed in the gen. and dat. sing. 
 ton. 2. -ac of the nom. plur., as in the endings 
 of the verb, is considered short in determining 
 the accent. 
 
 54. Feminine nouns of the first declension 
 end in a, a, or 7; masculine nouns, in -T7> or 
 ‘as. The gen. of masc. nouns is ov, as in the 
 O-declension. Masc. nouns in-tns have a in the 
 voc. sing. 
 
 a. yn, 9, earth, is contracted from yea, § 6,6. The 
 circumflex is found throughout. 
 
 55. The following table shows the case end 
 ings of the A-declension : 
 
 Fem. Sing. Masc. Sing. 
 
 N.V. or & n N. a-s n-S 
 
 G. a-s or n-s n-S G. a-to = ov 
 
 D. a-t or 7 n-t D. a-t n-t 
 
 A. @-v or a-v N-v A. av n-v 
 V.a a or y 
 
 Mase. and Fem. Plur. 
 N. We a-t 
 
 . w-v for a-ev 
 
 - a-lsS 
 
 . a-s for a-vs 
 
 Pon 
 
24 » ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 56. Observe that a/7 nouns have the same 
 plural in the first declension. If 0 be substituted 
 for a in this table of endings, the first declension 
 will be seen to differ but little from the second. 
 
 57. The following are the principles of zomznal 
 accent : : 
 
 1. There are three kinds of accent : the acute 
 (“), the circumflex ("), and the grave (‘). 
 
 2. The acute can occur on any one of the 
 last three syllables ; the circumflex on either of 
 the last two; the grave on the last. 
 
 3. The acute can stand’on a syllable either 
 long or short; the circumflex can occur on a 
 long syllable only ; ze. a syllable in which there 
 is a long vowel or a diphthong. 
 
 4. The accent in the nominative must be 
 learned by observation. 
 
 5. The accent tends to remain on the same 
 syllable on which it occurs in the nominative. 
 
 6. When the aw/¢zma is short, 
 
 a. The antepenult if accented has the acute. 
 
 6. The penult if accented has the acute, unless it be 
 
 long; in this case the circumflex must occur. 
 c. The ultima if accented must have the acute. 
 
 7. When the w/tima is long, 
 
 a. The antepenult cannot be accented. 
 
 6. The penult if accented must have the acute. 
 
 c. The ultima may have either the acute or the cir- 
 cumflex. 
 
FIRST OR A-DECLENSION. 25 
 
 Nouns of the first and second declensions 
 include about seventy-five per cent of the nouns 
 in the New Testament. The importance, there- 
 fore, of mastering the vocabularies and forms 
 thus far given can be easily appreciated. 
 
 58. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. €yopuev eipnvynv xalayarnv. 2. akovopev 
 avro4 THs apyyns. 3. ob mpopHntat Thy dd~av éxov- 
 ow. 4. 9 dixatocvyn Kal ) adjOeva ev TO KOT LO 
 Euevov. 5. HKOVOV THY ayyéXou hovnv. 6. édevye 
 év TapaBorais. 7. 0 mpodytns éypadhe THY évTo- 
 Ajv. 8. Tols avOpwTrols yapav éewéeuTreTEe. 9. EV 
 TH adrnOeia pwévomev. 10. THY codiav év Trapa- 
 Bonrats Exyjpvocev. Il. Ev TH yn Kal ev TH Oadaoon 
 eddEales TOV KUpLOV. 12. Tois waOnTals ToD KUpioU 
 TiaTEVOVaLV.2 
 
 II. 1. We remain in the truth. 2. The hour 
 is announced. 3. Ye have joy in your? hearts. 
 4. We see the beginning of righteousness. 
 5. The way, the truth, and the life. 6. Joy and 
 peace, love and glory. 7. They were remaining 
 in the synagogue. 8. They speak in parables. 
 g. It is taught inthe Scriptures. 16. The king- 
 dom of God and his? righteousness. 
 
 1 Movable v, for which see § 11. 
 2 The dative often follows ricrevw, where our de/ieve requires 
 
 the objective case with zz. See lexicon. ~ * Use the article. 
 + From. 
 
26 ESSENTIALS C¥ NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS. 
 
 59. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ayarntds, beloved. Kakés, ev7/. 
 
 aAXos, other. Kadés, 200d. 
 
 alavios, eternal; cf. AEON. péoos, vzzddle. 
 
 Sikavos, rzghteous. povos, only, alone, MONO< 
 éxetvos, iat one. theism. 
 
 étepos, another. ovtos, this one. 
 
 éoxaros, /ast. muotds, fathful. 
 
 WStos, 072e’s OWN, IDIOM. tmpwros, first. 
 
 60. Learn the declension of caX4os, good, iScos, 
 one's own, and puxpos, small, little, § 25. 
 
 Observe that the masc. and neut. are in the 
 second declension, while the fem. is in the first 
 declension. 
 
 61. Note that when ¢ or p precedes the final 
 vowel of the stem, as in isos and puxpos, the 
 fem. has a in the nom. sing. Cf. 53, 1. 
 
 62. obtos, this one, and éxeivos, that one, are 
 demonstrative pronouns, but are declined for 
 the most part as adjectives in -os. 
 
 a. ovTos refers to somebody or something near at hand 
 
 or present, while éxetvos refers to that which is more revaute 
 at a distance. 
 
 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE VOWEL DECLENSIONS. 27 
 
 63. Learn the paradigm of ovtos, § 26. 
 
 Observe: 1. The rcugh breathing of the nom. 
 masc. and fem. sing. and piur. appears in all other 
 forms as tr. 2. The vowel of the penult varies 
 as the vowel in the ultima. 3. The accent 
 remains on the penult. 
 
 64. All substantives used with ottos and 
 éxetvos must have the article; e.g. ottos 0 advOpw- 
 jos OY 0 avOpwios ovTos, this man. Observe 
 that the pronoun must come Jefore the article 
 or after the nom. This is called the predicate 
 position. Any other position of an adj. would 
 be the attrzbutive position. 
 
 65. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. » é€oydtn npépa. 2. ovTOS 0 AéOyos. 
 3. €v TO olkm@ exelv@. 4. of Sikatot Kal of KaKoL 
 KpivovTal. 5. Tatdia, éryaTn wpa éaTiv. 6. 7 
 evTOAN Fw aiwvios! éatwy (is). 7. of KaXOL povoL 
 cwovovtat. 8. aitn éotl nmrpworTn Kal peyadn? 
 évToAn. 9. éxetvos Sixaids éotiv. 10. of aAXOL 
 TOUS vomous edidacKov. II. év éxelvals Tals Hué- 
 pals Kakol TpopHtat nKovovTo, 
 
 Dimer neestrst. last: and, the sast, sfirst: 
 2. That disciple knows the Scriptures. 3. In 
 
 1 An adj. that has the masc. and fem. alike. Such are called 
 adjs. of two endings. e 2. Great. 
 
 
 
28 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 the last day. 4. His own (use art. for /zs) 
 know the truth. 5. These children are saved. 
 6. This is the work of God. 7. This command- 
 ment I write to the brethren. 8. Beloved, we 
 have another promise. 9g. On the first day he 
 preached in the synagogue. 10. This one knows 
 the law and the prophets. 
 
 LESSON XI. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND eipi, J am. 
 
 66. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ayabds, good. els, prep., z¢o (with acc.). 
 aytos, oly. oros, whole. 
 
 GAG, Conj., but. ott, conj., because, that. 
 aités, he, himself. ov,” 
 
 yap,! conj., for. ovk, | not. 
 
 8é,1 conj., #zoreover, but. ovx, 
 
 éyo, /. Tovnpds, wicked. 
 
 ell, 7 am. ot, thou, you. 
 
 Each of the words in this vocabulary, except 
 the adjectives, occurs more than 1000 times in 
 the New Testament. 
 
 1 Words that cannot come first in a sentence are called os¢- 
 positives. yap and 6é are such. 
 
 2 ob before consonants; ov« before vowels; ody before the 
 rough breathing. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 29 
 
 67. The personal pronouns in Greek are: 
 ’ / 4 > / > / > / 
 eyo, 1; ov, thou; and autos, avtn, avrto, he, 
 she, tt. 
 
 68. Learn the declension of éy# and av, § 40. 
 
 Observe: 1. That the short forms of éyo in 
 the sing. have no accent. These are enclitics.} 
 The meaning of the dissyllabic forms does not 
 differ from the monosyllabic. The former are 
 more emphatic. 
 
 2. The endings -ov, -o. =@, and -wy, -as are 
 common with the endings of the two declen- 
 sions. Associate the meaning of vets with its 
 initial vowel. 
 
 69. Learn the declension of autos, § 26, a. 
 
 Observe that, except in the forms avros, 
 avuTy, sing., and auto, avrai, plur., we have the 
 declension of the article o with the prefix av-. 
 
 70. Observe the following for the uses of 
 QUTOS : 
 
 I. avtTos 0 avOpwrros Or 0 avOpwros avtos, the 
 man himself. advtos is in the predicate posi- 
 tion, 64. 
 
 1 An enclitic gives up its accent for the preceding word. If 
 the preceding word has the (’ ) on the antepenult or the (*~) on 
 the penult, it receives an additional accent on the ultima; e.g. 
 iuatidv pov, my garment, oixbs wou, my house. What is the dif- 
 ference between an enclitic and a proclitic ? 
 
30 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 71. 1. 6 avrtos avOpwrros, the same man. 
 When the article precedes adtos, the meaning 
 is always the same. 
 
 2. When used alone, as xplvovow adrov, they 
 judge him, it is the simple personal pronoun of 
 the third person. 
 
 72. The use of conjunctions and prepositions 
 is an important thing in inflected languages. 
 
 I. «ai is the ordinary copulative conjunction, 
 joining words, phrases, and clauses. 
 
 2. 6€ is an adversative, du, in a mild way. 
 It often has little meaning beyond and, indeed. 
 
 3. adda is the strongest adversative, a very 
 emphatic dzz. 
 
 4. yap expresses a reason, as Kal yap axovovar 
 means and (I say this) for they are listening. 
 
 5. els, tuto, always occurs with the accusa- 
 tive, and denotes motion, either expressed or 
 implied. 
 
 73. We noticed that the primary active end- 
 ing -ut, aS in axov-o-u1, was dropped, and the o 
 preceding was lengthened to ». There are 
 some verbs that do not drop this pz, and that 
 do not have the variable vowel %. Verbs that 
 drop the ws belong to the w-conjugation, and 
 verbs that do not drop the me belong to the 
 ut-conjugation. 
 
PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 31 
 
 These make up what are called the -conju- 
 gation and the pr-conjugation. Of the latter is 
 ejul, Jam. The following is the pres. ind. : 
 
 Sing. ell, Lam. Plur. topév, we are. 
 el, thou art. éoré, ye are. 
 éoti, he, she, or zt zs. ell, they are. 
 
 a. eiut is for éo-pi; ef is for éo-o/; eioi for éovo’. The 
 root eg- may be compared with zs. 
 
 6. All the forms in the pres. ind. of this verb, except «i, 
 are enclitic, 68, I, note. 
 
 74. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. éyw O€ cfu. 2. od yap el év TO iep@ 
 - 1. 6ym O€ imi. 2. yap el ev TH Lep@. 
 >] \ > \ ¢ lal > 
 3. avTov dé éxpivopev. 4. avTOL Hels ov KpLVO- 
 peOa. 5. TOUTO é€oTL TO Epyov Tov Oeod. 6. adrAA 
 > / ¢ a , b] b) A \ \ 
 ov AOyols vets cate be. rh &y auTe dé a1) 
 = ae , > ¢ n re a wn 
 aiwvids éotiv. 8. vpets éote Ta TéKVA TOU Geod. 
 rd , > , Nee San ers A 
 Q. 0 mpopntns €Lav. 10. Kab nine AUTM O Incods. 
 e> / ” 5) > CoA , 
 II. 7) adnOGeva ovK éeoTiv ev Hiv. 12. TioTEeveTE 
 © baeres SELLE es ae LLCS Agen 3 / 
 yap OTL ey@ eipl. 13. ery@ eipe 7 0605 Kal 9 adnOeva 
 \ ¢€ / , Sid > ’ / al 
 kal ) San. 14. caSPBatov dé éotw év éxeivn TH 
 ¢€ / 
 mepa 
 
 II. 1. But you know me. 2. I glorify Him. 
 3. Moreover, we speak the truts. 4. Ye are in 
 the world. 5. Darkness!isnotin Him. 6. And 
 these things we write to you. 7. Jesus himself 
 was not baptizing, but his disciples. 8. Beloved, 
 
 1 hoKotla, 
 
32 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 we are the children of God. 9. He hears my 
 words and does not do them. to. And this is 
 the witness of him. 11. He himself is the life. 
 12. On (év) the same day he was speaking to 
 the people. 13. Thou art the son of God. 
 
 LESSON XII. 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 75. VOCABULARY. 
 GaTrepXopat, 90 away. éE€pxopar, go out. 
 amrokplvopaL, auswer. EpXopar, come, go. 
 yivopar, be, become. nv, Was. 
 Siépxopar, go through. ota, Z know. 
 Svvapar, az able, can. os, who. 
 elaépxopar, enter. Topevopat, 20. 
 
 mporépxopat, come to. 
 
 76. Deponent verbs have the form of the 
 middle, § 47, or the passive, but the sezse of 
 the active. 
 
 77. Note in the vocabulary above that there 
 are many verbs that are composed of épyouar + 
 something. These are compound verbs; and 
 the forms amd, away, dia, through, eis, into, éx, 
 out of, mpos, to, are prepositions. In this verb 
 of motion the preposition, it will be seen, gives 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 35 
 
 the direction to the motion. So in most verbs 
 compounded with prepositions, the idea of the 
 verb is only modified by the preposition. 
 
 When the preposition ends in a vowel, as 
 amo, ova, the final vowel is dropped before a 
 verb that begins with a vowel; e.g. dvépyouas 
 is for dua + epyomar.! 
 
 78. The imperfect indicative of efui, am, is as 
 follows : 
 
 Sing. FPlur. 
 I. Hv (qpnv), 7 was. I. npev (ype0a), we were. 
 2. qs (Wo9a), thou wert. 2. T¢, ye were. 
 3. HY, he was. 3. Woav, they were. 
 
 a. The forms in parentheses need not be learned at 
 present, as they occur but seldom. xnv, 16 times; nucba, 
 3 times; 76a, twice. 
 
 79. oida, 7 know, is an irregular verb, but 
 conjugated in one tense regularly, as follows: 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 I. ola, 7 know, etc. I. olSapev, we know, etc. 
 2. olSas 2. oldare 
 3. olde 3. ol8acr 
 
 80. Learn the paradigm of 6s, 7, 6, § 27. 
 This pronoun it will be noticed is declined 
 like the article, except initial r and the nomina.- 
 
 tive forms 6s, 4, 0, a. 
 
 1 On the same principle, when these compound verbs receive 
 the augment the final vowel of the preposition is dropped; ¢.g. 
 arooré\iw, J send, améoteddov, J was sending. The prepositions 
 weol and mpé retain their final vowel. Cf. note, p. 58. 
 
 D 
 
34 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 81. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. dpets ov olSate avtov. 2. epyetar o 
 \ / a? / > mm / 
 Di{rumos Kal Adyer TO "Avdpéa. 3. EV TO KOTO 
 > Nee / SN > > / Cee, / 
 AV Kal 0 KOT LOS AUTOV OUK EAapBavev. 4. 7 EVTOA?) 
 , » 
 €oTiv 6 AOyos Ov axKoveTe. 5. 1) Wpa EpxKETat. 
 5 / CIA 4 ’ \ > / 
 6. ov ypadw vpiv btt ovK« oldate THY adyBeLav 
 bd NX ¢/ 5] > / Va , TIMI AAS a 
 avdvAa Ste oldaTe aUTHY. 7. 0 AkoVvwW aT apyY7s 
 yuwookw. 8. Kal attn éotly 1) érayyedia iv 
 > \ > / aI \ 76 ¢/ 4 e / 
 autos émrayyéAreTal.! Q. Kai oldas OTL ) amapTia 
 b] > A > > / > \ \ \ , ey 
 év avT@ ovK éotiv. 10. éyw S€ Tov vomov oida. 
 € be eet p- > ® \ > / U 
 II. 0 6€ Kalpos® éotiv év ¢ THv eEovclav KapBa- 
 b \ ’ 10 v4 Ce, ? / € / 
 vowev. 12. TUS YAP OVK OLOE OTL 7 ETAT NEPA 
 epyeTar ;” 
 
 II. 1. We know that we are saved. 2. Ye 
 enter the synagogue. 3. They are becoming 
 the children of God. ‘4. In the beginning was 
 the Word. 5. The Word was with (pds, acc.) 
 God. 6. The truth, moreover, is glorified in 
 Him. 7. I know that His commandment is life 
 everlasting. 8. What I say to you was from 
 the beginning. 9. The life which we live is 
 eternal. 10. On that day was the Sabbath. 
 11. Whom He knows the world does not 
 know. 
 
 1 érayyéANona, J announce. 
 2 See § 14 for the punctuation in Greek. 
 8 Time. 
 
PRESENT ACTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 35 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 PRESENT ACTIVE SUBZJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 
 
 82. VOCABULARY. 
 alpw, fake away. my, adv., zow, already. 
 aphv, verily. iva, conj., 2 order that. 
 arobvqrKw, Ze. pera, prep. with gen., with; 
 atrorTéAdw, Send. with acc., after. 
 yé, 2udeed, at least. BN, oF. 
 Séxopar, recezve. viv, adv., ow. 
 Sua, prep. with gen., through ; ovr, adv., not yet. 
 
 with acc., 02 account of. Tmapakahéw, beseech. 
 el, Conj., 2/. wept, prep. with gen., 
 éx, prep. with gen., out of, of. concerning ; with acc., 
 ért, adv., stz//, yet. around. 
 
 ms, adv., how. 
 
 83. The terms primary and secondary apply 
 to the tenses of the indicative only. 
 
 The subjunctive mood, as in English, denotes 
 a doubt or a contingency. Unlike the English, 
 however, the subjunctive in Greek is very 
 common. There are but two tenses that are 
 usually found, the present and the aorist. The 
 perfect is very rare. 
 
 84. The pres. subjv. act. of Avo is: 
 
 Sing. 1. \b-o Plur. 1. d6-o-pev 
 2. Avd-7s 2. Av-y-Te 
 3. At-y 3. Ad-w-or 
 
36 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 85. The pres. subjv. of e¢ui is: 
 
 Sing. 1. @ Plur. 1. o-pev 
 2. 4-s 2. H-TE 
 3-0 3. aor 
 
 86. Note that the pres. subjv. of ecuéi is the 
 same as the personal endings of the regular 
 verb; and while the indicative has the variable 
 vowel %, the subjunctive has the corresponding 
 long vowel °/n, 
 
 a. The personal endings are those of the primary 
 active indicative. 
 
 87. The subjunctive follows iva, 2x order that. 
 
 Examine the following : 
 
 epxerat iva axovy, he comes that he may hear. 
 muoTevouev iva py apaptavopev, we believe in order that 
 we may not Sin. 
 
 88. Rule of syntax: Clauses of purpose take 
 the subjunctive with wa. The negative 2s py. 
 
 89. The following forms illustrate the present 
 active infinitive : 
 
 Av-etv, a&Kov-erv, €X-etv, pev-eLv, 
 to loose. to hear. to have. to abide. 
 
 -ev = ¢€ + ending -ev of pres. inf. For -eepv 
 contracting to -ezy, see § 6, 7. 
 
PRESENT ACTIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 37 
 
 90. The participle is very common in Greek, 
 and it is necessary to master its uses as soon as 
 possible. -wy is the ending of the pres. act. nom. 
 masc. sing.; ¢.g.: 
 
 6 Aێywv,. the one saying, he who says. 
 
 6 alpwv, the one taking away, he who takes away. 
 6 axovuv, the one hearing, he who hears. 
 
 The article and participle in this use are equiva- 
 lent, as is seen, to a dependent clause in English. 
 
 91. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ovtos épyetar iva éyn Tepl THS ad 
 / > \ = \ / e lal c/ ¢€ ec BA 
 Oelas. 2. apnv, aunv Ayo vplv OTL) Opa ovTYH 
 > / / ¢€ lal C/ yy lal 1 lal 
 €otiv, 3. déyeTar ipuds iva ett Copev.' 4. TAS 
 ye OULaTat owlew ; 5. weTa TAVTA avToOls AéEyeEL. 
 6. Tas dpaptias nuay aipe. 7. éx TOU Bavatou 
 q . ¢€ av 
 els THY Cwnv éyerpoucOa. 8. 0 wévav ev avT@ ExEL 
 [ | peels Cant 9 an 1 \ 10 \ > rn 
 Sanv arwviov. 9. 0 ayaTa@v* Tov adeXdov auvTov 
 n , / \ 
 év TH ayatn pévet. 10. éy@ O€ Epyouar iva Tov 
 , 
 KOCLOV cola. 
 
 II. 1. They baptize in order that they may 
 glorify God. 2. Already we become the chil- 
 Gierecimtiiiiewers Yevare able to know the 
 truth. 4. How can He take away our sins? 
 5. Through Him they are saved and have eter- 
 nal life. 6. After these things they go away 
 
 1 For fdwpyer, § 5, 2. 
 
38 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 intothe desert: »7--- He comes*thateiie sum, 
 save sinners (dpaotondos). 8. I am willing to 
 hear the Gospel. 9s. Verily, verily the one lov- 
 ing his brother is not a servant. 10. Ye are 
 not able to hear my word. 11. That one was 
 from the beginning and tiath is in Him. 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 PRESENT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 
 
 92. VOCABULARY. 
 apa, adv., at the same tine. —H, CONj., Or. 
 avrt, prep. with gen., zzstead Kabds, adv., just as. 
 
 of. Kavos, 7227. 
 ams, prep. with gen., from.  owmds, remaining. 
 domatopar, salute. ovv, adv., therefore. 
 Satpdviov, DEMON. mpds, prep. with acc., Zo, 
 éav, conj., 2f : toward. 
 evayyédtov, cospel. mporkuvew, worship. 
 evploke, find. Typéw, keep. 
 
 93. The pres. pass. subjv. of Avo is: 
 
 Sing. 1. b-w-par Plur. 1. dv-6-peba 
 2. Adv-y 2. Av-y oH 
 3. Av-y-TaL 3. Adv-w-vrar 
 
 94. Observe: 1. The long vowel fm, as in 
 the active. 2. The personal endings are the 
 pass. primary endings of the indicative. 3. -y 
 of 2 per. sing. is for -yaau. 
 
PRESENT PASSIVE SUBJUNCTIVE AND INFINITIVE. 39 
 
 95. The subjunctive is used in exhortation. 
 Examine the following : 
 
 evpiokwpev THY GAnOeav, let us find the truth. 
 py aywopela eis THY apaptiav, let us not be led in sin. 
 
 96. Rule of syntax: Zhe first person plural 
 lof the subjunctive) may be used to express an 
 exhortation. The negative is py. 
 
 97. Examine the following: 
 
 e€av Kpivw de eyo, if [, moreover, judge. 
 €av py A€ywpev THV dAnOeav, 7f we say not the truth. 
 
 Rule of syntax: The subjunctive follows éav 
 (= 2f); the negative is pn. Cf. § 124. 
 
 98. The pres. pass. inf. may be seen in the 
 following verbs : 
 
 Av-e-c Bat, a&kov-e-c at, kply-e-o Ban, 
 
 to be destroyed. to be heard. to be judged. 
 What is the pres. pass. inf. ending ? 
 
 99. Examine the tollowing: 
 
 6 Kplv-0-pevos, the one being judged. 
 0 akov-0-pevos, ihe one beirg heard. 
 
 This ending -wevos is the passive participle end- 
 ing in nom. masc. sing, as -wy is in the active. 
 
 The ending -os is declined like canos, § 25. 
 
40 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 What was said in 90 about the sense of the 
 active participle applies equally to the passive. 
 
 100. EXERCISES. 
 
 , UA \ 
 I. 1. dorafwpeba tods aderdovs. 2. Kalas 
 a 9 / na , 
 €xelvos OlKaLos eaTLY MEV OLKAaLOL NmELS. 3. EV 
 rn o v \ 
 TO Meow Exnpucoe NEyov OTL EpyeTal Els TA idva. 
 > ¢ lal \ > >’ 
 4. pevete ev €ol Kal ey@ év vply. 5. éy@ ovK eipl 
 , / ie) Oe $9 a , \ 
 pLovos OTL avTOS peT Emov eoTiv. 6. BXrEmEL TOV 
 \ / > A 
 KUPLOV EpXOMEvoY TmposS aUTOV Kal EyEeL aVT@ 
 e ¢ / A / 
 Otros éotw 0 aipwv Tas apaptias TOV KOoopov. 
 A na ? na / / 
 7. eb Duels peéveTe EV TO OVO Emov, wanTal pov 
 ‘ > \ , \ > / aN \ 
 éote Kal yiwwoKete THY AadnOeav. 8. éav Oé 
 / b] , \ b) / / aN > \ 
 Kpiva é€yo, THv adnbecav Kpivw. 9. €aVv ey@ 
 > / 
 dofalwo éuavtov (myself), » Sofa pov ovdév 
 (nothing) éotuv. 
 
 II. 1. Letuskeepthis commandment. 2. Let 
 us receive the truth. 3. If, therefore, we are the 
 children of God, let us do His works. 4. Let us 
 believe that through Him we have eternal life. 
 5. They were willing to receive the Gospel. 
 6. He who believes is saved and has eternal 
 life. 7. Let us not speak concerning these 
 things. 8. A new commandment write I unto 
 you. g. If we say that we have not sin, the 
 truth is not in us. 10. He preaches the Gospel 
 of the kingdom of God. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION, 4) 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTER NOUNS IN a. 
 
 101. VOCABULARY. 
 
 aipa, 76, Glood; cf. HEMOR- otopa, 16, 220uth. 
 
 RHAGE. capa, 76, Jody. 
 OAnpa, Td, we//. vv£,1 4, 2zeht. 
 Ovopa, 16, zane; Cf. NOMI- tovs, 0, foot. 
 
 NATE. mip, 76, fire, PYROZEeChUICS. 
 rvevpa, T6, SHzrit. capt, 4, flesh. 
 Pipa, 76, word; cf. RHETORIC. ods, 76, ight, PHOTOgraphy. 
 omréppa, 76, Seed. xelp, n, Zand, CHIROgraphy. 
 
 102. The third declension is ordinarily called 
 the consonant declension from the fact that the 
 stem of the nouns usually ends in a consonant. 
 A few nouns, as we shall see later, end in a 
 close vowel, ¢ or v, or in the diphthong ev. 
 
 103. It is necessary in declining a noun of 
 this declension to have the stem. This is deter- 
 mined by dropping the genitive ending -os. 
 
 104. The nominative is formed from the stem 
 in various ways. The xomznative, therefore, is 
 not easily determined till we know the genztzve. 
 
 1 These monosyllables have peculiarities of form which will 
 be explained later. The frequency of their occurrence is the 
 reason for introducing them thus early. 
 
42 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 105. “The declension of dvopa, name, is as 
 follows : 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 
 N. A. V. dvopa N. A. V. ovépara 
 G. ovépatos G. ovoparov 
 
 D. ovépare D. ovépact 
 
 106. Observe the following : 
 
 1. The genitive ending is -os. 
 
 2. The dative ends in -:, as in the first and 
 second declensions. Here, however, it does not 
 appear as zofa-subscript, but is written in the 
 
 line. 
 3. In the plur. @ is the same as ine the 
 
 ~Q-declension, so likewise -wv. 
 
 4. The dat. plur. ends in -o, with which 
 compare -ts of the A- and O-declensions. 7 of 
 the stem drops before -au. 
 
 5. The stem is ovouat-. The nominative is 
 ‘he mere stem, final t being dropped. 
 
 107. Learn the declension of vv&, night, § 28. 
 
 108. Rule of accent: Monosyllables of the 
 
 consonant declension accent the ultima in all 
 
 genitives and datives. -wv of the genitive plural 
 
 2s circumfplexed. 
 
 1 The only single consonants that can stand at the close of a 
 word in Greek are v, p, s. At! other letters which would occur 
 here are dropped. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 43 
 
 109. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. ta pnuata Cwijs aiwviou eyes. 2. dvopa 
 Hv avt@o “lwavns. 3. ToUTO é€oTL TO TOuAd jou. 
 4. ywwooKes TO OéXAnpma TOU Oeod. 5. OéreTE aye 
 eb (against) nds TO aiwa Tod avOpwrrov TovTou 5 
 6. oTOs éotiv 0 BarrTiloy év TvevmaTt ayio. 7. 7 
 vu& épxyetar. 8. o7réppa 'ABpadu éopev. 9. 0 
 Noyos cap& éyéveto (became). 10. ov TO eicEpyo- 
 Mevov Els TO TOMA Kool (defiles) avOpwrrov ara 
 TO eepyouevovy €k TOV aTOMATOS TOUTO KoLVOL 
 avOpwrov. 1. vpmels éote TO HOS TOD KOcMOV. 
 12. ef d€ 7) yelp cov 7) 0 Tovs cov cKavdanri€er 
 (offend) oe Exxowov (cut off) avtov. 13. TO has 
 év TH oKoTLa halves. 
 
 II. 1. They believe on (eis) Hisname. 2. He 
 baptizes you, moreover, in the holy spirit. 3. He 
 is able to save by (év) night and day. 4. Let us 
 believe on the name of the Lord. 5. The word 
 becomes flesh. 6. These are the good seed. 
 7. This is the will of God. 8. He speaks 
 through the mouth of God. 9g. The bread of 
 life is my flesh. 10. Verily, verily I say to you, 
 he who believes on His name has eternal-life. 
 
44 _ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION: STEMS IN -t AND -€p. 
 
 110. VOCABULARY. 
 avip, 0, 77aN. Ktiots, 4, creation. 
 avaoracts, y, resurrection. pHtnp, y, other. 
 yaos, n, knowledge. TapaKkrAnots, 1, exhortation. 
 Sivapis, 4, Power, DYNA- matip, o, father. 
 MITE. wiotis, 4, faith. 
 OAtpus, 4, ¢rzbulation. moX1s, 1, CeLy. 
 kplots, 4, judgment. cuvelSnots, 1, Comsczence. 
 
 111. Above are given the most common nouns 
 in the New Testament in -is, stem in -. They 
 are declined as follows: 
 
 wots, city. 
 
 Stem zroX-. 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 N. ads N. V. aéAeus 
 G. 1éXews G. méoXeov 
 D. oder D. moder 
 A. woAuw A. modes 
 V. wore 
 
 112. The following is to be noted regarding 
 the declension of this class of nouns: 
 
 I. e takes the place of the final stem vowel ¢ - 
 in all cases except the nom., acc., and voc. sing. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 45 
 
 2. The gen. sing. has -ws, not -os. 
 
 3. The accent in gen. sing. and plur. is irregu- 
 lar, and here the acute accent is found on the 
 antepenult when the ultima is long. 
 
 4. € unites with es of the dat. sing., and forms 
 a diphthong ez. 
 
 5. The acc. sing. adds simply -v to the stem. 
 
 6. In the vocative the mere stem occurs. 
 
 7. The nom. plur. -evs is for ees, § 6, 7. 
 
 113. Learn the declension of zarnp, § 33, 
 and a. 
 
 Observe the following : 
 
 1. The nominative ends in -np, while the 
 stem ends in -ep. 
 
 2. The gen. and dat. sing. drop this e of the 
 stem, and take the accent on the last syl- 
 lable. 
 
 3. Voc. sing. has recessive accent (3, J, 1). 
 
 4. The dat. plur. has ap for ep. 
 
 114. Learn avyp, man, § 33. Note that when. 
 ever ep of the stem would be followed by a vowel, 
 6 takes the place of the e. The same peculiari- 
 ties of accent obtain as in watnp, but -wv of the 
 gen. plur. is circumflexed. 
 
46 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 115. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. éyo eye ) avactacis Kal Son. 2. 7) 
 miatis cov cwle: ce. 3. €v TH SuVaper TOU TvEv- 
 patos eis Vaniralav eicépyetat. 4. attn d€ éotw 
 ) Kpicls OTL TO das EpyeTaL Eis TOV KOTpMOV. — 
 5. ypaddho én’ (on) abtov TO dvopa Tod Beod pov 
 Kal TO dvopa THs TONEwWS TOV Deod ov. 6. avdpa 
 ob ywwackw. 7. viv Kpiois éotiv Tob KooMov 
 tovtov. 8. iets oldauev TOV TaTépa Kal TD 
 untépa. 9. €v TO KOoL@ OALYLY ExeTE. 0. EAE 
 yov obv avT@ Tov (where) éoTLv 6 TaTHP Gov. 
 Il. 7o® Ta Epya Tod TaTpds pov. 12. &v TH 
 hepa THs Kploews oper (shall have) xapav Kab 
 elpnuny. 
 
 II. 1. The faith which we have saves men. 
 2. Life is in him who has the spirit of faith. 
 3. This is my father and my mother. 4. He 
 who does the will of God abides in the truth. 
 5. We have power to become the children of 
 God. 6. He is the resurrection and the life. 
 7, We are raised from the dead on (éy) the day 
 of judgment. 8. He who hears my word comes 
 not into judgment. 9g. In that city he preached 
 the Gospel. 10. For those days are tribula- 
 tion 
 
FUTURE INDICATIVE. 47 
 
 LESSON XVIT. 
 
 FuTURE INDICATIVE. 
 
 116. VOCAPULARY. 
 
 a8ikéw, do wrong. viKkdw, Conguer. 
 
 abtkla, n, wurighteousness. Opodoyéw, Confess. 
 abdikos, n, ov, “urighteous. mepitatéw, walk. 
 avaBrێrw, look up. cuvayo, gather together. 
 dpvéopat, dey. UTayo, 0 AWA). 
 apxopar, beg77. havepdw, make manifest. 
 Bavpatw, wonder at, marvel. hoPéopor, fear. 
 
 pioéw, ace. prrdccw, guard. 
 
 117. The fut. ind., as in English, denotes 
 what is going to take place. 
 The following is the fut. ind. act. of Wo: 
 
 SINE. Fite 
 I. At-o-w, / shall loose, 1. db-0-o-pev, we shall loose, 
 2. Ad-o-Ers etc. 2. Av-o-e-TE, etc. 
 3. Ad-o-eu 3. Adv-c-ov-o 
 
 118. The fut. ind. mid.! of Ave is: 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 I. Av-or-o-par I. Av-o-6-peba 
 2. Ab-o-y 2. Av-o-e-0 be 
 3. Ad-o-e-TAL 3. Ab-c-o-vTat 
 
 1 For the middle voice, see §§ 47, 48. The middle and pas: 
 sive are the same in form, except in the future and the aorist, 
 which we shall learn later. 
 
48 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 119."Observe that the future has primary 
 endings, and differs from the present in the use 
 of c, with which compare sa// in the English 
 future. Note that o appears before the variable 
 vowel %. Hence, while the present is formed 
 by adding % to the stem, the future is formed 
 by adding o%. ; 
 
 Learn the fut. ind. of ecui, § 65. 
 
 120. The future of ddccéw, do wrong, is adiKy- 
 o-w; of viKdw, conguer, is vikj-ow; Of picéo, 
 hate, is puoj-ow; of davepdw, make mantfest, is 
 ghavepwo-cw. From these forms it can be seen 
 that a short final vowel must be lengthened before 
 o% of the future. «=n, a=, 0=o. 
 
 121. The future of aya, lead, is aEw ; of adpyo- 
 pat, begin, is dpEowat; of dudrdacow, guard, stem 
 gurak-, durd—w. From which it is seen that 
 stems in x, y, vy form with o%, &%. 
 
 122. The future of Br™éra, see, is Brea; of 
 avactpépa, turn, is avactpéyw ; Of virta, wash, 
 stem wB-, is vivo. Stems in 7, 8, 6+ 0% = 
 W%. 
 
 123. The future of cafw, save, stem cw6-, is 
 
 cwcw; of wei0w, persuade, is Teicw. From 
 which observe that stems in 7, 6, @ would 
 
 1 But a after e, «, or p is not changed to 7, but a. Cf. 58, 1. 
 
FUTURE INDICATIVE. 49 
 
 hav2 simple o% in the future. The consonant 
 drops before the tense sign. 
 
 124. The various forms of future stems may 
 be seen by examining the following summary : 
 
 Vowel Stems. Mute Stems. 
 
 - a 0 i 
 x c ae % bs Labials, 7, B,P+o% =W% 
 pe Palatals, Ky ¥> X +a%= E% 
 
 2 ow 6 
 aN ; by = ay Linguals, 7, 6, 0+ 0% =0% 
 
 Other vowel stems hardly No stems end in the double 
 occur. consonants €, ¢, y, nor in o. 
 
 The future of liquid stems, A, p, v, p, will be 
 explained in a future lesson. Aside from stems 
 in these four letters, we may now be able to 
 form the future of any regular verb in Greek. 
 
 125. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. 4 wistis cov cwoe ce. 2. ypavo 
 fa) A = € / an / 
 TAUTA, TALOIa, UMiV. 3. O KOTMOS HMas pLoNnoel. 
 4. Twéeurpw TOV vioy fou TOY ayaTNTOV. 5. OUTw 
 
 / a > 
 
 (this) Kat 6 TaTHp o ovpavios ToLjoel Viv. 6. ako- 
 
 ae S 
 Novbnaw cot, Kupie. 7. ayamnoes Kvplov Tov 
 
 \ ’ e/ N/ \ b) A aA lal 
 
 Oeov év OAH Kapdia cov Kai év OAn TH YuXH cov 
 
 \ ’ vA fal / £ ee 3 \ 
 Kal év OAn TH Sravola (mind) cov: avTn éoTiv 
 ¢ / 9 / s € / > lal c/ > 
 n TpwTn EVTOAH. 8. OMoOYNTwW aAUTOLS OTL OU 
 al es / a 2) / 
 ylvooKm Upas. Q. EV ExElvn TH NEPA EV TH OVO- 
 
 1 See § 2 for the classification of consonants. 
 E 
 
50 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 wati pov aitnoecbe, Kal ov Aێyw Luly OTL eyw 
 épwticw Tov matépa Tepl Uuadv. 10. ovTa@s dé 
 icovra of éryatow TpaToL. II. melcowey THY 
 kapdlav nav. i2. odtws éatar Kai (also) ev 
 Tals Huepats TOD viod Tod avOpwrov. 
 
 II. 1. There shall be tribulations. 2. We shall 
 do the truth. 3. He who knoweth the truth 
 and doeth it shall live. 4. Ye shball.be with! 
 me this day. 5. They shail hate us because 
 we are not of (éx) the world. 6. We shall love 
 the Lord God with all our heart. 7. I shall do 
 the will of my father. 8. The son of man shall 
 believe on (eés) the word. 9g. They shall bear 
 witness concerning Him that He is the light. 
 10. We shall seek Him. 11. There shall be joy 
 in Heaven because he is saved. 12. He shall 
 glorify God. 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION: MUTE STEMS. 
 
 126. VOCABULARY. 
 
 alov, 6, agé, ON. Kaivds, 22W. 
 adAStpios, another's, strange. «pipa, 76, Judgment 
 Bpapa, rd, food. olkodSopéw, buzld up. 
 earls, 1, Lope. apex Burepos, elder. 
 erounos, ready. okotia, , darkness. 
 Sovredw, de a servant. havepds, manifest. 
 
 Xapts, 1, 27ace. 
 1 werd with Gen, 
 
THIRD DECLENSION CONTINUED. 51 
 127. Observe the following: 
 
 I. €Amis, hope, stem ermid-; vv&, night, stem 
 vukt-; Trovs, foot, stem trod-; capé, flesh, stem 
 capx-; pas, light, stem gat-; yxdpis, grace, 
 stem yapir-. 
 
 2. In all these nouns note that the stem ends 
 in a mute (§ 2), and that the nominative is 
 formed by adding s to the stem. For the 
 euphonic changes that occur with s and the 
 mutes, see 124. 
 
 128. In aliav, age, stem awv-; Hryeuov, leader, 
 stem nyewov-; and yep, hand, stem yeup-, we 
 have liquid stems which form the nominative 
 from the mere stem. A _ short vowel, as in 
 nyewov-, may be lengthened. 
 
 a. apxwv, prince, ruler, has the stem apxovr-, but does 
 not add s for the nominative, which is the mere stem with 
 t dropped and o lengthened to w. 
 
 129. Learn the declension of ydpis, édais, 
 and apywr, § 28, and aiar, § 32. 
 
 130. When nouns with stem in 7, 6, or @ pre- 
 ceded by « or v are not accented on the ultima, 
 the acc. sing. has v, the mute being dropped ; 
 €.g. “apis, YaplT-, acc. yapiv; but édzris, ed7L6-, 
 has acc. édmida. Cf. 112, 5. 
 
52 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 131. .The voc. sing. is rare and is usually the 
 same as thenom. édmis, however, has voc. éAzré. 
 
 132. When -vt- of the stem would come before 
 -ot of the dat. plur., both the letters are dropped 
 and the preceding vowel is lengthened (0 to ov) ; 
 e.g. apyev, stem apyorr-, dat. plur. apYouar. 
 
 133: EXERCISES. 
 
 J / / \ a A > / ' 
 I. 1. evpicxers ye xapiv TapaT@ Gem. 2. avTos 
 b] ’ ” / \ 1 be / / b / 
 eat év TO howti. 3. vuvil dé pever TIOTIS, EATS, 
 a / 
 ayarn. 4. iete (behold) tas xelpads pou Kai TOUS 
 / ¢ / / / 
 mosas pou OTL &yw elms avTos. 5. 0 €abiwy éx 
 lal an ¢e lal 
 Tovrou Tov aptou bynoet eis TOV aid@va. 6. 0 Inaods 
 \ . lal 
 pyetas eis THY oiKklay TOD dpxovTos. 7. ov yap 
 > ig \ as > ’ ig x ‘e \ e ” 
 €oTe UTO VOMOV AAN VUiTro xapiv. 8. Kal O EX@V 
 \ > /> 7 > > 4 ’ a , € 
 Thy érmida tavTnv em (22) avT@ TwleTAl. YQ. O 
 lal la) / an 
 52 S0dXo0s od péver ev TH OlKia Eis TOV al@Va, O VLOS 
 wévet eis TOV al@va. 10. YapiTL? dé Peod Eipe O Eipe. 
 Ald id / 5 ae / \Y .e , 
 II. cov éativ ) Bacirela Kai 1) Svvapmis Kal y d0€a 
 an n / \ 
 eis Tos al@vas. 12. xdpis bpiv Kai eipnvn arro 
 a lal / lal - lal 
 Geod marpos juav cat Kupiov ‘Incov Xpictov. 
 
 II. 1. Truth abides forever. 2. Now have we 
 faith and hope. 3. I write these (things) with 
 my hand. 4. The light appears in the darkness. 
 
 1. may be added to adverbs and pronouns to emphasize 
 
 them. The accent in all such cases is upon the ¢; ¢.g. odx Is 
 often odxl; viv, vuvl. 2 Cf. § 157. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION CONCLUDED. 53 
 
 5. We are saved by faith. 6. He who has love 
 in his heart has grace. 7. We are not under 
 the law, but under grace. 8. By the grace of 
 God we are what we are. g. Behold my hands 
 and feet. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTER NOUNS, STEMS IN eo-; 
 MascuLINE Nouns, STEMS IN ev-. 
 
 134. VOCABULARY. 
 
 &pxrepevs, 0, chief priest. iepeds, Priest, HIERArchy. 
 Bactreds, 0, £72. pédXos, 76, 7zentber. 
 
 Yyévos, Td, 1QCE. pEpos, TO, Part. 
 
 Ypappareds, 0, scrzbe. _ ous, T6, Car. 
 
 yuvn, wowan. TAGs, 16, sz2ltetude. 
 €Ovos, 76, 2a¢z072. oKdtos, T6, darkness. 
 
 €00s, 76, Cvsto7t, ETHICS. TéAos, 76, erd. 
 
 €deos, T6, Pity. Vdwp, 76, water, HYDRO/ogy. 
 
 Neuter nouns with the nominative in -os and 
 the stem in -ec form an important class oi nouns 
 of the third declension. The most common 
 examples are given above. 
 
 135. Learn the declension of yévos, vace (§ 30). 
 Observe the following. 
 
 1. In the gen. and dat. sing. the o of the stem 
 is dropped between the two vowels, and yéveos 
 contracts into yévous.. 
 
54 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 2. In all cases of the plur. the o of the stem 
 is dropped; ryévea, yevéwv are contracted to yevn, 
 yevav ; see §§ €, 8 and 6, 6. . 
 
 136. Learn the declension of Baairevs, king 
 ($ 31), with which compare the vowel stem 
 of mroXs. 
 
 137. For some irregular nouns of the third 
 declension, as yuvy, woman, Opie, hair, ods, ear, 
 mous, foot, bdwp, water, yelp hand, see § 34. 
 Only such forms are given as occur in the New 
 Testament. 
 
 138. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. aN ovm@ Td Tédos éoTiv. 2. avd Eb 
 \ > / \ > / A , 
 
 Bacirevs ‘lovéatwy. 3. TO evayyéXLov 0 KnpvtTw 
 év tots Overt. 4. ovK EXELS pépos MET pod. 
 5. of d€ apytepets Kal of mpecBvTepor Errercav 
 (persuaded) rods bydous. 6. Eis TA EOVN TropeEvo- 
 peOa. 7. ovK Eyouev Bacirhéa. 8. ev evi (one) 
 
 , \ 1 / BA / > 4-2 Le) 
 o@pmaTtt TOAAA! wérn Eyouev. Q. yapls amd ‘Inood 
 Xpiotod, 0 dpyov Tov Bactrhéwv TIS ys. 10. Kal 
 54 \ n°) / la) 5 i 
 érraice (struck) Tov Tod apylepéws SovrAOV: HV Oe 
 jvowa Ta SovAM Madryos. I1. eueddev *Inoods 
 ’ , € \ a wy \ > ¢e \ 
 atroOvncKev uTep ( for) TL9 EOvous Kal ovy v7rép 
 Tov €Ovous povov, 12. xapis, édeos, eipyvn ara 
 deod tratpds kal Xpiorod *Inood tod Kupiov hyov. 
 
 1 Many. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 55 
 
 Mistry care] HOt ilesthesdarkness., m2.eainis 
 one is the king of the Jews. 3. For we know 
 in (éx) part. 4. The scribes and the chief 
 priests will say this. 5. They know that he 
 isenotetue: king cof this world. .6, A great 
 multitude will follow him (dat.). 7. We have 
 a part in the kingdom of God. 8. I say to 
 you brethren that the end is not yet. 9. We 
 shall make him king. 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 
 
 139. VOCABULARY. 
 ayiatw, sanctify. amréBavov, / died. 
 Soxéw, seem, think. €Badov, 7 threw. 
 Bedopar, behold. éyevounv, 7 became. 
 KkaWapil{e, purcfy. elSov, 7 saw. 
 kataBalvo, go down. elrrov, / sazd. 
 Opaw, see. evpov, J found. 
 mapadkapBave, *eCeZVve. mAVov, 7 went or came. 
 tubdrdw, blind. mapédaBov, / recetved. 
 
 140. The aorist is the most common tense in 
 Greek to represent what has taken place. Thus, 
 T loosed, I did loose, or [ have loosed would most 
 likely be expressed in Greek by one word, é-Av-ca, 
 the aor. ind. act. of Avo. 
 
56 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 141. The aorist indicative of Avo is: 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 Sing. 1. €-v-0a é-Av-o'd-pyVv 
 2. €-Av-ca-s é-Av-ow (for é-Av-ca-co) 
 3. €-Av-oe €-A0-ca-To 
 Plur. 1. é-db-0a-pev é-Av-od-peba 
 2. é-Av-ca-Te é-Ad-ca-obe © 
 3. €-Av-ca-v #-AU-ca-vTO 
 
 a. In 2 pers. sing. ind. mid. o drops between the two 
 vowels a o, and these contract to w, § 5, I. 
 
 142. Observe the following on the formation 
 of the aorist: 
 
 1. The augment as in the imperfect. 
 
 2. The tense suffix is ca, which changes to 
 oe in 3 per. sing. act. 
 
 3. The personal endings are secondary. v of 
 I per. sing. act. is dropped. 
 
 143. Compare the suffix oa with d or ed in 
 the past tense in English; e.g.: 
 
 3 
 €-Av-cra-s é-rAnpo-cra-pev 
 loose-ad-you fill - ed-we 
 
 144. The same principles of augment are 
 found in the aor. ind. as in the imperf. ind., 36, 
 and the same euphonic changes with oa of the 
 aor. as with o% of the fut., 120-124. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST INDICATIVE. 57 
 
 145. Notall verbs have the aorist in oa, which 
 is calied the frst aortst, but form the tense on 
 the simple stem of the verb by the use of the 
 variable vowel %. This is called the second 
 aorist. 
 
 146. The 2 aor. ind. of Radda, throw, theme 
 or stem Ban., Is: 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 Sting. 1. €-Bad-o-v é-Bad-d-pyv 
 2. &-Bad-e-s é-Bad-ov (for é-Bad-e-co) 
 3. €-Bad-e é-Bad-e-To 
 Plur. 1. €-Bad-o-pev é-Bad-d-pe80 
 2. €-Bad-e-re é-Bad-e-00e 
 3. €-Bad-o-v €-Bad-o-vTo 
 
 a. Note that the only difference in form between the 
 2 aor. and the imperf. of the same verb is a difference ‘n 
 stem; e.g. €PadX-ov, imperf., has the pres. stem Badd-, 
 while €-Bad-ov, 2 aor., has the simple stem or theme, 
 
 Baa-. 
 
 147. Kew verbs have both aorists. There ts 
 no aifference whatever in meaning between a 
 first aorist and a second aortst. 
 
 148. The following 2 aor. are given in the 
 vocabulary : amro@vncKka, theme Oapr-, 2 aor. azeé- 
 Gavov; yivowat, theme yev-, 2 aor. éyevouny ; 
 opaw, theme 0-, 2 aor. eidov; ebdpicxw, theme 
 evp-, 2 aor. evpov ; épxouwat, theme ed6-, 2 aor. 
 
58 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 ANOov ;.TraparapBave, theme AaB-, 2 aor. wape- 
 NaBov; eizrov has no present. 
 
 Note that the second aorist has the simple 
 theme of the verb and the %. 
 
 149. The difference in form between a first 
 aorist and a second aorist may be illustrated by 
 the following: 
 
 I. dyamdw, Zove.... 1 aor. q-yamh-ca-pev, dove-d-we 
 DPA GARG ee ile eae: I aor. é-AdAn-oa-v,  talk-ed-they 
 3. Baddow, throw... 2 aor. ¢Par-o-pev, threw-we 
 4. AapBave, cake... 2 aor. €-AaB-o-v, took-they 
 
 In 1 and 2 the past tense in both the Greek 
 and the English is formed by adding some- 
 thing, — oa, and d or ed. 
 
 In 3 and 4 no suffix is found, but the change 
 is in the stem of the verb. Badd-, throw, Bar, 
 threw; NapBava, take, NaB, took. 
 
 150. EXERCISES. 
 
 4 
 1 2. éyparra 
 bpiv, waidia, OTL ylwooKeTEe Tx TATépa. 3. NKOU- 
 ¢ ? if 
 gate OTL) eoxaTn wpa épyeTat. 4. Kal ovK oidE 
 lal e / e/ ¢e a ’ Ys A 
 mov (where) vTayer OTL ) oKETLAa ETUPAWTE TOUS 
 > \ ’ an 95 
 opOarpors avTov. 5. els Ta ldva AOE Kai ot 
 yA > \ ty / >] X ,’ / 
 idiot avTov ov tapédaBov. 6. avTos nyatnoev 
 
 I. 1. caOas éxetvos trepreTatncen. 
 
 nas. 7. 0 cacducba atrayyédXopmev Kal vpiv. 
 
 1 wept and mpé do not drop the final vowel before the augment. 
 
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 59 
 
 \ \ ’ AS A ” ’ , 
 8. mepi yap é“ov exetvos eypawev. 9. eOeacavTo 
 é 2 / , 
 & émroincev Kal éTlaTEevoay eis aUTOV. 10. Xpto- 
 an / e / > 
 
 TOS UTép HUOV aTéfaver. II. OUTOS éaTLY UTép 
 e a 5 ¢ 
 ov eitrov. 12. €v T@ KOop@ HV Kal O Kdcpos Ov 
 
 , a 4 \ 73 
 auTov éyéveTo. 13. 7 urn eimev OvKx éxo 
 v \ 4 A b / \ bY 
 avopa. 14. Kal €v T® AdXOTPi@ TioTOL OK 
 evyévea Oe. 
 
 bieets Lhey asked shim 2 They wenteand 
 saw where (7rov) he was abiding. 3. The word 
 became flesh. 4. He acknowledged that he is 
 the Christ. 5. He bore witness, saying that he 
 saw the spirit. 6. For he sent them to preach 
 the kingdom of God. 7. And it came to pass 
 in those days. 8. And I saw and heard. 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 FirsT AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 151. VOCABULARY. 
 GAnOivds, 7772. Stdvow, 4, 7777. 
 Gvepnos, 0, wz77d. éxei, auv., there. 
 dvolyw, oper. évred0ev, adv., thevce. 
 atroxtetvea, Az//. émel, Conj., when, since. 
 atrodvw, release. érepwtaw, ask (a question) 
 apt, adv., just now.  emAyuta, y, aeszre. 
 aoGevéw, a7 Sich. loxupés, strong. 
 Blos, 0, /zfe. omov, adv., where. 
 SuaBodros, 0, deve. Bos, 0, fear. 
 
 Xpela, y, reed. 
 
60 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 152. The aor. subjv. of Avo : 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 Sing. 1. Mb-o-o Ab-o-w-par 
 2. Av-o-7-S Av-o-y (for Ab-oy-car) 
 3. Ad-o-y Av-o-7n-TAL 
 Plur. 1. \b-0-w-pev Av-o-0-pe8a 
 2. Av-o-n-TE Ab-o-n-o Be 
 3. Av-c-@-o1 AVv-o-@-vTaL 
 
 153. Observe on the aor. subjv. : 
 
 1. There is xo augment. 
 
 2. o is the tense suffix. 
 
 3. The personal endings are the same as in 
 the pres. subjv. 
 
 4. The aor. stem, Avo-, is the same as the 
 aor. ind. stem, 141, and the euphonic changes 
 will be the same as in the aor. ind. 
 
 154. Write the aor. subjv. of zrovéw, do; dave- 
 pow, make manifest; ypadw, write; meiOw, per- 
 suade,; ayo, lead; apxopat, begin; Téa, send ; 
 déyomat, recerve. 
 
 155. The 2 aor. subjv. of Barro, theme Banr-, 
 is — 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 Sing. 1. Bad-o Bad-w-par 
 2. Bad-y-s Badr-y (for Bad-n-car) 
 3. Bar-y Bad-n-TaL 
 Plur. 1. Bad-w-pev Bad-d-peba 
 2. Badr-n-Te Bar -n-o 8 
 3. BadA-w-or BaA-w-vrar 
 
FIRST AND SECOND AORIST SUBJUNCTIVE. 61 
 
 156. Note that the same principles are ob- 
 served in the formation of the 2 aor. subjv. as 
 in the 2 aor. ind. (146-147). 
 
 157. The 2 aor. subjv. of the following may 
 be conjugated: 7Adov, J came, subjv. €\0o; 
 eidov, 1 saw, subjv. ido; éyevounv, I became, 
 subjv. yévwuat. Observe that the augment 
 does not appear in the subjv. 
 
 158. Examine the following: 
 
 I. mictevwper eis aitov, let us believe on Him. 
 2. muoTevowper eis airov, let us believe on Him. 
 
 Observe that there is no difference in trans- 
 lation between a present subjunctive and an 
 aorist. The distinction ordinarily made between 
 the present and the aorist is that the present 
 denotes what is continued or extended, while the 
 aorist expresses a simple act without any refer- 
 ence to a continuance of the same. In 1 the 
 idea is Let ws continue, or keep on having faith 
 wn him. In 2 the thought is Let us believe in 
 him now, or get belief in him. 
 
 159. In dependent clauses with iva, zx order 
 that, and éay, zf, either the pres. or aor. subjv. may 
 be used, with the distinction in 158. Zhe aorist 
 subjunctive does not denote past time, but ts pres- 
 ent or future with reference to the principal verb. 
 
62 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 160. The 2 aor. part. has the same endings 
 as the present, -wv, -wevos, 90 and 99, with the 
 / €"'> / 7 AS , 
 accent on-wv. o édMav, he having come; o idor, 
 he having seen; 0 eitov, he having said; 6 atro- 
 Oavev, he having died; 0 XaBov, he having 
 recetved; 06 yevomevos, he having become. 
 
 161. The 2 aor. inf. also has the endings ot 
 the present, -evv, -cAar, 89 and 98, with (~) on the 
 ultima of the active and the (’) on the penult of 
 the middle. éddety, to come; tdetv, to see, etrreiv, 
 to say; atro@aveiv, to die; NaBetv, to receive; 
 yevéerOa, to become. 
 
 162. EXERCISES. 
 
 r\ y cr ¢ / ? ” ¢ 
 I. €av ei T@MEV OTL ApapTiav ovK EyomEV, 7 
 ’ / > y” > Cone \ oe > \ 
 anyGeva ovx éativ év nuiv. 2. Kal avtn éotiv 
 \ la} a al 
 7) €VTON) AVTOD wa TidTEVTOMMEV TO OVOMATL TOU 
 cen 2 lal > lal nr e 5S > 
 viov avtov, Incov Xpictovd. 3. ovtos HAGE eis 
 / Vf a Sf 
 paptuplavy iva paptupion tept Tod dwtos iva 
 7 na 
 mavtes (all) mistevowow bt av’Tov. 4. aywopev 
 \ ¢€ al C/ > / ’ > lal > X 
 Kal nuels Wa aTroPav@mev eT avTov. 5. éXOwv 
 i : >) lal e 4 95 an 
 ovv o Inaovds evtpev avTov. 6. otk Hv éxelvos 
 \ lal b] > t/ / \ la) / 
 TO POS AXXN Wa paptupytn Tept Tod hwros. 
 4 lal 
 7. eTUpr@cEev av’TaVY Tos dhOarpods Wa p) 
 lal >] an 
 idwar Tols OPOarpwots. 8. Adfapos} aréOavev Kai 
 fi wee cal 6 
 yaipw (rejoice) 8 bas Wa mictevante STL OvK 
 / al > a 
 nunv® éxei. Q. eyo od hAOov Barely eipnvnv em? 
 1 Learn the capital letters, § 1. 2 See 78. 
 
 « 
 
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES. 63 
 
 \ n 95 Mi a an 
 THY ynv. 10. AGE oO vids TOD Beod iva AVaN TA 
 yy an , > e ’ / an \ 
 épya Tov diaBorXov. II. 7 émiOuuia THs capKos 
 sN ¢ ’ / lal 3. lal ‘ e > / 
 Kal » émiOupia Tav oPOartyav Kat 7 adrafovia 
 ° $ an / > 7” > n / 
 (vain display) Tov Biov, 2uK EoTLV Ex TOD TrATPOS, 
 ANNA €x TOD KOcpOU éotiv: Kal 0 KécpMos Tapaye- 
 Tat (pass away) Kal 4) érOvpia avrod, o bé€ Tov 
 \ , a a a 
 TO OérXnpma Tov Geod péver eis TOY ala@va. 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 
 IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 
 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 163. VOCABULARY. 
 a&yopatw, buy. ov8€... od8€, wezther... nor. 
 adivaros, 277possible. ovre . . . ovre, weither ... 
 axa0aptos, 77clean. nor. 
 GwapTwrds, 6, Sz77er. mwapa, prep. w. gen., from 
 atras, al. the side of; w. dat., dy 
 BiBAlov, dook, Bible. the side of; w. acc., fo the 
 BotAopar, wesh. side of. 
 ehevBepos, free. mas, all. 
 péyas, great. ToAvs, 72uCch, many. 
 OTe, CONj., wher. onelpw, SOW. 
 
 Wevorns, 0, Lar. 
 164. Learn the declension of zroAvs, much, 
 and péyas, great, § 36. To be observed : 
 
 1. That both these adjectives have Two dis- 
 tinct stems, a longer and a shorter form, of 
 which the former is more frequent. 
 
64 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 2. That they are declined, for the most part, 
 in the first and second declension. 
 
 165. Learn the declension of ds, a//, § 36, 
 and note the following peculiarities : 
 
 1. The masc. and neut. are declined in the 
 third declension, while the fem. is declined in 
 the first declension. 
 
 2. The stem is vavt-, and the nom. mase. is 
 formed by adding s, as in mute stems. In the 
 fem. nom. sing. -oa is added. Cf. 127, 2. 
 
 3. vt- drops before s of nom. sing. and -o« of 
 the dat. plur. Cf. 182. 
 
 4. The-accent in the masc. and neut. sing. is 
 that of monosyllables of the third declension, 
 108, while in the plur. it is an exception to the 
 rule. 
 
 166. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 1. cwavra 6v avtov éyéveto.t 2. TavTa TavTa 
 érddnaev 0 “Inoots év trapaBorais Tois dyXots. 
 3. peyadn? cov 7) wiotis. 4. Kal éyéveto poBos 
 wéyas eri? mavtas. 5. Tas 0 €v aVT@ Mévav ovy 
 dpaptaver.® 6, peta TADTA HKOVoA hovijy “Eeyadnv 
 dyNoV TOANOV. 7. EoTar yap Oris peyadn 
 8.. ravtes bpels viol dwtos €ote Kal viol npépas. 
 Q. Kal TOAD TAOS aro THs VadtNaias HKOvAOV: 
 
 1 Cf. 48, 10, note. 2 In the pred. position, 64 % See 167. 
 
PERFECY INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 65 
 Oncev. 10. TO aiua Inood tod viod a’tod Kaba- 
 / ct n > ' , ig / ” \ 
 pier mas ato jTadons adpaptias. II. éTt Toda 
 4 (eel / / \ b) \ SY 
 Evo vyiv rNEeyev. 12. TavTHY THY évTOANV EXaBov 
 Tapa TOU TAaTpOS ov. 13. ovTE ewe OldaTE OUTE 
 TOV TATEpa [LoU. 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 
 
 167. VOCABULARY. 
 dAnPds, adv., Zruly. oev, adv., whence. 
 apaptdve, S272. ottw,! adv., thus. 
 avaBalvo, go up. mov, adv., where. 
 avabev, adv., from above. ohate, £271. 
 S.abqKn, 4, covenant. rederdw, fulfil, make per- 
 €optH, y, feast. fect. 
 éfw, adv. w. gen., wethout.  tdos, o, frzend. 
 émi, prep. w. gen., wfon; wWebdSopa, Ze. 
 W. acc., 20, On, Over. ws, CONj., as, about. 
 ALos, 0, 5772. iréw, love. 
 168. The perf. ind. of Ave is: 
 ACTIVE. ‘ PASSIVE Or MIDDLE. 
 Sing. 
 I. Aé-Av-Ka, 7 have loosed, dé-dv-por, J have been loosed or 
 2. A€é-Au-kas etc. hé-Av-crat have freed for 
 3. A€-Av-Ke hé-Av-Tat myself. 
 I. Ae-AV-Ka-pev ile Ae-Ad-pe8a, 
 2. Ae-AU-Ka-Te Aé-Av-0 Be 
 3. Ae-Ad-Ka-ot Aé-Av-vTaL 
 
 1 But ovrws before a vowel. 
 
66 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 169. Observe: 1. That the tense suffix in the 
 act. is-ca, with which compare -oa of the aor. 
 2. That the 3 per. plur. act. has -ov, which shows 
 the endings to be primary. In the sing. the end- 
 ings do not appear as primary, but are the same 
 as in the aor. act. The pu, ae, etc, never occur 
 here. 3. That besides the augment there is the 
 initial consonant of the verb, which extra sylla- 
 ble Ae- is called veduplication. 4. That the perf. 
 pass. has the reduplication and the primary pass. 
 endings, which are added directly to the theme 
 without the intervention of any tense suffix. 
 
 170. The following forms will indicate the 
 perfect of a few verbs: 
 
 vikdw, conguer.... Perf. Act. ve-vixn-Ka 
 motevw, believe... Perf. Act. me-mlorev-Ka 
 Gyamdw, love..... Perf. Act. nyérn-Ka 
 airéw, ask for.... Perf. Act. yryn-Kka! 
 tedeidw, fulfil..... Perf. Pass. re-reXelw-par 
 yevvaw, beget..... Perf. Pass. ye-yévvyn-pat 
 
 It is seen from these examples that a short 
 final vowel is lengthened before -xa or -as, as 
 before all tense suffixes, and that a verb begin- 
 ning with a vowel or a diphthong cannot have 
 the reduplication, but the simple augment. For 
 the principles of augment and reduplication, see 
 $77, 1, 2aaed 
 
 1See 36, 2 for this augment. 
 
PERFECT INDICATIVE ACTIVE AND PASSIVE. 67 
 
 171. The perfect has many peculiarities, which need 
 not concern the learner at this stage, and can well be left 
 for larger hand-books or the lexicon. 
 
 Learn the following perfects of irregular 
 verbs: 
 
 AKOUO ALI «isis 2 Perf. Act. &x-fKo-a 
 yiaokw, kvow.... Perf. Act. €-yvo-Ka 
 OPM See ter sate are Perf. Act. €-épa-Ka 
 
 172. A few verbs have a second perfect in -a, 
 not -ca, § 54; eg. yivouar, become, 2 perf. yé- 
 yov-a ; épyopuat, come, go, 2 perf. éd-7dvO-a. 
 
 173. EXERCISES. 
 
 Va ¢ 4 
 I. KL €v TOUTW YLVw@aKOMEV OTL eyV@KapEV 
 ¢) A > 
 avicv, 2. oldapev OTL Eyomev A HTHKaMEV aT 
 Qn an lal n c lal 
 QUTOU. 3. TAVTA NEAGAHKA UVulV. 4. TAS 0 TOLOV 
 \ / n an 
 THV dtKaLoavny €E aAUTOD yeyévVNTaL. 5. Kal pets 
 a a c \ an 
 TETLOTEVKAMEV THY ayaTHY Hv exer oO Geos ev vpiv. 
 ¢ \ lal 
 6. avtn Oé eat  Kplols STL TO Pas EAnAVOEV 
 > \ / \ c / A P) x / 
 €l$ TOV KOTMOV. 7. TA pHMaTA a éyw EAAANKA 
 A n , A 4 
 vuly mvedpa é€otiv Kal Con €otiv. 8. 0 éwpaxa- 
 Mev Kal AKnKOaMEV ATTayyéAXNOpLEV Kal Upiv. 9. ev 
 7 n nan , 
 TOUT@ 1) ayaTrn TOD Oeod TeTEAELWTAL. 10. ypadw 
 c ¢ \ ’ n 
 Umiv, TaTEpEs, OTL eyV@KATE AUTOV aT apy. 
 ’ 4 pi x id ’ / >} ec € lal 
 Ii. €v TovTm éotiv 1) ayamrn, ovy OTL pels 
 \ \ 3 ¢ a ’ 
 nyaTyKawev TOV Beov, AXN OTL auTOsS HyaTN- 
 ral x © \ an lal 
 aev nuas. 12. avTos yap o TaTnp iret vMas, 
 n ff f 
 OTL vpels eue TEPLANKATE KQL IETLOTEVKATE OTL 
 
68 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 a x na , 
 éy@ Tapa tod matpos €&HdOov. 13. ~revernv 
 N 
 TETOLINKE AUTOV OTL OV TETIOTEUKED Eis THY “LApTL- 
 ‘ e e fa) a a) 
 play iv mewapTupynKev 0 Geos Epi TOV viod avTod. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 174. VOCABULARY. 
 
 avayiwaokw, read. 
 avpvov, adv., fo-0rrow. 
 BrAacdnpéw, BLASPHEME. 
 yeved, 4, Leneration. 
 §8axn, 1, teaching. 
 éyyts, adv., ear. 
 ldopar, Zeal. 
 
 Kedevw, Command. 
 Avutréw, L77EVE. 
 
 mao xa, 76, indecl., Passover. 
 
 wey, adv., whence. 
 
 mpwt, adv., early in the morn 
 ing. 
 
 codés, wese. 
 
 oraupsw, crucify. 
 
 v6, prep. w. gen. and acc. 
 under. 
 
 dovéw, call. 
 
 175. The aor. pass. of Avw is — 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Sing. 1. €-d0b-On-v 
 
 2. €AV-On-s 
 
 3. €-Ad-Oy 
 Plur. 1. €-db-0n-pev 
 2. €-Av-On-Te 
 3. €¢-Ad-by-cav 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Av-80 
 Av-O45 
 Av-6y 
 Av-96-pev 
 Av-04j-Te 
 dv-86-o1 
 
 176. Observe the following: 
 
 1. The suffix for the aor. pass. is Oe, which is 
 Oy in the ind., and contracts with -o, -ys, etc., 
 
 of the subjv. with the 
 and § 6, 5. 
 
 circumflex. See § 5, 8 
 
AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 69 
 
 2. The personal endings in the aor. ind. pass. 
 are the secondary active. So likewise in the 
 subjv. are found zo¢ pass., but act. endings. 
 
 177. Before -@e a short final vowel is length- 
 ened; ¢.g. movéw, do, érroinOnv; havepow, make 
 manifest, epavepwOnv. 
 
 178. A theme in a mute stem (§ 2) is changed 
 before -6e; e.g. dyo, lead, iyOnv; rei0w, per- 
 suade, étreta Onv. 
 
 Ky ¥, X+ Oe = xOe 
 
 a, B, p+ Oc = hoe 
 
 tT, 6, 0+ Oe = ofe 
 179. Some deponent verbs (76) have an aor, 
 pass. Such are called passive deponents; e.g. 
 Topevomat, go, émropevOnv, [ went; amroxpivomas, 
 
 reply, atrexplOnv, I replied. 
 
 180. In some verbs there is found a 2 aor. 
 pass. with the suffix e only; e.¢. ypddo, write, 
 2 aor. pass. éypadn, 27¢ was written. See 2 aor. 
 pass. of dalva, § 58. 
 
 181. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. Kal » Son év ait@ epavepobn. 2. Kal ame 
 KplOncav ot paOntal avtod. 3. Kat é&eov 
 émropevOn eis Erepov Td7ov. 4. OTL eyyvs Hv oO 
 TOTOS THS ToAEwWS OTrov é€aTtavpwbyn oO ‘Inaods. 
 5. €av O€ Tropev0O Téurym avTov Tpos Upas. 
 
70 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 6. otk €€ aipatwy ovdé éx OerXnpatos capKos 
 ovoe €k OeXnpatos avdpos arr éx Oeod éyevyn)- 
 Oncav. 7. eis (for) TovTo éhavepwOn oO vids Tov 
 Geod iva Avon Ta epya SiaBorov. 8. oldamev OTL 
 €av autos havepwOn bporor (like) avto écopeBa. 
 g. atrexpiOn o Inoots Kat eivev avtots TOTO éoTt 
 TO épyov Tov Geov. 10. oida Tobey epyouat Kal 
 Tod UTayw* vpeis dé ovK oldate TdOEY Epyomat 
 ) TOD UTayo. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 182. VOCABULARY. 
 apviov, 76, lamb. AoylLopar, account. 
 Suvatds, Possible, able. pikpds, M2ZZ/e. 
 éxXekTOs, 0, Chosen, ELECT. mavtote, adv., always. 
 éveka, prep. W. gen., 0” account mdravaw, lead astray. 
 
 of. : ™po, prep. w. gen., dé 
 érravpiov, adv., on the morrow. fore. 
 edxapiotéw, o2ve thanks, bless.  tedéw, finish. 
 kopun, 4, v2llage. Tovottos, sch. 
 
 xXopis, adv., as a prep. w. gen., apart from. 
 
 183. The pres. part. of efui, J am: 
 
 Sing. Plur. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 »” > ” ” > ” 
 N.V. ov ovcTa ov OVTES oOVTaL ovTa 
 G. ovtTos ovans dvTos OvTav otcay dvTwy 
 D. ovte ovon ove ovo ovoais ovcL 
 A. ovTa ovcav ov OvTas ovcas svTa 
 
PARTICIPLES. 7% 
 
 184. Observe the following : 
 
 1. This participle is declined in three genders, 
 sing. and plur. the same as was, 165. 
 
 2. The stem ovt- becomes wy- in nom. masc. 
 sing., and ovea is for évtca in nom. fem. sing. 
 ie ieut. sing, 1s.the mere stem, , Cf, 106;.5. 
 
 185. Learn the pres. act. part. of Ava, § 43. 
 
 Note that the pres. part. act. of any verb in 
 - is the present stem of the verb with the pres. 
 part. of edu. 
 
 What is the pres. act. part. of dxovw, hear, 
 Ayo, SAV, Kpiva, Judge, ywwookw, know ? 
 
 Participles are accented like adjectives, not with the 
 recessive accent of verbs. 
 
 186. Second aorist participles in -wy (160) are 
 declined the same as pres. part. in -wv. 
 
 187. The same tense signs are found in the 
 participles as occur in the tenses of the indica- 
 
 Paes Fut. Aor. Perf. 
 
 ACTIVE. -o- -oa- eo 
 MIDDLE. -0-: -0a- No sign but the accent on the penult. -[LEVOS 
 PASSIVE. -Ono- -He- 66 “co we 6 és 
 
 For the changes before tense suffixes, see 
 124 and 178. 
 
 188. Learn the aor. act. and pass. part. of 
 Avw, § 43, and observe the same principles in 
 
72 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 the formation of the nom. sing. as in the pres. 
 act. part. 
 
 In the aor. pass. the form )vGels, which has 
 irregular accent, is for Av@évTs, 165, 3. e€ is 
 lengthened to e. 
 
 189. All middle and passive participles, except 
 the aorist passive, have the ending -pevos. 
 
 Nghe Fut. Aor. Perf. 
 
 MIDDLE. Av-0-evos dv-c-d-wevos Av-cd-evos AE€-Av-|LEVOS 
 PASSIVE. Same as the middle, except the fut. pass. is Av-On- 
 o0-[LEVOS. 
 
 190. Examine the following: 
 
 I. dmoxpleis Tatra amnrOev. 
 a. Having said this) 
 b. When he said this i he went away. 
 ¢. He said this and 
 
 2. mopevopevor O€ Hueis Exnpvooouer. 
 a. Going moreover 
 b. As we advanced | we preached. 
 c. While we advanced 
 3. dav dé radta eOarvpaler. 
 a. Seeing this (these) ) 
 b. When he saw this } he marvelled. 
 c. Because he saw this ) 
 
 191. Observe in these sentences: 
 
 1. The participle agrees in number and case 
 with the subject of the verb. 
 
AORIST PASSIVE INDICATIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE. 73 
 
 2. While the participle may be rendered into 
 English by a participle (Ex. I a, 2 a, and 3 a), 
 it more naturally takes the form of a dependent 
 clause denoting time or cause. 
 
 3. The tense of the participle is relative to 
 the tense of the principal verb. 
 
 192. Examine the following: 
 
 I. Tots axovovat, to those who hear. 
 
 2. Tepl TOU y.wwoKovTos, concerning him who knows. 
 3. Tov yevvnoavta, him who has begotten. 
 
 4. 6 yeyevvnuevos, he who ts begotten. 
 
 193. Observe that the article with the partict- 
 ple may occur in any case, and is equivalent to 
 a relative clause in English. 
 
 The participle is a most common form of verbal expres- 
 sion in Greek, and to understand a few of its many uses - 
 is an essential to even a meagre knowledge of the language. 
 Some of the most ordinary uses have been here explained ; 
 and if these models are thoroughly mastered, little diffi- 
 culty need confront the learner in the narrative passages 
 of the New Testament. 
 
 194. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. 06 plicav Tov adeAXdoy avTtod ovK eye THD 
 adynOevav. 2. Tropevopevor SE KnpvoceTE éyovTES 
 6Te Hyytxev! 7 Bacirela ToV ovipavav. 3. Kal 
 b] / by we 5 ’ 7 an 
 atroxplOévtes avT@ eimov Ouvx oidamev. 4. Trolw 
 TO OéXnwa Tod TéurpavTos pe. 5. Kal éXOovTes 
 
 1 éyyltw, near. 
 
74 ESSENTIALS OF NEW ‘TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 , \ 3 / 5S \ / \ 4 n 
 els THY olKlav Eloov TO Tratdiov peta Mapias Tis 
 lal x 
 untpos avtod. 6. 0 mévav ev euol Kal éyw év 
 , nm ia ” \ i e / 
 
 AUT@ OUTOS EXEL KAPaY TOAANHV. 7. O Tepras [Le 
 t e a 
 
 Sikatos eat. 8. axovoas b€ 0 “Incods ePavpa- 
 
 an a \ 
 
 oev Kal eimev Tois aKoAovOovdcw,! aunv eyo 
 
 ipiv. Q. Tadta éypava tyiv wept TOV TAAVOD- 
 
 2, ig n an ,’ la) an 3 \ 
 
 TwV" Uuas. 10. TavTa avTOV NaNOUYTOS” TrOAAOL 
 
 a € ¢ la) 
 
 ériatevcav. I1. mwas 0 TloTev@v OTL “Inoods 
 
 id la) “A an 
 
 €otiv 0 Xpiatos €k TOU Yeovd yeyévvntal, Kai Tas 
 c > la) \ / > Ag \ 
 
 0 ayaT@v TOY yevyncavTa ayaTa* TOV yeyevyy- 
 
 / > > a 
 pévov €& avToU. 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 _ 195. VOCABULARY. 
 
 ayopa, 4, warket-place. paptupla, 1, wzt7ess. 
 
 aypés, 0, eld. otvos, 0, we. 
 
 StaKovéw, 77277ster. ovKért, adv., ot yet, no longer. 
 
 SudKovos, 6, inister, DEA- oTav, conj. W. subj., when. 
 CON. aroTé, AdV., ONCE, EVEr. 
 
 Bepatredw, Heal. apoBatov, 6, sheep. 
 
 Onplov, td, weld beast. rote, adv., then. 
 
 paddov, adv., more, rather. rtayéws, adv., guickly. 
 dhevyo, flee, escape. 
 
 1 For the contraction eov, see § 8. 
 
 2 For w instead of ao, see § 5, I. 
 
 8 A participle may be used in the genitive to agree with a 
 noun, pronoun, or adjective. This construction has zo gram- 
 matical connection with the rest of the sentence, and is called 
 genitive absolute. A conjunction, as while, when, because, must 
 be used in translating such phrases into English. 
 
 * See § § 1; 
 
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 75 
 
 196. Learn the declension of the interroga- 
 tive pronoun tis, who? and ri, what? and the 
 
 indefinite pronoun tls, some one, and Ti, some- 
 thing, § 41. 
 
 Observe the following: 
 
 1. Both the interrogative and indefinite pro- 
 nouns are declined alike. 
 
 2. The interrogative pronoun has the acute 
 on the frst syllable, while the indefinite has the 
 grave on the last syllable, or, in other words, 
 has no accent of its own, and is therefore an 
 enclitic. 
 
 197. Examine the following: 
 
 av tis «3 who art thou ? 
 
 Tis €otw 6 aVOpwros ; who zs the man ? 
 
 tiva Cntetre ; whone do you seek ? 
 
 ywookere Ti Teroinka, ye know what [ have done. 
 
 BwWN & 
 
 Note that the interrogative tis is used in both 
 direct (1, 2, 3) and indirect (4) questions. 
 
 198. Examine the following: 
 
 1. eav py Tis yevvnOy avobev, unless one shall be born from 
 above. 
 
 2. twes d€ &€ atv etzov, certain ones of them said. 
 
 Kai Tis avnp XwWAOs, and a certain lame man. 
 
 4. €dy TL aitnonre pe €v THO GvOMaTi pov TOUTO ToLHTw, Lf 
 you shall ask anything of me in my name, I shall 
 do tt. 
 
 Oo 
 
76 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Observe that the indefinite tls is enclitic! 
 when it is possible. 
 These pronouns are of the most frequent occurrence in 
 
 the New Testament, each being found several hundred 
 times. 
 
 199. The following are the infinitives of Xo: 
 
 Eves, Fut. Aor. Perf. 
 ACTIVE. Adv-euv Av-o-ev Ad-car Ae-Av-K-€-var 
 MIDDLE. Av-e-c8ar Adv-ce-cbar Av-oa-cbar Ace-Av-c Bar 
 PASSIVE. Av-e-cBar dAv-Oq-ce-cbar Av-Of-var Ae-Ad-c Bar 
 
 It is to be observed that the ending ae is 
 everywhere sort in the infinitive, and that the 
 infinitive in -vac has irregular accent, as well as 
 the perf. pass. in -c@au. 
 
 200. The infinitives of ecui, am, are etvat, pres., 
 and é€cecOa, fut. Of oida, J know, the infinitive 
 is evdévar, to know. 
 
 201. EXERCISES. 
 
 / \ Cilia lal Us b A \ 
 
 I. Te d€ tiv Soxet; 2. éav tis ayaTa Tov 
 
 / lal \ n 
 
 KOTMOV, OVK EaTLY 1) aydTN TOU TraTpos eV AUTO. 
 
 = \ 
 
 3. €av Tt aitopcOa Kata (according to) rb béXnua 
 
 lal lal an ‘ 
 
 aUTOU akovel IuaV. 4. elSomév TiVa év TO dvdmaTl 
 
 gov €xBadXovta daimovia. 5. Ti OérXeTE Troijow 
 [s an > \ be Se na 5 ’ yy 
 
 upiv ; 6. atroxpiOels dé 0 Incods eizrev ovK oldate 
 ¥: ’ ra rd an \ , / > 
 
 TL aitetaOe. 7. vets S€ Tiva pe NéyeTE Elvar; 
 
 1 See page 29, note. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. is) 
 
 atroxpOeis 6 Llétpos Néyes avT@ XV ef 0 Xpioros. 
 8. ayarntol, viv téxva Oeod éoper, Kal ovo 
 , / f2°39 Ig oyA ee 94 nA 
 epavepwOn Ti ecopeOa. oidapev OTL Eav havepwO7 
 / ’ Ag? / wd > / kg ube’. 
 dmotot avT@ €aopueVa OTL oWopeba (shall see) avTov 
 Kalws é€oTiv. 9. Kal Tropevouévwy avtav! év TH 
 re a phates \ TEN ’ / 
 
 06@ elmév Tis mpos avtov ’AxorovOncw cot. 
 10. Otay yap acbeva Tore duvatos Eipe. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 FUTURE AND AorRIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 
 
 202. VOCABULARY. 
 
 atroxtelve, £271. ofelho, ought. 
 Sikrvov, Td, 72e7. TATKXW, SUEr. 
 éxtelva, stretch out. meipatw, cept. 
 érralpw, raise up. twrovcvos, *7ch. 
 émitipaw, rebuke. TOTHpLov, 76, CUP. 
 Kabifw, szt. oTpatTiorys, 0, soldier. 
 pakpd0ev, adv., from afar. catnypla, yn, salvation. 
 vupdlos, 0, brzdegroom. Ppdvipos, wzse. 
 
 203. The future of péva, remain, is: 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 
 Sing. 1. pevo (pev-é-w) pevodpar (ev-é-o-pa ) 
 2. peveis  (pev-€-ets) peval (pev-é-n)), § 6, 5 
 3. pevet (pev-€-er) pevetrar (pev-é-e-TaL) 
 Plur. 1. pevotpev (pev-é-o-pev)  prevovpeba (pev-e-6-pe00) 
 2. pevetre  pev-€-e-Te) pevetoOe  (pev-é-e-oe) 
 3. pevotor (pev-é-ov-ct) pevotvrar (pev-é-o-vrar) 
 
 1 See footnote 3, page 74. 
 
78 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Observe: 1. That pévq is a liquid verb (theme 
 ending in A, w, v, or p). 2. The suffix for the 
 future is not o%, but «%. 3. This short vowel 
 contracts with the variable vowel. See § 5, 7 
 and: 8o"976)) 74S. 7552) ° 4 = Wien ones omen. 
 uncontracted syllables has an accent, the con- 
 tracted form must have an accent — the circum- 
 flex when possible. 
 
 204. This contraction may be seen more 
 sumply if represented thus<—-e% = "Yi st7.2.0u 
 occurs before mw and v, and e in all other 
 forms. 
 
 The present and imperfect indicative of themes 
 ending in e have the same contraction as the 
 future of liquid verbs. Learn duréo, § 59. 
 
 205. The fut. ind. of aipw (ap-1), take away, 
 is ap@; Of atoctéXX@ (atroated-1), send, is atro- 
 aTEN@ ; Of eyelpw (evep-), raise up, iS éeyepa@; of 
 emrayyéedro (eTTayyer-), promise, is érayyer@; of 
 aToxTelvw (atroxtev-), Rill, is atroxtevo. 
 
 206. Rule: The future of all liquid verbs ts 
 formed by the suffix e%. 
 
 207. The aor. ind. of pwévm is epevv-a, subjv. 
 Melv-@, part. pwelv-as, inf. petv-ar. 
 
 1 See § 82, 3 and 4. 
 
FUTURE AND AORIST OF LIQUID VERBS. 79 
 
 The aor. ind. of érayyéAXo Is Ernyyetd-a, Subjv. 
 €mayyeiA-w, part. éayyeid-as, inf. érayyetA-ac; 
 Kplv@, ind. éxpiv-a, subjv. xptv-w, part. xptv-as, 
 inf. xpiv-ac. 
 
 208. Rule: Zhe aorist active and middle of 
 liquid verbs have no o, but form the aorist by 
 lengthening the last vowel in the theme to the 
 corresponding long vowel. e, however, changes to 
 el, and a to n (except before «, t, or p). Cf. 53, 1. 
 
 209. EXERCISES. 
 
 > rn id e\ a ) , \ > / 
 I. aTogTEAEl 0 vios TOU avOpwrou Tos ayyé- 
 Nous avTov. 2. Kal avtTn éotlv 4 érrayyeria 
 * A \ la) \ \ 
 (promise) iv avTos éernyyetNato auty thy Son 
 yf c \ lal n 
 ai@vioy. 3. 0 éyelpas Tov “Incoby Kal amas ovv 
 an Ta 9S \ / la) 
 "Inoov! éyepet. 4. Hpav Tov Kvpiov éx Tod mVN- 
 / 2 \ ’ » lal by4 : ,’ if 
 wclov? Kal ovK oldamev Tov EOnKav (laid) avrov. 
 e n € , 
 5. 0 deyomevos Upds ewe SéyeTal, Kal 0 Eme Sexo- 
 X 
 pevos SéyeTat TOV amooTeiAavTa pe. 6. Kalas 
 ’ \ > / ’ N / ES \ 8 > , 
 Ese ATETTELNAS ELS TOV KOTMOV KaYwW” aTETTELNA 
 la / ¢ 
 avTovs eis TOV KOopoV. 7. €av ev vmiv peivyn O 
 an J, an an nm 
 aT apxYns nKovaaTe, Kal Upmels Ev TW Vi Kal (also) 
 an A \ a , 
 éy Tw TaTpl mevette. 8. Ota TovTO Kal 1 codia 
 nan n 5S ’ lal 5 ’ \ Pl 
 Tov Geov eitrev “AmrooTEA® els avTovs mpodytas 
 , 9S » 
 Kal amrooToXous. 9. HV O€ eyyvs TO Taaxa, 1 
 
 1 See § 28, a. 2 tomb. 3 See § 13. 
 
80 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 éopty Tv “lovdaiwv. érdpas ovv Tods dpOarpovs 
 6’Inoods kal Oeacdmevos OTL TOAUS ByNoS EpxXETat 
 
 \ > \ 4 \ / / > ld 
 mpos ayTov Neyer mpos Pidturrov IloGev ayopa- 
 cwpev aptous iva paywat (cat) ovTot ; 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 PRONOUNS: REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL. 
 
 210. VOCABULARY. 
 
 dvarimre, recline, fall down. kabapos, purified. 
 
 yépo, 2/1. Kpatéw, ov asp. 
 
 SévSpov, Td, tree. paKkaptos, Llessed. 
 
 Sadpov, 76, g2ft. proQds, 6, Azve, pay. 
 Amite, hope. puothptov, 76, MYSTERY 
 eteoti, 2 2s lawful. ods, Zhy. 
 
 Ouvola, n, Sacrifice. dpovéw, think. 
 
 ixaves, szfficzent, able. wore, CONj., So that, and soo 
 
 211. Learn the declension of the reflexive 
 pronouns €uautod, myself, ceavtod, thyself, éav- 
 tov, himself, § 40. 
 
 Observe: 1. These pronouns occur in the 
 oblique cases only. 2. They are formed from 
 the personal pronoun and the intensive avzos, 
 éuavtrov=éu+avtod; ceavtov=ce+avTov; éav- 
 trov=é (pron. not found in N. T.) +avrod. 
 
 212. éavtrod is often written in a shorter form 
 avTOv, aUTa, etc. 
 
 This latter sense at the beginning of a sentence. 
 
PRONOUNS : REFLEXIVE, RECIPROCAL. 81 
 
 213. Examine the following : 
 
 . €yO papTvp® wept euavtov, J bear witness concerning 
 myself. 
 2. eyo dofalw euavrov, J glorify myself. 
 3. am euavtod ov AaAO, J speak not of myself. 
 4. Ti X€yers wept ceavTov, what sayest thou concerning 
 
 thyself. 
 3. doace atrov év éavta, he will glorify Him in himself. 
 6. avrol ev €avtots oTevacopev, we ourselves groan within 
 ourselves. 
 
 In all these examples the pronoun refers back 
 to the sudject of the sentence, hence the term 
 reflexive. 
 
 Note that the 3 per. pron. éavtots may refer 
 (as in Ex. 6) to other than the 3 per. 
 
 214. The reciprocal pronoun addjror, of one 
 another, is found in dat. addr)Xo1s, and acc. aAAn- 
 Nous. ploovalw addAnXovs, they hare one another. 
 
 215. EXERCISES. 
 
 / \ a ea, \ar3 a 
 
 I. Tiva ceavTov Troveis; 2. avTos dé ‘Inaods 
 
 / a / 
 
 OUK émiaTevoEev avTOV avTois. 3. of pabnral 
 gov Tolovar 0 ovK e€ect Trovety év caBBaTe. 
 4. WoTE jrapTupelte EavTois OTL viol éoTE THY 
 3 aA 
 
 ghovevadvtwv! tovs mpodytas. 5. am éuavtod 
 5) Suh € \ \ ” \ 5) 
 ovk é€dnd\vGa. 6. 0 yap Tatnp exer Swnv év 
 
 1 govedw, slay. 
 
82 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 éauTO. 7. €av elr@pev OTL dpwaptiay OUK EXOMED, 
 éavTous TAav@uev Kal 7 ad eva OUK €oTLV ev 
 yee 8. édrris 5 Breropévn ovK éoti EXTIs, 
 
 0 yap Prerev ris édaifer; 9. apy apnvy Neyo 
 Tol; €AV fy) TLS ryevun 7 dvabev, ov duvatat idety 
 TN Bacirelay TOU Oeov, TO ryeyevnLevov eK TH 
 TapKos caps coTLY, Kal TO yeyevynuévov EK TOU 
 TVEVMATOS TVEDLd ETL. 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 
 IMPERATIVE Moon. 
 
 216. VOCABULARY. 
 
 amokahimrw, reveal. Karas, adv., well. 
 
 Bacrate, Zouch, bear. krdalw, weep. 
 
 Yapew, 72a77Y). peravoew, repent. 
 
 yvaortds, known. mAHV, Conj., and as a prep. W. 
 Svo, wo. gen., except. 
 
 els, 0702. onpepov, adv., to-day. 
 éLaxioros, least. réroapes, SOUP. 
 
 Kabdtep, even as. tpets, Ziree. 
 
 kakds, adv., 2/, badly.  sorepov, adv., afterward. 
 
 217. The pres. imp. of vq is: 
 
 ACTIVE. MIDDLE and PASSIVE. 
 Sing. 2. dA0-€ dv-ov 
 3. Av-é-Tw Av-€-0 Bw 
 Plur. 2. d0-e-re dv-e-0 be 
 3. Av-6-vrev or Av-€-c Boy or 
 
 Av-€-TaCTAaVv Av-é-c bwrav 
 
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 83 
 
 218. The endings of the imp. are: 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 Sing. Plur. 
 2. O TE 
 3. Tw vT@v Or 
 TWO Ay 
 
 MIDDLE and PASSIVE. 
 
 SNL. 
 2. 00 
 
 3. c8w 
 
 Plur. 
 
 obe 
 o8wv or 
 clwcav 
 
 a. 6 of the act. is regularly dropped in verbs like Avw. 
 
 b. Xvov is for Av-e-co. 
 
 219. Examine the following : 
 
 akovetw, let him hear. 
 py Oavpalere, marvel not. 
 
 Rule: Zhe tmperative 1s used to express a 
 
 command. The negative ts 
 
 aie 
 
 220. Learn the aor. imp. act., mid., and pass. 
 of Avo, § 56, and the 2 aor. act. and mid. of 
 
 Nelo, § 57. 
 
 a. ov in the aor. act. is an irregular ending. 
 6. Gin aor. pass. becomes te to avoid a combination 
 
 of rough! mutes. 
 
 221. ovdels, no one (ovdé, nor + eis, one), is 
 
 declined as follows: 
 
 ovdels ovdepnla 
 ovdevds ovdeutas 
 ovdevi ovdenig 
 ovdéva ovdepiav 
 
 Cf. eis, § 39. 
 
 1 See § 2. 
 
 ovdév 
 ovdevds 
 ovdevi 
 ovdév 
 
84 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 222. EXERCISES. 
 
 sane an 
 I. ANéyee av’t@ Widimmos Epyov Kai ioe. 
 2. petavoeite Kal muoteveTe év TH evayyenio. 
 / \ \ / lal an 
 3. mopevOntt mpos TOV adv. 4. KANWS ToOLELTE 
 a a la) e > na i > an 
 trois picodaw buds. 5. 0 dé Incods eirev avr@ Tit 
 / > 4 10 \ ) G6 AD \ e € / 
 we Nevers ayabov; ovdels ayabos et” p2 Eis 0 Oeds. 
 s > 7 , 
 6. of 88 wdduw (again) éxpaEav Statvpwcov avtov. 
 7. 0 €yav wTa® axovew akoveTa. 8. 0 Geos Pas 
 a > / 
 éott Kal oKkoTla OvK EoTLV ev AUT@ OvdEMia.* Q. ETL 
 lal / > > / 
 TOANA exw Lpiv Aéyerv, ANN’ ov Suvacbe Bacracer. 
 lal > n 
 10. mavra & av’tov éyéveto, Kal ywpis avTov 
 > Ps Hah eg : / C/ \ a 
 éyévero ovdé &v. 11. pi) Kplvete va gy KpLOijre. 
 > t n / 
 12. 6 muaTos év éXayioT@ Kal Ev TOANM TLOTOS 
 > SEneuts ? / ” \7 >> Ba 
 éoTiv, Kal 0 év éXayloT@ AdLKOS Kal EY TOARD 
 > \ / / a 
 ddixds eoTuv. 13. pn Oavpatere, aderHol, Ei poet 
 n ¢ , 
 UMas O KCOMOS. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 ADJECTIVES IN -ov AND -eo.— COMPARISON. 
 
 223. VOCABULARY. 
 &AnOHs, “re. yapos, 0, vzarriage, PolyGAMY. 
 aobevis, weak, sick. . Seapds, 6, chain, bond. 
 adppwv, foolish. Simkw, persecute, pursue. 
 
 1 The neuter 7/ often has the sense of why. 
 bt jg 8 See irregular nouns, § 34. 
 
 # See § 142. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 85 
 
 povoyevns, only begotien. oKavdarile, cause to stum- 
 oAlyos, few, OLIGarchy. ble, SCANDALIZE. 
 meptoods, abundani. TREX, 12/72. 
 
 wANpys, fll. vyins, whole, healthy, Hy- 
 MPOTEVXH, H, Prayer. GIENE. 
 
 bYpirros, Azghest. 
 
 224. Learn the declension of daddys, true 
 (§ 35), with which compare yévos (§ 30). Ob- 
 serve that there are but two endings—the 
 masc. and fem. being alike. 
 
 a. -eis of the acc. plur. is irregular. 
 
 See § 35 for the declension of ddpav. 
 
 225. Examine the following adjectives : 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 I. toxupds, tox vpd-Tepos, (to xvp6-taros), 
 StY Ong. strong-er. strong-est. 
 2. acbevas, ao Qevéo-repos, (axr0evéo-tartos), 
 weak. qweak-er. weak-est. 
 3. codds, TOdO-TELOS, (cope-taros), 
 wise. WISse-1. Wwise-St. 
 _ 4. véos, VE®-TEPOS, (ved-TaTos), 
 young. young-er. young est. 
 
 Observe: 1. That in all these examples some- 
 thing is added to make the degrees. -repos = 7 
 or ey and -tatos = st or est. 2. These are added 
 directly to the stem. 3. When the penultimate 
 vowel is short, as in 3 and 4, the o of the stem 
 becomes @ before -repos and -tatos. 
 
86 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 226. The suffixes may be -twy (declined like 
 appwv) and -tctos, but mostly in the irregular 
 adjectives. See § 37, 2, and learn the adjectives 
 in § 38. 
 
 227. Examine the following adverbs: 
 
 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 kakas, badly. XEtpov ( ) 
 Kkaddas, well. KaAALOv (kdd\Atorra) 
 TaXéws, guickly. TAX LOV (TaXLrTa.) 
 
 It is to be observed: 1. The positive of the 
 adverb ends ins. How different from the gen. 
 plur. of the adj.? 2. The comparative of the 
 adverb is the neut. sing. acc. of the adjective. 
 3. The superlative of the adverb is the neut. 
 plur. acc. of the superlative of the adjective. 
 
 228. Examine the following: 
 
 peilova ayarny Tavrns ovK oldapev, greater love than this 
 we know not. 
 
 Rule: Lhe comparative degree ts followed by 
 
 the genitive case. 
 
 229. EXERCISES. 
 
 I. ovTos O€ éotiv TARpHS yYdpiTos Kal adnOelas. 
 2. oldapmev OTe adnNONS ci. 3. 6 SE drlcw! pov 
 
 1 After, Adverbs of position are followed by the genitive. 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN pt. 87 
 
 epyomevos iayupdtepds frou éotiv. 4. adpor, 
 TAUTN TH VUKTL THY WuYXNY GOV aiToOvaL aT Gov. 
 5. 0K é€ativ Oodros pelSov Tod KUplov avTOU ovbE 
 aToaToNos pelfov Tod TéurpavTos avTov. 6. Kal 
 dofa év wwWiotos. 7. ef ewe ediwEav, Kal tpas 
 dumEovolv* ef TOV AOYOY Lov ETHPHAAV, Kal TOV 
 UMETEPOV THPHTOVELY, adAAA TAVTA TaVTA ToLN- 
 GOvaty Els UMAS OLA TO OVOMEA [LOv, OTL OVK OldacLY 
 Tov Téuavta pe. 8. LaBBatov ear, cai ovK 
 éfeoTiv cot adpar Tov KpaBattov (bed). ds 6é 
 atexplOn avtolts 0 Tolncas me UYyLh exElvos Mot 
 eirrev “Apov Tov kpaBatrov cov Kal TepiTarel. 
 
 BESSON XXX 
 REGULAR VERBS IN pu: didwpt, g7ve. 
 
 230. Of the two conjugations in Greek (see 
 73) the verbs in -w are by far the more common. 
 Still, those that have the older endings -wzs, -s, 
 etc., form a very substantial part of the ordinary 
 verbal forms; 2g. adinw, forgive; Setxvupt, 
 show, Sidmpmt, give; eipi, am; torn, set; 
 duvumt, swear; TiOnu, put, place; dnt, Say. 
 These words, it is easily seen, are naturally of 
 very common use. Hence they are among the 
 old verbs of the language, and may be called 
 strong verbs, having, as they do, the strong 
 endings. 
 
 
 
88 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 231. The conjugation of these verbs differs 
 from the conjugation of the verbs in -o, in two 
 systems only—the pres. and 2 aor. systems. 
 In these two systems the verbs in ps have no 
 variable vowel %, but the endings are added 
 directly to the theme, § 85. 
 
 232. Learn the principal parts of ddepe 
 (§ 88) and the pres. and 2 aor. systems, act., 
 §§ 62 and 63. (The mid. and pass. of these 
 systems are very rare.) 
 
 233. The most important compounds of didapu 
 are with the following prepositions, vrapa, a7, 
 eri. 
 
 234. Observe the following on the forms of 
 the verbs in pe: 
 
 I. The old endings pu, etc., occur. 
 
 2. -aov ends the 3 per. plur. primary. 
 
 3. -cav, and not »v, is found in the secondary 
 tenses 3 per. plur. 
 
 235. Note the following in d/dapu: 
 
 1. The present system has a reduplication, 6:-. 
 2. édidoupv like édirour, § 59. 
 
 3. «a! occurs for ca in the aor. ind. act. 
 
 1 Three verbs in Greek have this peculiarity in the aor. act. 
 
 ind., dplnu, aor. dpjxa; didwm, acr. Edwka; ThOnm, aor. 
 EOnka. 
 
REGULAR VERBS IN pe. 89 
 
 4. For the contraction in the 2 aor. subjv., 
 dd@, dons, etc., see S$ 5, 12, and 8, 5. 
 5. Ocvvat, 2 aor. act. inf., is for do-evas. 
 
 236. Learn the principal parts of adimm 
 (a7ro + int, stem €), forgive, § 88, and the con- 
 _jugation, § 66. 
 
 237. The pluperf. act., which is a rare tense, 
 has the suffix «ec; and being a secondary tense, 
 secondary endings occur. See § 77, latter part. 
 
 238. Translate the forms of ainwe and didapu 
 in §§ 96 and 101. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 REGULAR VERBS IN pu: orn, TiOnpe. 
 
 239. Examine the following: 
 
 adinus (stem €), ad-i-y-pme didwpt (stem 60), d/-dw-t 
 torn (stem ora), t-oTn-pL TiOnus (stem Oe), Ti-On-pt 
 
 Observe that in all these verbs there is a 
 reduplication, in which the vowel is 4 fatnt 
 is for ol-oTnpe. 
 
 240. So likewise in some verbs in o — 
 
 yi-(y)v0-oKw yi(y)vo-pat 
 (yv9) (yev) 
 
go ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 This form of reduplication has to do with the 
 present system only. 
 
 241. Learn the principal parts and pres. and 
 2 aor. systems of fornus and TiOnpu, §§ 62 and 63. 
 
 242. The most common compounds of teTnps 
 are with ava, cata, éri, é&, cvv, amo, avTi. 
 
 T/Onus is most common with él, mapa, and 
 T pos. 
 
 243. Translate the forms in §§ 105 and 108. 
 
 244. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 det, zt 2s necessary éfeott, it ts lawful. 
 Soxel, zt seems (best). perel, 2¢ concerns. 
 
 perapere, tt repents one. 
 
 vt pe bet rovety ; what must I do? 
 det buds yervnInvar avobev, ye must be born from above. 
 
 Observe that de? takes the accusative and the 
 infinitive. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 eee 
 
 FIRST EPISTLE OF JOHN. 
 
 5 co, 
 O HN AII APXH®, 6 AKNKOGA[LED, O 
 e , “Aw 3 ~ e “a aA 5 4 
 
 EwpaKkapev Tots ObOahpots Nuov, 0 eOeacd- 
 
 \ e ~ e “a 5 4 QA 
 
 peda Kat at KElpes NuUaV ebnradyoapr rept 
 
 Tov hoyov THs CwHs,—Kat n Carn épave- 
 
 » ye \ ant 
 
 pabn, Kal EWPAKAfLEV KL LAPTUPODLEV KL 
 
 amTayyeANopev vw THY Conv THY aiwvioy 
 
 NTLS nV pos TOV TAT Epa Kat epavepoby 
 
 A a \ 
 npiv,— O EW PAKA[LEV Kal akKnKOaLEV amrary- 
 aA ty) E A 
 vehAopev Kal UW, Wa Kal VUELS KOWwViaV 
 ¥y +e 7d la \ e , See e 
 
 eynte pe? nuav: Kat 7 Kowwria dé 7 NLE- 
 
 lal x x lant A 
 
 TEpa [ETA TOV TATPOS KAL ETA TOV VOU 
 
 lal A aA \ A 
 
 AUTOU “Inoov XpioTov" Kat TAVTA ypadopev 
 
 nels Wan Yapa Huav’ W TETANPOLEVn. 
 \ y¥y Y e > J - A > 4 
 
 Kat €oTw avrn 7 ayyedia Hv axnKoaperv 
 
 aT avuTov Kal avayyé\Nopev vty, OTL O 
 
 Beds pos €OTW KAL OKOTLA OUVK e€oTLW eV 
 
 > “ > ? 3 XN ¥ y 
 QUT OD ovoEia. Eav et@pev ore Kol- 
 1 Suav. 
 
 gI 
 
g2 
 
 IO 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. Loe) me 
 
 > wn \ > “ 
 VOVLAY EXOMEV [LET QUTOU Kal €v TO TKOTEL 
 “ QA al 
 TepiTatapne, wevddueOa Kat ov Trocodpev 
 \ > 4 AN \ > ~ \ 
 Tv adjfevay’ edv d€ ev TO hott TepiTa- 
 la ¥ > la) , 
 
 TOMEV WS AUTOS EGTLW EV TO aT, KOLWO- 
 , » > > , \ \ ‘2 
 viav eyouev pet adANA@Y Kal TO aipa 
 
 > al la lat A / e “A > 
 Inoov Tov viod avrod Kabapiler nuas azo 
 5-= ¥ Y 
 Tans apaptias. “Kay eiropev ore apap- 
 5) \ A \ 
 Tiav OVK EYomEV, EavTOVS TAaVOpE Kai 7 
 > ‘4 > + > e “~ aes £ la 
 ahyfeva ovk eat ev nuty. €av Gpooya- 
 la > \ 
 fev TAS apapTias Nu@Y, TLaTOS EoTW Kal 
 , g A A \ ¢ , \ 
 dikavos Wa adn yutv Tas apaptias Kal 
 kabapion jas and maons adicias. *Kav 
 pion pas 7” (as. 
 
 » y > ¢€ is , 
 ELTMMEV OTL OVX YuapTHKaper, Wevornv 
 al » aw 
 TOLOvLEV AUTOV Kat O AOyos avToV OvK 
 » > a “4 “A 
 EOTW EV YELL. Texvia pov, TavTa 
 
 Vd e “A Y \ ¢ , ‘\ be i 
 ypapw vuw wa pr apapryte. Kal éav 
 ¢ , e B) 
 
 Tis GpapTn, TapaKdyTov Exouev pos TOP 
 A lal \ 
 Tatépa Inoovv Xpiorov dikasoy, Kat. avToOs 
 
 \ A lal an 
 Nag L0s COTW TEPL TOV ALapTLOV HUY, Ov 
 ee ear , a , ries. \ \ \ 
 TEPL TOV NLETEPMV O€ ovovy” aha Kal EPL 
 Y nn r Me 
 odov Tov Koopov. Kat €v trovTw ywooko- 
 Y > ; 
 fev OTL €yveKapev avTor, Edy Tas evTOAAs 
 ~ lan Ly, ¥ 
 avTov Tnpapev. O hé€ywy OTe “EyvoKa av- 
 \ \ \ \ A \ A 
 Tov Kal Tas EvTOhas avTOU fy THPaV er 
 
 ‘ 1 udvev. 
 
II. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 > , ‘A > Ms e = / b) 
 aoTns €oTW, Kal €v TovT@ 7» adnOera ovK 
 E - Os 0 apy ) aUvTOV TOV AO i\n- 
 EOTLW* OS TNpYH avTov Tov oyov, ary 
 
 ~ > , € > / lal lal , 
 Bas €v TOUTW y Aydt TOD Deod TETENELwTaL. 
 "Ev TOUT@ YLVOOKOLEY OTL EV AUT@ ETLEV* 
 ¢ , > OY -~ Z > - \ 3 ”~ 
 0 héywy ev avT@ peve deter Kabws Exet- 
 , \ la) 
 VOS TEPLETATNOEV KAL AUTOS TEpLTATEL. 
 a / b) > Ny a , 
 yarnror, ovk evTohny Kawny ypadw 
 e La 2 3 > Ss bas a ¥ > > 
 up, ALN evToAnv Tahavav Hv ELYETE ATT 
 2 A ¢e 3 \ e /, b] ¢ , 
 apyns: y evtolyn n Tadara E€oTL O Oyos 
 aA > , i > \ \ / 
 ov nKovaaTe. Tahu EevTO\nY KawyY ypadw 
 A 7 A \ A 
 bw, 0 eat adyfes Ev avT@ kal ev vp, 
 gy ff X las 
 OTL 1) OKOTiA Tapayerat KaL TO Pas TO 
 e lA “~ 
 adynOuwov 7dn haiver. O Neyav ev TH 
 \ Ss \ N 5) N 3 an an > 
 putt evar Kal TOV adEAPoY avTOV pLTaV ev 
 a g + a“ 
 _T) OKoTia EOTW EWS apTL. O ayaTaV TOV 
 cia t c 
 > Ne o) abe: A x Ud »,! , 
 adehhov avTov ev TO PwTi mEeveL, Kal OKAY- 
 dahov €v avT@ ovK eoTw:! 6 O€ pLo@Y 
 \ > \ > ‘a! > ~ , 3 \ \ 
 TOV adEAhOV abTOV Ev TH TKOTiA EoTW Kal 
 a \ i A 
 €v TH OKOTLIA TEPLTTATEL, KAaL OVK OldEV TOU 
 ¢e / yY ec , 3 / Ny > 
 UTayeL, OTL) TKOTLa ETUpPAWOEV TOUS OPOah- 
 fLovs avTov. Tpadw vty, TeKvia, OT 
 5 , e “a e ¢ , \ \ »” 
 adéwvra, vw at duaptias dua TO ovopa 
 nA 4 
 avToU: ypadw vty, TATEpEs, OTL EyvaKaTeE 
 
 5 lal lanl o 
 
 TOV aT apyys’ ypadhw vw, veaviokot, OTL 
 
 zt > yy > > cal 
 OUK E€OTLY EV QUT. 
 
 o3 
 
 5 
 
 'fe) 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
94 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ 1. 
 
 14 VELKYKATE TOV Tovypov. eypaia vty, 
 TaLoia, OTL eyvaKaTE TOY TaTépa: eypaa 
 lal ¢ > lal 
 DALY, WATEPES, OTL EYVMKATE TOV aT APY7S* 
 eypaa vw, veaviokot, oTt loyupot eae 
 \ ¢ / “~ lal 5 e “A - \ 
 Kal 6 Noyos [Tov Oeod] ev vuty pever Kal 
 \ nA 
 Is VEVLKHKATE TOV TOoVypoOV. M7 ayamate TOV 
 Lal 
 KOOMOV pNnde TA Ev TH KOT MH. dy TIS 
 AYATA TOV KOT }LOV, OVK EOTW 1) AyaTN TOD 
 ~ g an ~ 
 16 TATPOS EV AUTM* OTL TAY TO EV TO KOT HO, 
 lat A ~ 
 n emifuuta THS TapKos Kal 7H emiBupia TOV 
 las \ la 
 of0arpav kat 7 adalovia tov Biov, ovK 
 EOTWW EK TOU TAaTpds, AAAa EK TOU KdOT[LOU 
 17 €OTLV* KOLO KOT[LOS TapayeTaL Kal H ETl- 
 / > A e \ ~ \ , nw 
 Pupia | avtod]|, 6 d€ rowdy To OéAnpa Tod 
 Jeod péver els TOV alova. 
 Ot 5 es Y 3 7 . \ 
 18 Ilauta, €xyaty wpa €oriv, kai Kalas 
 NKOVTATE OTL AVTLYPLOTOS EPXETAaL, KaL VOY 
 avTiyptatou TOANOL yeyovacw: bev ywo- 
 Y gy nw 
 19 OKOMEV OTL EXYATH wpa eoTiV. EE HuaV 
 eEnOav, add’ ovK Hoav €€ Hnuav: é€i yap 
 e€ npav Hoar, pewevyKeroav av pe? Huav: 
 > aay “A 7 5 5 \ , 
 ahd’ wa havepobdow ort ovK eloly mavtes 
 La 7 “~ an 
 20 €€ HUY. Kal YuEls Ypiopa eYETE ATO TOD 
 Y a 
 21 ayiov: oldaTte TavTes—' ovK eypaa buy 
 
 1 kal ol6are wavra. 
 
Ir. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 9 ¥ uA 
 OTL OVK OLOaTE THY ahyjOeLav, GAN OTL OLOaTE 
 > re \ ¢ ~ “~ b] “~ 2 oe 
 QUTHV, KaL OTL TAaV Wevdos ex THS adyOeElas 
 > ¥ , 93 ¢ , > \ 
 OUK EOTL. Tis €oru & WevaTns Eb 7) 
 4 > la y 
 0 apvovmevos oTt Inaovs ovK EoTW O xpr- 
 OTOS; OUTOS ETTW O aVTiypLOTOS, 6 apVvov- 
 fevos TOV TaTépa Kal TOV VOY. Tas O 
 > 4 \ en > \ \ a A 
 GpVvovjLevos TOV VLOV OVOE TOV TaTépa EyveEL’ 
 c c ~ \ en \ \ , ~ 
 paopokoy av TOV VLOUPKGL TOU STAT EAD EXEL. 
 ~ } > / b) > A > Cra 
 Tes 0 NKOVOAaTE aT apyNs, EV VULW [eE- 
 fil ¢ lal A 3 a) 
 VETW* EQV EV VILL LEN O aT apyYNs nKOU- 
 e A lal lal lal 
 CATE, Kal veils ev TO Via Kal [ev] TH 
 ~ Y \ 
 TATpl PEVELTE. KAL AVTN EOTLY Y ETTAyye 
 “A / it odes 
 hia HY avTos enyyelAaTo Hut, THY Conv 
 x SMe i A Cara \ 
 THV AL@VLOV. Tavra eypaiba vty tept 
 lal Ve ~ ee: to 
 TOV TAAVOVTMV VAS. KAL VLELS TO Yplopa 
 a > / > > > ae / > Lt a. | \ > 
 0 ehaBeTE aT aUTOU pEvEL EV VULLY, KAL OU 
 , » Y 5 , ¢ A > > 
 xpeiav eyere Wa Tis OiddoKN vas: GA 
 la , ¢ la 
 @S TO avTov xpiopa diddoKer vas Trepl 
 , x 
 TavTwv, Kal adyfés EoTtw Kal ovK EoTLY 
 la \ rd c la 
 Wevdos, Kat Kalas edidakey vpuas, pévere 
 an \ A an 
 év avT@. Kat vuv, TeKvia, MEVETE EV AUTO, 
 y XN a lal 
 wa eav pavepwOn cyome tappnoiav Kat 
 a as > la A 
 pn aloxyvvOapev amr avTov & TH Tapovota 
 la) \ ia) 4 id 
 avTov. €ay EldnTe OTL Oikaids eat, ywor 
 
 1 §uds, d\AG TO. . . Wetdos: 
 
 95 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
£ 
 
 99 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ 11. 
 
 74 1 A € A \ 5 , > 
 OKETE OTL TAS O TOLWYV TYV LKALOOUVYYV e€ 
 
 AUTOD yEeyeVnTat. 
 + “ \ 5 A vA e ~ ¢ 
 ldere soTamyny ayamyny dédaKxey Huw 6 
 9 la la , 
 maTnp wa Téexva Yeod khybaper, Kat eoper. 
 A A Y 
 Oud TOUTO O KOT MOS OV ywWaoKEL Nas OTL 
 > ~ ant 
 ovK €yvw avTov. “Ayamntot, vv Téxva Beov 
 > , x A > 1 la > , 
 éopev, Kal ovmw ehavepdlyn ti eoopeba. 
 Oloa 9 9X An y aap ad pp Sa 
 pev oTe €av havepaly oporor avT@ Exo 
 4 5 , > \ / > ‘\ 
 peOa, ore oboueBa adtov Kaos EoTw. Kal 
 la od \ / > ~~ 
 Tas 0 €xov Thy é\Tida TavTnY ET avT@ 
 \ > a , 
 ayviler €avTov Kalas Exetvos wyvos €oTW. 
 an la \ ¢ >. 
 Ids 6 mow THY apapTiay Kal THY avoplav 
 la \ 
 TOLEL, KAL 9) apapTia €oTW 7H avoyla. Kab 
 ya Y b] lat > / Y AX ce 
 oloare oe exetvos ehavepabn Wa Tas apap- 
 + \ “~ 
 Tias Opi Kat Gpaptia EV QUT@ OUK ECT. 
 TAS O EV AUTO pévov ovX apaprave TAS 
 O apapravov ovy EdpaKkeyv avTOV OVdE € eyvor 
 kev autov. Texvia, pydels TAavATH vas * 
 6 Tolwv THY SiKalocvyny Sikaids ETTU, 
 Kabws exewos dikaids €oTW* 6 TOL@Y THV 
 c , > la / > £ 4 b) > 
 duaptiav ex Tov dvaBodov EoTiv, oTL am 
 > “A ¢ , e , b) lal 
 apyns 6 diaBoos apapTaver. Els TOUTO 
 > i ¢ ex “A wn 4 , \ 
 ehavepoby 6 vidos Tov Geod wa ion Ta 
 ¥ ‘a , A ¢ 
 epya Tov dvaBoXov. Ilas o yeyevyy- 
 
 1 kal. 
 
ill eo SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION, 
 
 peévos €x TOV Yeov apaptiay ov Tovet, OTL 
 TTEPLA AVTOV Ev aAVT@ pévEr, KaL OV dvva- 
 TOL apapTavew, OTL Ex TOV Deovd yeyerynran. 
 ev TOUTM avepa Eat Ta TéKVA TOV HeEod 
 \ \ - a /, ~ ¢ \ 
 Kal Ta TéeKva Tov dtaBddov: mas oO py 
 TOLOV OLKALOTUYNY OvK EaTLW EK TOV HeEod, 
 \ ¢ \ EY “~ +. | 3 \ 5 nT Y 
 Kal 0 fy ayaTav TOV adeApov adToV. OTL 
 avTn €oTW 1 ayyedia HV NnKovoaTe am 
 > A Y > A“ 3 Vd > \ 
 apYys, Wa ayaTapnev addndovs: ov Kabas 
 Katy €x Tov Tovnpov nv Kat exhagkev Tov 
 s \ > la \ / , y 
 adehpov avTov: Kal yapw Tivos exha€ev 
 yg a iy) 
 QUTOV; OTL TA Epya AUTOV TOVNpPA Hv, TA 
 \ A 5 A > “~ - 
 d€ Tov adeddov avtov Sikaua. 
 \ , >) , > “~ ¢ “A ec 
 M7) Bavpalere, adedot, el prover vas Oo 
 / e la 4 Y 
 KOOPLOS. mets oldapey oTe petaBeBrKa- 
 pev ex TOV Yavarov ets THY Cayv, OTL aya- 
 “A XN 5 4 ¢ \ > “A / 
 TOPEV TOUS AEAHOUS* 6 pL) AyaTTOV pEveEL 
 > -~ , “~ ¢€ “ XN 5 XN 
 év T@ Oavatw. Tas 6 pic@y TOV adedpov 
 avrov avOpwroKtovos €oTiv, Kal oldaTeE OTL 
 mas av@pwroKktovos ovK exer Cany ata@viov 
 &V AUT@ Levoucay. “Ev TOUT@ eyvoKka- 
 [LEV THD ayaTyY, OTL EKELVOS UTEP NOV THV 
 X > pls \ e A > / 
 puxnv avrov eOnKkev: Kal ypets opethomev 
 ce \ “~ 5 ~ \ i] \ a aA 
 Urep Tav adekdav Tas Yuxyas Oetvar. ds 
 6 av eyn Tov Biov Tov Kdapov Kat Gewpn 
 H 
 
 SH 
 
 IO 
 
 LE 
 
 13 
 14 
 
 16 
 
 t7 
 
98 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 20 
 Zt 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [11., IV 
 
 TOV ddehpov avTOoU Xpetay eXovTa Kal 
 Keio TO. omhayxva avTOv at avTou, 
 TOS 1 ayaa tov Oeod peéever &V avo ; 
 Texvia, py dy ar pev hoyw poe TH 
 yoroy ahha eV py? kat adylea. 
 "Ev TovT@ yordpela 0 OTL €K THs adn Getas 
 eone, Kal ey poo Ve QUTOU meiropey 7™y 
 Kapoiay npov OTL €av Karaywaokp 7peev 
 n Kap0ta, OTL petlow €otiv 6 Oeds TIS 
 kapdias 7 nyeev Kal ywaokel mavta. Aya- 
 mnTo, eav Kapdia BY Karaywarky, Tap 
 pyotav exowev mpos Tov Oedr, Kat 0 ay 
 ALT [LEV hapBavower ar avTov, OTL TAS 
 EvTONAS aUTOV Tnpovper Kal TO dpeora 
 EVWTLOVY AVTOV TrOLOU LED. Kal avTn €oTLV 
 n evrohay avToU, va TuTTEDT OPEV TO OVO- 
 aa tov viod ad’rod "Inaod Xpiorod Kat 
 ary amr pey adAnhovs, Kabas eOwKEV eHTONNY 
 myer. Kal O Tpav TAS EVTOAAS AUTOD EV 
 avuT@ peéver Kal avTos €v avT@: Kal e&v 
 TOUT@ OO ey OTL LEVEL EV HLLY, EK TOU 
 TVEVP.ATOS ov new EOWKED. 
 
 "A-yamnrot, py TaveTt TVEY LATE TLOTEVETE, 
 GAG Soxdlere Ta TrevpaTa El EK TOU 
 
 1 Tig TEVWUEV. 
 
Iv. ] SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 
 
 lanl , Y \ aA 
 Beod éotiv, ort Todo Yevdorpodytar e&e- 
 > 3 
 An\vOacw Els TOV KOT POV. Ev rovr@ 
 yWOOKETE TO TVEVLA TOD Heod: TAY TYEDLA 
 ane ely >) ‘a X 3 Ages 
 0 omodoyer Inoovvy Xpiorov ev oapKt €dAy- 
 wn A \ “ la 
 \vOora' €x Tov Heod eoTiv, Kal TAY TVEDLAO 
 A ~) ec Ag XV >) la 5 wn A 
 O py Oporoyet” Tov “Inaovv ex Tov Oeov 
 ¥ N AlN? an 
 OUK E€OTLY' KQL TOUTO €OTW TO TOU aVTI- 
 A y ¥ \ “~ 
 XploTov, 0 AKNKOATE OTL EPYETAL, KAL VUV 
 > a) / > \ nO y “A b] 
 €y T® KOTOMM EOTW ON. [els EK 
 A la , \ , 
 tov Oeov éoté, TEKVia, Kal VEVLKHKATE at- 
 4 yY iC > \ 3 b) e A x ¢ >] “~ 
 Tovs, OTL pEellwy EoTW O Ev VW 7 O EV TO 
 / >" 3 ~ / 3 , \ 
 KOO P@! avToL eK TOU KOapOU Elo: dla 
 nw la) , nw Ay AS 
 TOUTO EK TOU KOT OV AahovoW Kal O KOT [LOS 
 aUT@V aKover. Nets EK TOU Heov éeopev: 
 e \ e lal \ 
 0 ywooKav Tov Oedy aKover NU@V, OS OUK 
 yy rn A A 
 eat é€k Tov Oeov ovK akover Nuav. €k 
 an A 3 
 TOUTOV ywooKoLEY TO TVEVLA THS aAN- 
 \ | ~ Be 
 Jeias Kat TO TvevpLa THS TAaVNS. 
 > - = “~ >] , yY e 
 Ayamytolt, ayatapev add\ydovs, oTt Y 
 b) / lal lal \ nw ¢e ) lal 
 ayatn ex Tov Geod €oTiv, Kal TAS 0 ayaTTaV 
 nA an \ \ 
 ex TOV Deov yeyevyntar Kal ywooKe TOV 
 ¢ \ lan ¥ \ 
 Jedv. 0 py ayarav ovK eyvw tov Oedr, 
 Y e€ \ >) / b] -, 3 , | 
 oTu 0 Deos ayarn éotiv. €v TovTw edave- 
 4 e 5 4 “~ “ > ] e “~ yY \ 
 paly  ayamn tov Geovd ev nuw, ore Tov 
 
 1 é\ndvdévar. 2 dvew, 
 
roo ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [Iv. 
 
 Io 
 
 II 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 a7 
 
 ~ “A c 
 vlovy avTOV TOV povoyevn améaTahKEev O 
 \ y > A 
 Beds_eis TOV Kocpov iva Chowper Ov avTod. 
 \ / 4 A 
 év TOUTW ETL 1 AYaTY, OVY OTL NMELS NYa- 
 - \ / > Fe 4 = \ > oe 
 myHKapev TOV Dedv, aN’ OTL adTOs HyaTNHTEV 
 ~ \ \ la \ 
 Nas Kal aTETTELAEV TOV VLOV AVTOV Lac MoV 
 \ lan) ant lal > 
 TEPL TOV ALAPTLOV NULOD. Ayamyrot, 
 > Ly, ae \ / e A \ e “a 
 el ovTws 0 feds nyatnoEey Nas, KAL TMLELS 
 dpeihopev dddydovs ayarav. Oedv ovdets 
 t 
 , Z 3N > “~ > - 
 moore TeMéatar: €av ayatanev addyXous, 
 ~ \ lanl 
 0 Geos ev Hpiv péver Kal 7 ayamrn avTov 
 TETENELWPLEVY) EV HILLY EGTLV. EV TOVT@ YWO- 
 yY “A \ 
 OKOLEV OTL EY AVT@ PEVOMLEY KAL AVTOS EV 
 A g A la 2 
 HLL, OTL EX TOU TVEVpaTOS avToU dédaKeEV 
 A \ A \ A 
 nw. Kat quets treOeanefa Kat paptupov- 
 4 \ > 
 fev OTL O TaTHp aTéoTahKEev TOV VLOV Ta- 
 Ta ‘a aN \ g 
 THPa TOV KOTpOV. Os e€av Oportoynay OTL 
 4 oe / > ¢ ex a a 
 Inoovs [Xpiords| éotw 6 vids Tov PGeor, 
 ec ‘\ > b} ~ , \ bY \ > wn Lal 
 0 eds Ev atT@ pever Kal adTos EV T@ Hew. 
 \ a > \ 
 
 Kat nets eyvdkapev Kal TETLOTEVKALEV 
 % > , aA ¥ e \ ] e A c 
 THY ayaTyy nv exer O Beds Ev Nutr. O 
 
 > , x , “~ > , 
 Jeds ayarn EoTLy, Kat O péevav Ev TH AyaTTY 
 ev TO Jew péver kai 6 Oeds ev adr@ | péver | 
 D Od I S D [péve]. 
 
 airy , r / e > / A? e a 
 vy TOUT® TETENELWTAL N ayaTn pe? Har, 
 Y , » > ‘ao ¢e , A 
 iva Tappnotay eywpev ev TH NEPA TIS 
 
 , yg A > Le 
 
 Kplioews, OTL KaBws EKElWos ETT Kal Els 
 
Vee SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. IOt 
 
 > \ > “A , , 53 5 
 Eopev EV TH KOTM@ TOVT@. doPos ovK 
 ¥  ] aA > ie be] > e or 3 , 
 eoTw €v TH ayamy, ald y TehELa ayaTy 
 e€w Badrer Tov hoBov, ore 0 PdBos Koda- 
 ¥ ¢€ \ / 5 , 
 ow exe, 0 O€ hoBovpevos ov TeTEheiwTaL 
 ’ ~ > , c. -~ > ~ Y 
 ev TH ayatyn. Hpets ayaraper, ore avros 
 lal , las 2S » Y 
 TPOTOS HYATNTEV NUAS. EaV TLS ELT OTL 
 5 lan \ , \ \ b] N > fn 
 Ayar@ tov Oedv, Kal Tov adedddyv avtov 
 pon, WevoTns E€oTiv: Oo yap pH ayamTov 
 \ b) \ > rN AX C7 x N a 
 TOV adeAPov aUTOV OV EdpaKev, TOV Hedv dv 
 b) A 
 ovY EWpakeV ov OVvaTaL ayaTay. Kal Tav- 
 2 \ ) b> a Ly, 
 THY THY EvTOAnY EXOMEV AT aVTOV, Wa O 
 b ] lal x \ > lay \ \ 5] \ 
 ayarav Tov Oeoy ayaa Kat Tov adehpov 
 aUTOU. 
 A ¢€ yY a “ 3 Q 
 Ilas 0 motevwv ott ‘Insovs €oTw o 
 \ 5 “ las A lal 
 Xpiotos €k Tov Oeov yeyevyyntat, Kat Tas 
 0 adyaT@y TOV yevrYyoavTa ayaa TOV 
 > an 
 yeyerynuevov €€ avTov. €v TOVTM ywo- 
 4 > A Aw a 
 CKOLE OTL ayaTamnev TA TEKVA TOU GeoD, 
 y A \ 
 orav Tov Oedv ayaTane Kat Tas EevTodas 
 A A g , “J > te 
 QUTOUV TOLOLEV’ AUTH yap EoTL H ayarryn 
 “a wn LY \ an wf 
 tov Geov va Tas evTohas avTov THPOpED, 
 ‘\ e 3 ‘ “9 a A CY > , 
 Kal at evTodat avTov Papetar ovK Elo, 
 yY A \ , =) lay A la 
 OTL Tay TO YyeyevvyLEvov EK TOU Jeov vuKa 
 \ , Y 3 e Z e 
 TOV KOGMOV. KaL avTN EoTLY Y ViKn 7 
 2, XN , he la 
 VUKYTATA TOV KOTLOV,  TiTTLS YU@Y* TIS 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 20 
 
 21 
 
102 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [v. 
 
 Io 
 
 II 
 
 I2 
 
 13 
 
 5 \ ¢€ aA \ , > \ ¢ 
 esti [d€] 0 viKay Tov Kdocpov el pH O 
 9 b A > \ ¢€ eX A 
 TisTevav OTL Incous éaTiv oO vLoS TOU 
 Png a + > ¢ > \ > Y 
 Jeov ? Otros éotw 6 e\Oav bv BdarTos 
 \ od > ~ Ld + > “~ 
 Kat aysatos, Inoous Xpiotos: ovK ev TH 
 56 / 1 3 > > “a 50 \ > ~ 
 voate “ovov’ ahdX Ev T@ VOATL Kal EY TO 
 AiYLATL’ KALTO TVEVULA EXTW TS LapTUpOvY 
 4 \ ~ f 3 > e 4 aA 
 OTL TO TVEUpLA EoTW 1 adnyOeLa. OTL TpEts 
 \ “A \ A \ N 
 Elolv Ol papTUpoUrTEs, TO TYEULA Kal TO 
 g \ \ ®e \ “ \ Y 
 vdwp Kal TO aipa, Kal ot TpEls Els TO EV 
 > > \ , lal 
 elow. €l THY papTupiay Tav avOpad rev 
 ff ¢ 4 “ A“ / 
 LapBavoper, 7 paptupia Tov Deov peilov 
 ? Y Y \ A“ a 
 ETL, OTL AUTN EOTW 7 fLapTUpla Tov Deov 
 Y Q Lal e lal Lal ¢ 
 OTL PELAPTUPNKEV TEDL TOV VLOU AUTO. O 
 > \ e lal “~ x 
 TLsTEVaV Els TOV vioV TOV Deov ever THY 
 , | e “~ 4 % ~ 
 papruplav €y avT@™: 0 py TicTEvwY TO 
 an , / 4 
 Jeg” Wevatnv Treroinkey avTov, OTL ov TETI- 
 > \ “4 aA 
 OTEUKEV Els THY fLapTUpPLay HY jwEe“LapTUpy- 
 ¢e S \ “ “ A \ 9 
 kev 0 eds rept Tov viod avbrov. Kal avTn 
 > \ ¢ , yY \ » Ds ¥ 
 cOTW Y mapTupLa, OTL CwHv aidvioy EdwKEV 
 0 Geds yyutv, Kal avtn n Car ev TO VIO 
 S New, Kat avTn 9 Con ev 7 vie 
 > ~ > , ¥ 2, en yy \ 
 avTov e€oTlV. O EXwWY TOV vVLOV EXEL THY 
 , ¢ \ Y \ en “A “A \ 
 Conv: 0 yn Exwv Tov vidv Tov Deod Thy 
 \ > ¥ aie + ¢ A 
 Cony ov« eye. Tavta eypawa vw 
 y Se y \ ¥ 39 A 
 wa e«lonTe oTt Cwny eyere al@rioy, Tots 
 
 1 udvy. 2ai7gG|t...t 
 
v. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 103 
 
 > XN + a (eto lal 
 TMLOTEVOUTL ELS TO OVOMLA TOV VLOV TOU 
 lal A Y ‘\ ¢ at ¥ 
 Jeov. Kat avTn €oTW 7» Tappyoia Hv EXo- 14 
 \ , 4 , > 
 HEV POS aVTOVY, OTL Edy TL alToucOa KaTa 
 » / > -~ > , ¢ “ \ aeN 
 TO Oéd\ynpa avrov akover Nnua@v. Kat eav 15 
 Y¥ Y 3 , 4 an aA aX > / 
 oloapey OTL aKOVEL YUoV O €ds altrapeba, 
 Yy Y » \ =) , aA b) 
 OlOapEV OTL EXOMEY TA AITHMATA A HTHKA- 
 > > “ ) , ¥ E) 
 pev ar avrov. “Kav tus ton Tov adehpov 16 
 A e , ¢ . \ 
 avTOU amapTavorTa apaptiay px mpos Oa- 
 \ , “A A 
 vatov, airnoe, Kal dOa@oer avT@ Cwnr, Tots 
 ¢ , \ \ , y 
 duaptavovaw py mpos Oavarov. €eoTw 
 ¢ , \ / ‘\ , 
 auaptia mpos OGavarov: ov meEpt exewns 
 4 Y =) / as 3 , ¢ 4 
 héyw va Epwtnon. Taca adikia apaptia 17 
 , \ » c , - \ , 
 éoTiv, Kal €oTW apaptia ov mpos Bavarovr. 
 ¥ y A e , 9 an 
 Oidapev OTL TAS O yeyevYNMEVOS EK TOU 18 
 al CY ¢ , b] b ) e \ 5] 
 Beod ovy apapraver, aN’ o yervybets ex 
 lal an a) Y \ ¢ XN 
 Tov Yeov Tynpet avTdov, Kal O TOVNpOS OvX 
 4 a ¥ 4 “A an 
 GQNTETAL AUTOV. oldapevy OTL EK TOU Heod 19 
 s c 4 y b) a A 
 Eopev, KaL O KOTpLOS OAOS EV TH TOVNPw 
 A ¥ A Y e ew la nw 
 KEtTaL. oloamevy O€ OTL 6 Vlos TOV OHeov 20 
 4 \ l4 en 4 4 V4 
 NKEL, Kal S€dwKEY Nuly Sidvovavy Wa ywWo- 
 \ / , 5) > la 
 okonev tov adyxPwov: Kal eopev Ev TO 
 > ve Tes en > lau) fa) A 
 anv, €v T® vi@ avTov Inaov Xprote. 
 t l t 6 
 Qf > e b) \ \ \ \ rd 
 obTos eat 6 alynOwos Feds Kat Con aid- 
 , , € ‘ b) \ la 
 vos.  Texvia, duragate é€avTa amd TOV 21 
 > , 
 ElO@AWD. 
 
104. ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 MAT. 5: 3-12. 
 e ‘ m , 4 la) 
 
 3 MAKAPIOI of rraXol T@ TVEvpaTL, OTL AVTMY 
 
 : e / an la 
 
 éotw 7 Bacieta TOV ovpavar. 
 
 rd e an y \ . 
 
 4 pakapvot ol TevOotvTEC, OTL GUTOL Tapakhy- 
 
 OnCovrat. 
 5 pakdprot ob paeiC, OTL AVTOL KANPOVOPHCOLCL 
 THY YTV. 
 
 , e la \ “A \ 
 6 pakdpior ol mewavTes Kal dubovtes THY 
 Sucavocwvyv, OTL avTol yopTaacbyaov- 
 TOL. 
 , ¢ 3 , 4 > 9 3 ? 
 7 pakdplor ot eenmoves, OTL avdror edenOy- 
 COVTAt. 
 , e A , 4 > \ 
 8 wakaptot ot KaBapol TH Kupdta, oT. avToL 
 tov O<dv ovsovTat. 
 / e > , > > x ea 
 9 aKapLor ol Eipyvotro.ot, OTL | avTot| viol 
 Jeovd Kd\ynOnoovrat. | 
 / ¢ - yY , 
 10 pakapior ot Sediwypevor evexey Sikavowv- 
 yys, oT. avTav eat 7» Bacrteia Tov 
 ovpavar. 
 , } > Y > I e ~ \ 
 11 Lakdplor €oTE OTaV GvELiTwoW Bas Kal 
 SuoEwow Kal elmwow Tay Tovnpov Kal 
 12 Uw? evdopevolr EveKEY Eo" YalpeETE 
 \ 5 A y c \ ¢ “~ 
 kal ayahhuarbe, OTe 0 pobds ver 
 ToNvs ev TOLS OVPAVots* OUTwS yap €dia- 
 ‘\ \ \ la 
 Eav Tovs TpopyTas ToOvs TPO VLaV. 
 
SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. TO5 
 
 MAT. 6:9-I5. 
 Y > A 
 Ovtws otv tpocevyer Oe vets 
 / ¢ A € b] A > ~ 
 Ilatep nuwy o ev ToLs OVvpavots* 
 e 4 \ »” , 
 AytacOyrw TO ovoud cov 
 ée\Gatra n Baoireia cov, 
 “e \ , G 
 yevnOytw 70 Oéd\ynpa cov, 
 e > b] A ib ge See A 
 @S €V OUPaVM Kal El yns° 
 % ~ ¢€ “ \ 
 Tov aprov nav Tov €mLovoLov 
 dds WKLY OHMEpoV * 
 +S ies fs Nee a € A 
 Kal apes nuty Ta. Operlnuata Nuar, 
 ¢ \ e€ “ 5 - ia) 3 V4 
 @S Kal NMELS adyKapey ToLs Oder€Tats 
 e la 
 av: 
 \ \ E 4 e la > / 
 KQL [LY ELTEVEYKNS NAS ELS TELPAT LOD, 
 ANAA pUTAL NAS ATO TOV TOVYPOD. 
 > \ \ 3 “a lal 3 / XN 
 Eav yap apyte tots avOperows Ta Tapa- 
 a N lan) 
 TTOLATA AUTOV, APHTEL KAL VW O TATHP 
 e “A c 5 a +N \ \ > A a 
 Dav 6 ovpavios: €ay O€ py ade Tots 
 > rd be! , > -~ b) \ 
 avOpero.s [Ta TapatTopata avtov |, ovde 
 \ A 
 0 TaTHpP Vuaov adjnoe Ta TAapaTToOMaTa 
 UPOV. 
 LUKE: CHAPTER I5. 
 > \ ates 5) / , e 
 Hoay d€ ait@ éyyilovres mavtes ot 
 nA Q A 
 TEM@VAL KAL OL apLapTwAroi aKoVvELY avTOD. 
 \ , ‘ yY ~ \ e 
 kat dveydyyvlov ot te Papirator Kat ot 
 
 tO 
 
 Il 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 aS 
 
106 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.  [XvV. 
 
 aN 
 
 io 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 ypamparets Néyovres OTL Otros apapTo- 
 hovs POT OEY ETAL Kat ouverOier avrots. 
 > mA, \ > \ \ \ , 
 elev O€ TpOs avTovs THY TtapaBohnv Tav- 
 Y 4 yy 5 € “~ YyY 
 tTyv héyav Tis avOpwiros €€ vpav eyov 
 € \ , Vee , > Se a 
 ExaTov TpoBaTa Kat amok€aas €€ avTav ev 
 ov KaTaheimer TA EveVHKOVTA evVea eV TH 
 5 , i a e. 5 \ oo > | \ Y 
 EPL KAL TOPEVETAL ETL TO ATOAWAODS EWS 
 evpn avTo; Kal evpav emitiOnow emt Tovs 
 @MOVS AVTOD yaipwy, Kal €ADav Eis TOV OlKOV 
 la \ / \ \ , 
 guvKahet Tous diAous Kal TOUS yeElToVas, 
 héyav avtots Yvwvyapnré prow OTe evpov Td 
 A / \ 5 /, , e nw 
 TpoBatov mov TO aTtohw ds. éeyw vu 
 So La ao ~ 
 OTL OUTWS xXapa Ev T@ OUPAV@® e€oTaL eT 
 EVL ALAPTWAM preTavoovTL emt €veEvy- 
 KOVTa €VVEA OLKALOLS OLTLVES Ov X petav 
 » , my , \ \ 
 Eyovow peTtavoias. ~“H tis yur dpaywas 
 Y» , 5% 5 4 A , 
 EXouTa déka, eav aToh\eon Spay pnp ptar, 
 \ Y 
 ovyl antes AVYVOV Kal wapot THY oiKlap 
 kat Cyrev emyseh@s €ws o8 Eevpn; Kal 
 evpovoa ouvKadet Tas ditas Kal yeltovas 
 héyovoa LuvydpyTé prow OTe ebpov Ti 
 Spaypyv nv amo\era. ovTws, Léyo vp, 
 yiveTat Yapa EVvOTLOV TOV ayyéhov Tov Feod 
 ETL EVL GPLAPTWA@ [LETAVOOVITL. Kizev 
 oe” A } > Ov e , \ 4 
 € Avlpwrros Ts ELYEV OVO VLOUS. KGL ELTTEV 
 
Xv. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 107 
 
 ¢ oe > “A A“ , , , 
 
 6 VEOTEPOS a’ToV TH TaTpi IIdreEp, dds pot 
 ‘\ > , td ~ > Lg e \ a“ 
 TO emiuBaddov pépos THS oVoias: 6 O€ SuEt- 
 ev avtots Tov Biov. Kat per ov Todas 
 nLepas Tuvayayov TAavTA’ O VEWTEPOS VLOS 
 aTEOnpNnoTEV Els YOpay prakpav, Kal €KEL 
 dueckopmicev THY ovolav avTov Cav ace- 
 Tws. OaTavnoavTos S€ avTov TavTa éye- 
 veTo AYLOS LaYUPA KATA THY Kapa exeivny, 
 
 + 5 A 
 Kal avTOs NpEaTo vaTEpero Oar. Kal Tropev- 
 \ > , con lal wn A , 
 Beis ExohAHOn Evi TOV TOohITaY THS Yopas 
 exelvns, Kal eTeppev avTov Eis TOUS aypovs 
 avtov BocKew xoipovs: Kat emreO¥per yop- 
 tacOnvar ék TOV KEpatiovy av noOLov ot 
 a x 5) \ 2510 > ~ > e x 
 
 Xotpou, Kal ovdels EdidoU adT@. Eis EavTOV 
 d€ EhOav ey dcou picbior Tod tatpds 
 [Lov TEpLaoevovTaL apTwr, eya Oe yng aE 
 amoh\upat* avactas Topevoouat Tpos TOV 
 TaTépa ov Kal ep@ avT@ _— Ilatep, nuap- 
 TOV ELS TOV OVPAVOY Kal EVMTLOV TOV, OVKETL 
 > A » ~ ene 4 , 
 
 Ett a€tos K\nOyvar vids Gov: ToinoTOV peE 
 < Y ~ , \ -) \ 
 OS €Va TWV po Oiov gov. Kat avaotas 
 nOev mpos Tov marépa éavTod. eT dé 
 avTOU pakpay améyovTos eldey avToVv 6 
 Tap avTov Kal €oTayyvicbn Kat dpa- 
 
 1 Gravta. 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 Ly 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 20 
 
108 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK.  [XV. 
 
 2I 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 \ > , ae Ye “4 > a) \ 
 Lov eTEeTETEV ETL TOV TPAYHAOY avTOD Kal 
 / > , 3 x ¢e en > ~ 
 karepidnoe avuroy. eimev O€ O vids avT@ 
 Marep, 9 mpaprov Els TOV OVpavoY Kal evo- 
 TOV Gov, OvKETL Ett Atos KyOHVAL vids 
 gov [+ mointov pe as eva Tov picbior 
 gov]. eizey dé 6 tatnp pds Tods Sov- 
 Movs avrod =Tayv éfevéyxate aorohyy tH 
 , N\' 8 4, > / \ , 4 
 TpPOTYV Kat EvVOVTATE aUTOV, Kal Sore Saktv- 
 Mov els THY XELpa adTOD Kal UTodypaTa. €is 
 Tous 7ddas, Kal dépere Tov [Loayxov Tov 
 / - \ , > mN 
 ourevrov, Gioate Kat hayovres evppavla- 
 [LEV, OTL OUTOS O Vids pov veKpds FV Kal 
 avelnoer, Hv aTo\wdas Kal evpéOy. ' Kat 
 ¥ > 4 > \ ¢ en 5 lal 
 npsavro evppaiver Oar, nv S€ 0 VLOs avToD 
 0 mpea Burepos € €v aypo: KaL WS €PXOpevos 
 nyyire ™ olkia, HKOVT EV Tuppavias Kal 
 XOPav, Kat TpocKaheoapevos eva TOV Tat 
 4 ~ > 
 dav éruvOdvero Ti dv ein TadTa: 6 dé elmev 
 avT@ OTL “O adedhds Gov HKEL, Kal COvcEV 
 c ty 
 0 TaTHP Tov TOV fLOTYXOV TOV CLTEUTOD, OTL 
 ¢ , 5 x > 4 > 4 \ 
 VYLALWOVTA GAUTOV amehaScv. apyialn dé 
 \ > as BS] A 
 Kal ouk 1Oedev eicehfetv. 6 Oe Tarn p av- 
 TOU ee Dav TmapeKan EL avTOV. 0 O€ aTOKpI- 
 eis civev TO TatTpt adrod “ISod tocasra 
 
 1 &tnoev. 
 
xv. | SELECTIONS FOR TRANSLATION. 10g 
 
 ȴ , \ > Vs 5 / 
 ern SovAEVW Got Kal OvdeTOTE EVvTOAHY CoV 
 la \ > \ = Sal y y 
 TmapndOov, Kat euol odSéroTe Edwkas Epl- 
 1 Y % a“ 7, 5 “ 
 dov' wa peta TOV hilwy pov evppavba: 
 ore O€ 0 vids Dou OdTOS 0 KaTtahaydv Gov 
 \ , \ 9 lanl > Yy > al 
 Tov Biov peta” Topvav HOE, Evcas adra 
 TOV oLTEVTOY LOTKXOV. O O€ EiTEY AvT@ 
 Téxvov, oD TavToTE pLeT E00 El, KaL TAVYTA 
 ‘i: > * , 3 > “~ \ \ 
 Ta eua oa eorw: evppavOnvar dé Kat 
 an + y ¢ b) , e& 
 xapnvar ede, Ort 0 adekpds Gov oOvTOS 
 \ > Ney \ 9 \ \ 
 VEKPOS HV Kal ECnoev, Kal aTrohkwas Kat 
 evpeUn. 
 TOC ORM RCHAPTER of 3. 
 “Hav tats yhaoooats Tav avbpdrav har@ 
 Kal TOV ayyéehov, ayamnv Oe py) EVO, yeyova 
 \ 3 lan x v4 ») , 3\ 
 XahKos nYov 7 KvuBaov ddadraloy. Kav 
 exw mpopy7eiav Kal €i0@ Ta pvoTHpLa 
 TAVITA KaL TAaGaY THY yao, KaY exw 
 Tacav THY TiaTW waTE Opn pEeOLoTaveL, 
 > \ <a 2)? p) x 
 ayatnv o€ py exo, ovlev ci. Kav po- 
 plow TAVTA TA UTAPYOVTA [LOV, Ka TAPAd@ 
 TO COMA [LOVv, Wa Kavyyowpal, ayamyVv é 
 \ ¥ Oe 2 las ¢€ 3 / 
 LN EX, ovdev @phe\ovwar. H ayanyn pa- 
 KpoOupet, ypyoTeveTar, n ayamyn ov Cydot, 
 OV TEPTEPEVETAL, OV PUTLOVTAL, OVK ATXN- 
 
 1 éplguov. 2 rap. 
 
 32 
 
110 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. [ XIII. 
 
 povet, ov Cynret TA EavTHs, ov Tapokvverat, 
 
 600 doyiteTar Td KaKdv, OV yalper Em TH 
 -] / 4 \ “A 3 , , 
 
 7 adukia, ouvyaipa dé TH alnfeia: TavTa 
 OTEYEL, TAVTA TLOTEVEL, TAVTA EhTriCel, TAVTA 
 ¢ , ¢ > , > , 7 ¥ 
 
 8 Uropever. “H ayamy ovdémore Timrer. €tTE 
 
 A ¥ 
 dé mpodytetar, KatapynOnoovTar: ete 
 VAOTOAL, TAVTOVTAL* ELTE YYMOUS, KaTAp- 
 
 9 ynOnoeTtar. €K pepovs yap ywooKopev 
 
 10 Kal Ek LEpous TpoPpynTevomev* OTav de EMO 
 alee Ppopynrevoy. n 
 \ \ 3 / , 
 TO TENELOV, TO EK fLEpovs KaTapynOnoerat. 
 Y ¥ / 3 , e , b) , 
 11 OTE NUNV VHTTLOS, EhaAOUY ws VTLOS, Eppo- 
 VouV WS VYATLOS, EdoylCouynv ws VYATLOS* OTE 
 yeyova avnp, KaTHpPynKa Ta TOU VyTiOV. 
 l4 XN A be: / > bo 
 12 Brérope yap ape Ov eodmtpou ev aiviy- 
 pati, TOTe O€ TPOTWTOV TPS TPdcwTO?V* 
 ¥ 
 apTl ywooKkw eK jLépous, TOTE OE ETLyVa- 
 13 Touat Kalas Kat éereyvacOnv. vuvi dé 
 ever Tiotis, ehtis, ayatyN: Ta Tpia TavTA, 
 peilov 5€ TovTwY 7H aydrn. 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 2 See 
 acc. = accusative. masc. = masculine. 
 act. = active. mid. = middle. 
 adj. = adjective. neut. = neuter. 
 aor. = aorist. nom. = nominative. 
 Peg Boe moemsgch d wis Cor opt. = optative. 
 a6 = confer, compare. part. = participle. 
 dat. = dative. pass. = passive. 
 
 CL. = exempli gratia, for peti. == Derect, 
 
 the sake of ex- pers. = person. 
 
 ample. plur. = plural. 
 jem. = feminine. poss. = possessive. 
 ile TCU. pred. = predicate. 
 gen. - = genitive. prep. = preposition. 
 imipers. = impersonal. Pres, s= present. 
 ind. = indicative. prin. = principal. 
 indecl, = indeclinable. pron. = pronoun. 
 indir. = indirect. Vila) — velative. 
 inf. = infinitive. Ses = scilicet, under- 
 imp. = imperative. stood. 
 imperf. = imperf. sing. = singular. 
 K.T.X. = kal Ta Aourd, et Ce- subj, = subject. 
 
 tera. subjv. = subjunctive. 
 lit. = literally voc. = vocative, 
 
N- Osis ray 
 
 ao es 
 
 THE First EPIstLE OF JOHN. 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 1. O HN AIl APXH3 =o wv am apyns. The breath- 
 ing and accent are not written on capitals. 6, the antece- 
 dent of the rel. pron. is often omitted. dxyxdaper, 2 perf. 
 act. ind. of dxove, prin. parts §88. A few verbs beginning 
 with a, ¢, or o have what is called Aztc reduplication ; 
 z.€. a reduplication which is the first two letters prefixed to - 
 the theme. a&xyKox = &k-hkov-a, v is dropped between two 
 vowels. éwpaxapev, learn prin. parts of dpdw, § 88. This 
 verb most commonly has both the ¢esporal and syllabic 
 augment. ddOadpots, $157. yuav, lit. of ws. The pers. 
 pron. is often used for the poss. pron. é~yAadyoar, Wndra- 
 daw. ys the art. may be used with ads/ract nouns in 
 Greek, and ofttimes with concrete nouns, where it cannot 
 be translated. 
 
 2. Observe the change in tenses, aor., perf., pres. For 
 Tv repeated after Cwnv, see 64. pds, § 159. 
 
 3. Kat vyly, also to you, not as in Eng. 4o you also. 
 exnte, § 119. pe’, $12. 
 
 4. 7 wetAnpwpern, perf. pass. subjv. See Avw, $56. The 
 perfects made thus from etpt, az, and the perf. part. are 
 called Zertphrastic forms. 
 
 Ii2 
 
NOTES. Lr 
 
 5. €otwv, note the accent. Always emphatic when on 
 the Zenult. ovd_euia, for the double negative, see § 142. 
 
 6. €av, $124. elev, learn prin. parts of byl, § 88. 
 
 8. €avrovs, for the 3 pers. used for the 1 pers. cf. 218, 
 latter part. 
 
 9. ay, 2 aor. act. subjv. of ddtyut, § 66. For the sense 
 of the aor. here and in xaOapioy, see § 114. 
 
 Io. For the two acc. cf. § 161. 
 
 CHAPTER 2. 
 
 I. Texvia is voc. ju) auapryre, for neg. see $119. The 
 verb is 2 aor. act. subjv. of dpapréve, learn prin. parts § 88. 
 See § 83, r for ciass of verbs. 
 
 2. ov movov... GAG Kat, not only... but also. 
 
 3. €yvwKapev, prin. parts of ywdeke. 
 
 4. py Typov is equal to a condition, if one does not 
 keep, hence the neg. yy, § 187. 
 
 5. os 0 dy typy, $126. dAnOas, for the formation of 
 adverbs, cf. 227. 
 
 6. pevewy, the inf. depends upon Aéeywv. See § 181 for 
 the inf. in indirect discourse. adrds, intensive. Te plTra- 
 trey, after ddeiAe. 
 
 7. €ixere, what tense? 87, 9, note. 
 
 g. eivat, cf. note on v. 6. 
 
 12. apewvrat, see under adinut, § 66. The perf. denotes 
 the completion of the act, and equals here “stand forgiven.” 
 
 13. TOV =avTov. dv Tovypov, note the gender. The 
 art. and an adj. are thus often used substantively. 
 
 15. py, $188. ra, z.e. the goods or affairs of the world. 
 The general use of the neut. is to be noted. 
 
 16. wav 70, explained by the following clauses. 
 
 18. Kal vdv, even now. ‘yeyovaci, 2 perf. act. of ylvopa. 
 Theme yew changes to yov. Cf. 2 perf. of Aetrw, § 57. 
 
 I vr 
 
[14 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 19. e&pA\Oav = é€-AAOov, prin. parts of ~pxopa:. The 
 I aor. vowel a often appears in the place of the 2 aor. 
 variable vowel %. ei yap... pel yuav, for the condi- 
 tion, sée § 122 and § 123, latter part. qdavepwHdow, 175 
 and 176. 
 
 22. ei pn, unless, except, as one word. 
 
 23. Kal, also. 
 
 24. tpels O K.T.r. = TotTO év piv pevérw 6 NKOVoaTE. 
 This is acommon construction in John. Not only does the 
 relative clause come before the principal clause, but to 
 make the expression more emphatic a personal pronoun 
 (not used except for emphasis) is thrust before the rela- 
 tive, whose antecedent is dropped. pecvy.. . wevetre, for 
 the fut. and aor. of liquid verbs, see 203-208. 
 
 25. éemnyyeiAato, ém-ayyéAXopan. 
 
 26. tov 7AavwvTwv, 192, 193. 
 
 27. TO xpiopa, subj. of weve. Cf. note on v. 24, above. 
 eha Pere, prin. parts of AapBave. zavrwy is neut. aird, 
 masc. 
 
 28. ox@per, 2 aor. act. subjv. of éxw, § 88. ux), why not 
 ov? am avrod, z.e. shrink in shame from him. 
 
 29. «idnre, learn the subjv. of ofSa, § 68. 
 
 CHAPTER 3. 
 
 I. Udere, cf. 2 aor. of dpdw. ddwxev, how different from 
 the aor.? kAnO@per, prin. parts of kadéo. eyve, prin. parts 
 of ywaokw. The long vowel w appears in the 2 aor. ind. 
 where in other verbs we find %. 
 
 2. écopefa, fut. of elpt, $65. aird, $153. dyopeba, see 
 
 5- apy, atpw. For the class of verbs, see § 82, 4. 
 7. poets, why not odSels? § 138. 
 8. eis TovTo, for this (purpose). 
 
NOTES. T15 
 
 12. Katy, Hebrew names of places and names of per- 
 sons, unless given a Greek ending, are indeclinable. rod 
 Tovnpov, masc. erage, cpatrw (cday-), § 82,2. ypu, 
 an improper prep. for sake of. 
 
 14. peTaBeByxapev, peraBatve, prin. parts of Balva. 
 peré has the sense of over, a change from one place to 
 another. Note the strong antithesis between the gen. 
 with é« and the acc. with els. 
 
 I5. pevovoay goes with Cayv. Review pres. act. part. 
 of Avw, § 43. 
 
 16. €Oyxe, § 63 and 285, 3, note. Learn prin. parts of 
 TiOmpe. Oeivar = Oc-€var, 2 aor. act. inf. The 2 aor. always 
 has the szple theme of the verb. 
 
 17. os 8 dv éxn... Oewpyy . . . krelorn, § 126. 
 
 18. dyara@pev, for the mood, see § 118. 
 
 19. yvwooueba, ywdoKw. aidrod, for the gen. see § 152. 
 npov, § 151. 
 
 20. peilwv, see péyas, § 88. THs Kapdias, § 150. 
 
 22. 0 dy, cf. ds dv, above. évebmtov abrod, § 152. 
 
 23. dvouart, $155. édwxev, see note on €Onke, above. 
 
 24. ov where we should expect 6. The relative is often 
 attracted to the case of its antecedent, when the latter is in 
 the gen. or dat. case. 
 
 CHAPTER 4. 
 
 I. eeAyrAVOaow, 2 perf. of pxopar. Cf. yeydvacr, 
 igi tie 5: 
 
 2. €nAvOora, 2 perf. part. Cf. NeAuKds, § 48. For the 
 participle in indirect discourse, where éet and the indica- 
 tive are more common, see § 136. 
 
 3- TOV dvTixpioTov, $147. dxykdare, cf. note on I Jn. 
 ig 
 4. 6 év tiv, a substantive expression. Note the wide 
 use of the article in Greek. 
 
116 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 5. avrav, § 148. 
 9. Tov povoyevy, cf. a similar use of the art. and adj. in 
 I Jn. 3:42. dméoraXkev, prin. parts of eré&do. Cyowper, 
 how different in meaning from f@pev? Cf. 157. 
 II. dyamayv, see § 59 for the inf. of contract verbs. /ofa- 
 subscript is regularly omitted here in classical Greek. 
 12. TeOcarat, Oedopar, § 77, 4. 
 15. os eav, § 126, latter part. 
 19, ayar@uev, not ind. 
 20. ein, see under yp, in table of irregular verbs. 
 21. dyad, ind. or subjv.? § 59. 
 
 CHAPTER 5. 
 
 TOV YEevVVHTUVTG ... TOV yeyevvnEVOV, 192, 193. 
 oTav ayara@pev, § 127. 
 3. Bapetat, nom. fem. plur. Ad)js. in -vs are rare. 
 4. Y vikn Y viknoaca = 4 viKhoaca vikn, the victory 
 which has conquered. See aor. act. part. of Ava, § 43. 
 6. 6 €AOwv, he who has come; iit. the (one) having 
 come. paptupovv, -vpéov. Cf. Ada, § 43. 
 8. ev, els, § 39. 
 10. avT@ = €avTe. 
 13. Tots miotevovowy, goes back to tytv. Observe the 
 tense. 
 14. airwpeOa, the mid. how different from the act.? 
 I5. éadv oloapev, a rare construction, § 124. 6 éay, cf. és 
 £OV, 50. |, atid cs 
 16. tidy, opdw. 
 18. yevvnGets, cf. aor. pass. part. of Ave, § 43. 
 20. iva ywwoKopev, note the mood. § 119. 
 21. dvAdgate, pvdratrw (pvdax-), § 82, I. éavTa, 218, 
 latter part. Why neut. gender? 
 
 Ww = 
 
NOTES. 117 
 
 MAT. 5: 3-12. 
 THE BEATITUDES. 
 
 3. paxdptot is in the pred. position, 64. aidradv, § 147. 
 
 4. mapaxAnPycovtat, wapakadéw. See the fut. pass. of 
 dw, § 56. 
 
 9. vtot is pred. 
 
 10. dediwypévor, perf. pass. part. of Bidkw. «, x change 
 to y before p. 
 
 II. xa’, against. wevdouevor may be trans. as an ady. 
 
 Mat. 6: 9-15. 
 THE LORD’S PRAYER. 
 
 Q. marep, note the case. 6=osel. ayiasOyTu, dyrdtw 
 (dyva5-), see 178 and the aor. pass. imp. of Avo, $ 56. 
 
 Io. €\Patw, note the use of the imperative mood in 
 commands. For the a in this form, cf. note on 1 Jn. 2: 19- 
 yernOyrw, yiwouar. eri, see under prep. § 164. 
 
 II. dds, see 2 aor. act. system of SiSopr, § 63. 
 
 12. ages, see 2 aor. system of ddinut, § 66. ols ddet- 
 Aérais, indir. obj.; sc. Ta dhedhpara. 
 
 13. py eioeveyKys, prin. parts of dépw. For the con- 
 struction, see $117. ptoar (pvopar), aor. mid. imp. Tod 
 7ovnpov may be either neut. or masc. as in I Jn. 2: 13. 
 
 14. apyre, see under adinpe. 
 
 LUKE 15. 
 
 THE PRODIGAL SON. 
 
 i. noav 8 aitd eyyilovres = Hyytlov 8€ airs. This 
 use of the part. with etyé is a common form of participial 
 
118 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 expression in the New Testament writers. Perhaps more 
 emphatic than the simple imperf. of the verb would be. 
 avTo@, § 154. 
 
 2. ovvecbier, note the force of evv-- What case follows 
 this prep. ? 
 
 4. exatov, § 39, a. droX<oas, prin. parts of ardAAvpe. 
 d7oAwdds, pres. pass. sense. evpy, prin. parts of evploke, 
 § 128, for mood. avro, z.e. mpéBarov. 
 
 6. ocvvxapyte, 2 aor. pass. imp. of cvvxatpw. Cf. same 
 of daive, § 58. 
 
 7. €otal, § 65. el, because of. peTavoodvTt, peravoew. 
 pera gives the idea of turning about from one stand to 
 another. 
 
 8. dpaxuy, was a Greek coin worth about 18 cents. 
 ovxi/, 133, I. 3, note. oapot, for the irregular contraction, 
 cf. SyAdw, § 59. ws ov, SC. Xpdvov. 
 
 Io. Tov ayyeAwr, § 152. 
 
 12. vewrepos, see § 37, 1 and note. emt BaddXov, neut. 
 part.; sc. por. duetAev, dz-vided ; prin. parts of ea? Biov, 
 here, means of life, portion. 
 
 13. cuvayayov, svvayo. The Attic reduplication is 
 regularly found in the 2 aor. of this verb. See note on 
 1 Jn.1:1. Prin. parts of dy. 
 
 14. damravyoavtos avrod, gen. abs. 194, 10, note. éve- 
 veTo, ylvopar. 
 
 I5. mopevdeis, 179 and 190. éxoAA7Oy, lit. to be glued, 
 fastened ; found in the pass. only in the New Testament, 
 and with the reflexive sense jozn one’s self to. 
 
 16. éreOiper, erbvpéw. wy, see note on I Jn. 3:24. 
 yo8ov, observe the nice use of the imperf. 
 
 17. eis... €AOwv, just as in English. dprwv, § 149. 
 Apo, § 157. aroAAvpau, the action is going on. 
 
 18. dvaoTas, see 2 aor. system of tornp, § 63. z2p0, a 
 fut. with no pres.; see under onpl. xyaprov, duaprave. 
 
NOTES. I19 
 
 19. tolynoov, aor. act.imp. dpapuwy, prin. parts of tpéxo. 
 errerrecey, eri-tintw. 
 
 22. ékeveyxare, éx-pépw. évdvoare, cf. ENDUE. w7r0dy- 
 para, lit. bound (8€w) underneath (v6). 
 
 23. daydvras, prin. parts of ér8iw. eippavOaper, ed- 
 dpaive, for the class of verbs, see § 82, 4. 
 
 26. cupdwvias, SYMPHONY. For the case, see § 148. 
 Ti av in Tadta, what this zs. ety is the opt. of eipt. For 
 the forms of the opt. in the New Testament (and the uses 
 of this mood), see §§ 70, 71. The optative is used instead 
 of the indicative in indirect question when certaznty does 
 not exist in the speaker’s mind. 
 
 27. amédaPev, note the force of dé, back. 
 
 28. 7OeXov, so always in the New Testament for €@edov. 
 
 29. idov, opdw, 2 aor. mid. imp. €éry, éros. mapndOov, 
 observe the force of the prep. as in ¢rans-gress. 
 
 30. xatahayov, devoured, squandered. 
 
 31. oais pred. édet, imperf.; see 2443 sc. w€ or thas as 
 subj. of the infinitives. 
 
 1 Cor. 13. 
 
 LOVE. 
 
 I. yeyova, ylvopar. 
 
 2. kav = kal éav, §18. «id0, see under ofa, § 68. preO- 
 otavety, § 134. 
 
 3. Ta UrdpxovTa = Ta Ovra; ze. all that ts, all the 
 things I have. rapa80, see 2 aor. act. of &(Swpr, § 63. 
 
 4. fydot, cf. Syrda, § 59. 
 
 7. oréye first means ¢o cover; then to cover and thus 
 keep off what threatens. Hence, hold off against, endure. 
 
 8. mavoovrat, in the act. to stof some one; in the mid 
 to stop one’s self. Hence, cease. 
 
120 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 II. npnv = yv, mid. end. -yyv; for act. -v. Note the 
 imperf. tense. See 78. 
 
 12. énvyvwoopal, émiywookw ; éri adds the idea of wel 
 or thoroughly. 
 
 13. peilwv, greater; therefore, the greatest. For the 
 case of TovTwv, see § 150. 
 
 KAVXHTwWpAl, V. 3, is an aor. mid. subjv. A doubtful 
 reading where some editors give a passive form: kav@y- 
 cwpat (-couat) from Kaiw, burn. 
 
PiGieRAL UR ANSEALION. 
 
 es 
 
 Tue First EPIsTLe OF JOHN. 
 CHAPTER If. 
 
 1. That-which was from beginning, that-which we- 
 have-heard, that-which we-have-seen with-the eyes of-us, 
 that-which we-beheld and the hands of-us handled, con- 
 cerning the word of-the life, — 
 
 z. And the life was-manifested, and we-have-seen, and 
 we-bear-witness, and we-proclaim to-you the life the eter- _ 
 nal which (771s) was with the Father, and was-manifested 
 to-us, — 
 
 3. That-which we-have-seen and have-heard, we-pro- 
 claim also to-you, that also you fellowshin may-have with 
 us: and the fellowship truly the our with the Father and 
 with the Son of-him Jesus Christ: 
 
 4. And these-things write we that the joy of-us may-be 
 (having-been-filled) full. 
 
 5. And there-is this the announcement which we-have- 
 heard from him and re-announce to-you, that the God 
 light is, and darkness not is in him at-all. 
 
 6. If we-say that fellowship we-have with him, and in 
 the darkness we-walk, we-lie and not we-do the truth: 
 
 7. If however in the light we-walk, as he is in the light, 
 fellowship we-have with one-another, and the blood of- 
 Jesus the Son of him cleanseth us from every sin. 
 
 i2% 
 
I22 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 8. If we-say that sin not we-have, ourselves we-deceive, 
 and the truth not is in us. 
 
 9. If we-confess the sins of-us, faithful he-is and 
 righteous*that he-may-remit to-us the sins, and may-cleanse 
 us from all unrighteousness. 
 
 10. If we-say that not we-have-sinned, a liar we-make 
 him, and the word of-him not is in us. 
 
 CHAPTER 2. 
 
 1. Little-children of-me, these-things write-I to-you, 
 that not ye-may-sin. And if any-one sin, an Advocate 
 we-have with the Father, Jesus Christ righteous : 
 
 2. And he propitiation is for the sins of-us; not for 
 the our and only, but also for whole the world. 
 
 3. And in this we-know that we-have-known him, 
 if the commandments of-him we-keep. 
 
 4. The-one saying that I-have-known him, and the 
 commandments of-him not keeping, a liar is, and in this- 
 one the truth not is: 
 
 5. Who however (dv) keeps of-him the word, truly in 
 this-one the love of-the God has-been-perfected. In this 
 we-know that in-him we-are : 
 
 6. The-one saying in him to-abide ought just-as that- 
 one walked also himself to-walk. 
 
 7. Beloved, not commandment new I-write to-you, 
 but commandment old which you-had from beginning: 
 the commandment the old is the word which ye-heard. 
 
 8. Again, commandment new I-write to-you, which- 
 thing is true in him and in you, because the darkness is- 
 passing-away, and the light the perfect already shines. 
 
 9. The-one saying in the light to-be, and the brother 
 of-him hating, in the darkness is until now. 
 
LITERAL TRANSLATION. 123 
 
 to. The-one loving the brother of-him in the light 
 abides, and offence in him not is. 
 
 11. The-one but hating the brother of-him in the 
 darkness is, and in the darkness he-walks, and not he- 
 knows where he-goes, because the darkness blinded the 
 eyes of-him. 
 
 12. I-write to-you, little-children, because are-remitted 
 to-you the sins on-account-of the name of-him. 
 
 13. I-write to-you, fathers, because you-have-known 
 the-one from beginning. JI-write to-you, young-men, be- 
 cause you-have-conquered the evil-one. 
 
 14. I-wrote to-you, little-children, because you-have- 
 known the Father. I-wrote to-you, fathers, because you- 
 have-known the-one from beginning. I-wrote to-you, 
 young-men, because strong you-are, and the word of-the 
 God in you abides, and you-have-conquered the evil-one. 
 
 15. Not love-ye the world, nor the-things in the world. 
 If any-one love the world, not is the love of-the Father in 
 him. 
 
 16. Because every-thing the in the world, the lust of- 
 the flesh, and the lust of-the eyes, and the vain-glory of- 
 the life, not is out-of the Father but out-of the world is. 
 
 17. And the world is-passing-away, and the lust of-it: 
 the-one but doing the will of-the God abides into the age. 
 
 18. Little children, last hour is; and just-as ye-heard 
 that antichrist is-coming, even now antichrists many have- 
 become; whence we-know that last hour is. 
 
 19. Out-of us they-went-out, but not were-they out-of 
 us; if for out-of us they-were, they-would-have-remained 
 (dv) with us: but that they-might-be-made-manifest that 
 not are-they all out-of us. 
 
 2o. And you anointing have from the Holy-One, you- 
 know (you) all. 
 
 21. Not I-wrote to-you because not you-know the truth, 
 
124 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 out because you-know it, and because every lie out-of the 
 truth not is. 
 
 22. Who is the liar, if not the-one denying that Jesus 
 not is the Christ? This-one is the antichrist, the-one 
 denying the Father and the Son. 
 
 23. Every-one the denying the Son, not-even the Father 
 has: the-one confessing the Son also the Father has. 
 
 24. You that-which you-heard from beginning, in you 
 let-it-abide. If in you abide that-which from beginning 
 you-heard, also you in the Son and in the Father shall- 
 abide. 
 
 25. And this is the promise which he promised Rog 
 the life the eternal. 
 
 26. These-things I-wrote to-you concerning the-ones 
 deceiving you. 
 
 27. And you the anointing which you-received from 
 him abides in you, and not need have-you that any-one 
 may-teach you; but as the of-him anointing teaches you 
 concerning all-things, and true is, and not is false, and 
 just-as it-taught you, abide-ye in him. 
 
 28. And now, little-children, abide in him; that if he- 
 be-manifested, we-may-have boldness, and not may-we-be- 
 ashamed from him in the presence of-him. 
 
 29. If you-know that righteous he-is, you-know that 
 every-one the doing the righteousness, out-of him has- 
 been-begotten. 
 
 TRANSLATION (Revisep Version). 
 CHAPTER 3. 
 
 1. Behold what manner of love the Father hath be- 
 stowed upon us, that we should be called children of God: 
 and (such) we are. For this cause the world knoweth 
 us not, because it knew him not. 
 
TRANSLATION (REVISED VERSION). 125 
 
 2. Beloved, now are we children of God, and it is not 
 yet made manifest what we shall be. We know that, if he 
 shall be manifested, we shall be like him; for we shall see 
 him even as he is. 
 
 _3. And every one that hath this hope (set) on him 
 purifieth himself, even as he is pure. 
 
 4. Every one that doeth sin doeth also lawlessness : 
 and sin is lawlessness. 
 
 5. And ye know that he was manifested to take away 
 sins; and in him is no sin. 
 
 6. Whosoever abideth in him sinneth not: whosoever 
 sinneth hath not seen him, neither knoweth him. 
 
 7. (My) little children, let no man lead you astray: 
 he that doeth righteousness is righteous, even as he is 
 righteous : 
 
 8. He that doeth sin is of the devil; for the devil 
 sinneth from the beginning. To this end was the Son 
 of God manifested, that he might destroy the works of 
 the devil. 
 
 9. Whosoever is begotten of God doeth no sin, be- 
 cause his seed abideth in him: and he cannot sin, because 
 he is begotten of God. 
 
 10. In this the children of God are manifest, and the 
 children of the devil: whosoever doeth not righteousness 
 is not of God, neither he that loveth not his brother. 
 
 11. For this is the message which ye heard from the 
 beginning, that we should love one another: 
 
 12. Not as Cain was of the evil one, and slew his 
 brother. And wherefore slew he him? Because _ his 
 works were evil, and his brother’s righteous. 
 
 13. Marvel not, brethren, if the world hateth you. 
 
 14. We know that we have passed out of death into 
 life, because we love the brethren. He that loveth not 
 abideth in death. 
 
126 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 15. Whosoever hateth his brother is a murderer: and 
 ye know that no murderer hath eternal life abiding in him. 
 
 16. Hereby know we love, because he laid down his 
 life for us: and we ought to lay down our lives for the 
 brethren. 
 
 17. But whoso hath the world’s goods, and beholdeth 
 his brother in need, and shutteth up his compassion from 
 him, how doth the love of God abide in him? 
 
 18. (My) little children, let us not love in word, neither 
 with the tongue; but in deed and truth. 
 
 Ig. Hereby shall we know that we are of the truth, and 
 shall assure our heart before him, whereinsoever our heart 
 condemn us; 
 
 20. Because God is greater than our heart, and know- 
 eth all things. 
 
 21. Beloved, if our heart condemn us not, we have 
 boldness toward God; 
 
 22. And whatsoever we ask, we receive of him, because 
 we keep his commandments, and do the things that are 
 pleasing in his sight. 
 
 23. And this is his commandment, that we should 
 believe in the name of his Son Jesus Christ, and love 
 one another, even as he gave us commandment. 
 
 24. And he that keepeth his commandments abideth 
 in him, and he in him. And hereby we know that he 
 abideth in us, by the Spirit which he gave us. 
 
VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS FOR 
 
 TRANSLATION 
 
 INTO ENGLISH. 
 
 ee 
 
 a&yahAtdopar, Je glad. 
 
 dyad, to love. 
 
 ayamrn, y, Jove. 
 
 ayamrntés, beloved. 
 
 ayyeAla, 1, message. 
 
 ayyedos, 0, Messenger, AN- 
 GEL. 
 
 ayiate, fo hallow. 
 
 aytos, holy. 
 
 ayvitw, purify. 
 
 ayves, Pure. 
 
 aypds, 6, feld. 
 
 adeXds, 0, vother. 
 
 a8tkla, y, wurighteousness. 
 
 aipa, 76, blood. 
 
 alvuypa, T6, @ dark saying, 
 ENIGMA. 
 
 alpw, to fake away. 
 
 aloxtvopat, Zo be ashamed. 
 
 alréw, Zo ask for. 
 
 airnpa, Td, request. 
 
 alov, 6, age, EON. 
 
 alovios, elernal. 
 
 aKkovw, fo hear. 
 
 Grafovia, n, vazuglory. 
 
 drAaddlw, to clang. 
 
 GAHVera, 4, Cruch. 
 
 GANOHs, rie. 
 
 GAnOuvds, true, real. 
 
 aAnPas, adv., truly. 
 
 GANG, CONj., duet. 
 
 &AAHAwV, One another. 
 
 Gpaprdave, 70 S77. 
 
 awaptwrds, 0, SZ77Er. 
 
 Guaptia, 1, 5272. 
 
 av, added to temporal and 
 relative conj., not trans- 
 latable ; see Greek index. 
 
 avayyéAdw, fo declare. 
 
 avalaw, Live again, revive. 
 
 a&vnp, 0, 77an. 
 
 avOpwros, 6, 77an. 
 
 avOpwroKxrovos, 6, #urderer. 
 
 aviornpt, fo raise up. 
 
 dvopia, 1, dawlessness. 
 
 avtlxptoros, 0, ANTICHRIST. 
 
 127 
 
128 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 aktvos, worthy. 
 
 amrayyéAAw, fo announce. 
 améxw, fo be away. 
 
 amd, prep. w. gen., from. 
 arofnpéw, fo 20 abroad. 
 atrokplvopat, 20 answer. 
 a&trokapBdave, fo take back. 
 amréhdupt, Zo loose, destroy. 
 atocté\i\w, fo send away. 
 amrropat, £0 touch. 
 
 arte, to light. 
 
 apertés, Pleasing. 
 apvéopar, Zo deny. 
 
 apti, adv., ow. 
 
 aptos, 6, dread. 
 
 apxy, n, Ceg7nning. 
 apxopat, Zo begin. 
 
 aoxnpovevo, Zo act unseemly. 
 
 acatws, adv., dssolutely. 
 
 avtTds, airy, adtd, he, she, zt. 
 
 avtod, of himself. 
 adinps, Zo forgive. 
 Badr, fo cast. 
 
 Bapis, -eta, -¥, Zeavy. 
 Baowrela, 4, kzugdom. 
 Bios, 0, /é/e, sustenance. 
 Brérrw, Zo see. 
 
 Booke, fo feed. 
 
 yap, conj., for. 
 yeltov, 0, xezghbor. 
 yevvaw, Zo beget. 
 yivopa, Zo be, become. 
 yivaoka, Zo know. 
 yAdooa, 1, congue. 
 
 
 
 yvaous, y, knowledge. 
 
 ypappartets, o, clerk. 
 
 yeah, fo write. 
 
 SaxtvALov, T6, /71ger7NyY. 
 
 Samavaw, Zo expend. 
 
 8é, conj., and, but. 
 
 Set, impers., z¢ 7s wecessary. 
 
 Sua, prep. w. gen., Zrough: 
 acc., ou account of. 
 
 Statpéw, Zo divide. 
 
 SiaBodos, 0, devz. 
 
 Stayoyyile, fo murmur. 
 
 Stdvoia, 4, 777772. 
 
 StacKkoptife, Zo scatter. 
 
 Si8acKe, Zo teach. 
 
 SlSwpr, Zo e7ve. 
 
 Sixasos, 2st. 
 
 Sukacocvvn, 4, Justice. 
 
 Supa, fo thirst. 
 
 Sidkw, to persecute, follow. 
 
 Soxipate, fo prove. 
 
 Sovrctw, Zo be a servant. 
 
 SodXos, 0, servant. 
 
 Sivapar, Zo be able. 
 
 Sto, ‘wo. 
 
 éav, Conj., 2f. 
 
 éavtod, of hiniself. 
 
 éyy({w, fo come near. 
 
 éyo, /. 
 
 at conjig ef 
 
 elSwdXov, T6, IDOL. 
 
 elutl, am. 
 
 eltrov, 2 aor., / said. 
 
 elpnvotroids, Deacemaker. 
 
VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 
 
 ets, prep. W. acc., z#fo, zn. 
 
 eis, pla, Ev, ove. 
 
 eloépxopat, 0 enter. 
 
 elrdhépa, fo bring in. — 
 
 elre, whether. 
 
 ék, prep. w. gen., out of. 
 
 éxaroy, indecl., ome hundred. 
 
 éxet, adv., there. 
 
 éxeivos, Zhat one. 
 
 exhépw, fo carry out. 
 
 eheéw, 20 show mercy. 
 
 eheqpov, merciful. 
 
 édtris, 4, Lope. 
 
 éuds, 772). 
 
 eprpoo bev, adv., before. 
 
 év, prep. w. dat., 27. 
 
 évdte, Zo Put on, ENDUE. 
 
 évekev, prep. W. gen., 07 ac- 
 count of. 
 
 évevkovTa, 777¢cLly. 
 
 évvéa, 722722. 
 
 évToAn, 4, Commandment. 
 
 évomiov, adv., before, in 
 face of. 
 
 e€, cf. ék. 
 
 ef€pxopat, 20 20 out. 
 
 érrayyedla, y, Promise. 
 
 érayyéAAopat, 20 Promise. 
 
 émi, prep. W. gen., wfon 3 w. 
 dat., 07; w.acc., fo, on. 
 
 éemBddrdw, falling to, com- 
 ing to. 
 
 émiywooKw, Zo know well. 
 
 émOupéw, 20 desire. 
 
 K 
 
 
 
 
 
 129 
 
 érOupla, 4, desire. 
 éerunimtw, Zo fall down. 
 éxiTiOnpr, to place upon. 
 épyov, 76, work. 
 Epnpos, n, desert. 
 Epidos, 4, 42d. 
 €pxopar, 70 come, go. 
 €p, shall say. 
 épwtdw, fo ask. 
 
 éoBiw, Zo eat. 
 ExomTpov, TO, 7277/07. 
 erxartos, ast. 
 
 eros, 76, Year. 
 evploKw, fo find. 
 
 ébn, he said. 
 edppatve, to eladden, rejoice 
 éxo, fo have. 
 
 €ws, conj., until. 
 ta, fo Live. 
 
 {nAow, Zo envy. 
 {ntéw, Zo seek. 
 
 Con, 4, “fe. 
 
 q, CONJ., or. 
 
 mon, adv., zow. 
 
 WKw, at Come. 
 
 TNHEpa, 1, Zay. 
 NPETEPOS, OUP. 
 
 nxéo, fo sound. 
 Qavartos, 6, death. 
 Bavpatw, fo marvel. 
 Bedopar, Zo behold. 
 OeAnpa, +6, qwe7l. 
 Gro, Zo wll. 
 
 96s, 0, God. 
 
130 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 
 
 Gewpéw, 0 observe. kplots, 4, Judgment. 
 
 80, fo sacrifice. KtpBadov, T6, CYMBAL 
 *Inoots, 0, Fesus. Aadéw, fo sheak. 
 
 tAacpés, 0, Dropitiation. AapBave, fo fake. 
 
 tva, conj., 27 order that. Aéyw, Zo say. 
 
 loxupds, strong. Ausds, 6, Auger. 
 kabapi{w, Zo purify. Aoyllopar, Zo judge, think. 
 Kabapds, Dure. Adyos, 0, word. 
 
 Kas, CONj., even as. Aixvos, 0, damp. 
 
 kal, conj., ad, also. Ato, Zo loose, destroy. 
 Katy, 6, Caz. pakaptos, dlessed, happy. 
 Kalvos, 2¢W. paKkpobupéw, Zo suffer long. 
 kakds, evil, bad. pakpds, long, far. 
 
 Kkarhéw, fo call. paptupéw, to bear witness. 
 kapdia, 4, Zeart. paptupla, n, wel7ess. 
 kata, prep. w. gen., against; | peOorave, fo remove. 
 
 w. acc., through. pellLov, oveater. 
 katayivorkw, fo condemn. pévo, fo remain. 
 katadeitra, fo leave behind. pépos, T6, Pare. 
 katapyéw, fo bring to nought. | pera, prep. w. gen., wth, 
 Kkatadiréw, fo kiss. Ww. acc., after. 
 kates Olw, to devour, sguan- | peravoéw, Lo repent. 
 
 der. peTavoa, n, repentance. 
 kavxdopnar, fo boast. petaBalve, fo cross over. 
 Ketwat, fo lze, recline. pr, rot. 
 
 kepariov, 76, the fruit of the | pn8é, wezther, nor. 
 Carob tree, used for the | pndels, 20 one. 
 swine, also by poor peo- | pioéa, Zo hate. 
 
 ple. Lit., a “ttle horn. ploBros, Azreling. 
 KXelw, fo shut. prods, 0, Azre, pay. 
 kAnpovopéw, fo znherit. povoyevys, only begotten. 
 kowwvla, 4, fellowship. povos, alone, only. 
 Kodacis, 4, Punishment. pooxos, 6, calf. 
 
 Koapos, 6, world, COSMOS. pPuvoripiov, T6, MYSTERY. 
 
VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 
 
 veaviokos, 6, young man. 
 
 vekpos, dead. 
 
 véos, young. 
 
 vytios, young child. 
 
 vikdw, 20 conquer. 
 
 vikn, 4, victory. 
 
 viv, adv., zow. 
 
 o0ev, adv., whence. 
 
 ola, 7 know. 
 
 oikla, y, ouse. 
 
 olkos, 6, Louse. 
 
 odos, whole. 
 
 oporos, lke. 
 
 oporoyéw, 20 confess. 
 
 overSilw, Zo revile. 
 
 Ovopa, T6, 2AULE. 
 
 Opa, fo see. 
 
 opyite, fo anger, arouse. 
 
 Opos, 76, mountain. 
 
 Os, 7, 0, who. 
 
 OOTIS, NTIS, 6,71, Whoever. 
 
 Ore, CONj., when. 
 
 étt, conj., Jecause, that. 
 
 ov, 700. 
 
 ovdé, zecther, nor. 
 
 ovdeis, 720 one. 
 
 ovSérore, adv., ever. 
 
 ovKért, adv., xo longer. 
 
 ovrw, adv., wot yet. 
 
 ovpavds, 0, heaven. 
 
 otpavios, Aeavenly. 
 
 oioia, yn, substance, prop- 
 erty. 
 
 ovtos, this one. 
 
 13% 
 
 ovTw, adv., thus. 
 opertérns, 6, debtor. 
 
 _ opetAnpa, +6, debt. 
 
 ofelru, Zo owe, be indebted. 
 
 opbadyds, 0, eve. 
 
 Oona, shall see. 
 
 madstov, +6, child. 
 
 tais, 0, n, chzld. 
 
 mevaw, Zo hunger. 
 
 tTaXavds, old. 
 
 maduv, adv., again. 
 
 tmapapoAH, 71, PARABLE. 
 
 Tapayouar, 20 pass away. 
 
 Tapadidwop., fo deliver, give 
 up. 
 
 TmapaKkahéw, Zo Summon, Com- 
 Sort. 
 
 TapaKAnTos, 6, advocate. 
 
 Twaparrapa, 76, trespass. 
 
 mapepxopar, to pass by, 
 omit. 
 
 mapofvvopnat, fo be provoked. 
 
 Tapovola, 1, Dresence. 
 
 tmappynola, n, doldness. 
 
 was, al. 
 
 matnp, 0, father. 
 
 welOw, to persuade. 
 
 twéutro, Lo send. 
 
 mevOéw, O72eVe, MOUYN. 
 
 Teiparpos, 0, Lem ptation. 
 
 mepl, prep. W. gen., concern: 
 mg; W. acc., around. 
 
 tmepit@atéw, fo walk. 
 
 Tepiroevopar, Lo abound. 
 
132 
 
 meptrepevopar, 20 
 boast. 
 
 aintw, fo fall. 
 
 mirtevw, Lo believe. 
 
 miotis, n, farth. 
 
 motés, faithful. 
 
 Twavaw, cause to wander. 
 
 wavy, 1, Wandering. 
 
 wAnpdw, fo fill. 
 
 arvedpa, 76, SHzrit. 
 
 movew, Lo do, make. 
 
 moXitns, 0, c7l7zen. 
 
 mos, 71UCh, Many. 
 
 movnpos, wicked. 
 
 Topevopat, 20, Conte. 
 
 mépvos, 0, fornicator. 
 
 moaos, How great. 
 
 motatés, what sort of. 
 
 mov, adv., where. 
 
 movs, 0, foot. 
 
 apavs, ventle. 
 
 amperPurtepos, elder. 
 
 apo, prep. w. gen., before. 
 
 apoBarov, 76, sheep. 
 
 ampés, prep. w. acc., 20, 
 towards. 
 
 mpooSéxopar, 20 receive. 
 
 tmpocevxopar, Zo offer pray- 
 ers Lo. 
 
 mporKkadéw, £0 SUMMON. 
 
 Tpdcwtov, TO, face. 
 
 mpopytela, 1, Prophecy. 
 
 tTpopnytys, 0, PROPHET. 
 
 apatos, first. 
 
 vaunt, 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 awvvOdvopat, fo learn, en- 
 guire. 
 
 aTwXos, 0, beggar. 
 
 motrote, adv., ever. 
 
 mas, adv., how. 
 
 propa, Zo deliver. 
 
 capdw, fo sweep. 
 
 capt, 7, flesh. 
 
 otpepov, adv., to-day. 
 
 oitevtos, farted. 
 
 okdvSarov, 16, cause for 
 stumbling. 
 
 okotia, y, darkness. 
 
 oKOTOS, TO, darkness. 
 
 aos, thy. 
 
 omdayxvitw, to have com: 
 passion. 
 
 omhayxva, Ta, compassion 
 bowels. 
 
 oméppa, To, sced. 
 
 oToAn, y, 70be, garment. 
 
 ov, thou. 
 
 cuppovia, 1, 7722S7C. 
 
 cuvaye, to collect. 
 
 cvverOlw, fo cat with. 
 
 cvvkaréw, Zo call together. ° 
 
 cuvxatpw, fo rejoice with. 
 
 ohatw, fo slay. 
 
 cdpa, To, body. 
 
 cwTHp, o, SAVvi0Ur. 
 
 raxv, adv., guzckly. 
 
 rexviov, 10, little child. 
 
 téxvov, To, Child. 
 
 téhevos, Perfect, mature. 
 
VOCABULARY OF THE SELECTIONS. 
 
 tedecow, fo perfect. 
 
 teovys, 0, collector of taxes, 
 publican. 
 
 Typéw, fo keep. 
 
 rion, Zo put, place. 
 
 tis, tl, who? what? 
 
 Tis, Tl, Some one, certain 
 one. 
 
 Tosrottos, S0 721UCch. 
 
 TPAaX AOS, 0, 72¢CK. 
 
 tpets, tela, three. 
 
 Tpéexo, LO v1. 
 
 tuprow, fo make blind. 
 
 vytatve, Zo be well, strong. 
 
 tdap, To, water. 
 
 vidos, 0, S07. 
 
 uTaye, fo go. 
 
 imapxe, Lo be. 
 
 umép, prep. w. gen., Sor. 
 
 vrodypa, To, sandal. 
 
 vTopéva, fo endure. 
 
 votepéw, Zo lack, want. 
 
 daive, to show, appear. 
 
 havepos, Plain, manifest. 
 
 havepow, make manifest. 
 
 hépw, bring, bear. 
 
 piros, 0, frzend. 
 
 hoPéopar, Zo fear. 
 
 ofos, 6, fear. 
 
 dpovéw, Zo think. 
 
 dbvi\accw, to guard. 
 
 ere: 
 
 dvolopar, to be puffed up, 
 inflated. 
 
 das, to, light. 
 
 Xa&Akos, 0, dvass, bronze. 
 
 X%p4, 1, 70. 
 
 Xalpw, Zo rejoice. 
 
 Xaptv, used as prep. w. gen., 
 for the sake of. 
 
 xelp, n, Zand. 
 
 XoOtpos, 0, szvz7e. 
 
 Kops, 0, dancing. 
 
 xopratw, to be filled. 
 
 Xpela, y, weed. 
 
 Xpnorevopar, Zo be kind. 
 
 Xplopa, to, anointing. 
 
 Xpirros, 6, Christ. 
 
 XSpa, yn, country. 
 
 Webdopnar, e,to speak falsely. 
 
 Wevdorpodytys, 6, false 
 prophet. 
 
 WetSos, 7d, Me. 
 
 Wetorns, 6, Zar. 
 
 Wnraddw, Zo touch, handle. 
 
 Wuxh, H, soz. 
 
 Wopite, ezve in small parts. 
 
 ade, as follows, thus. 
 
 Gpos, 6, shoulders. 
 
 apa, n, Zour. 
 
 as, aS. 
 wapecéw, 0 owe, be in 
 debtea to. 
 

 
PART II.—GRAMMAR. 
 

 
Ll. WRITING AND SOUND. 
 
 ALPHABET. 
 
 § 1. Greek is written with twenty-four letters. 
 
 Form. 
 
 Dene RK SMPOOMNAZSr>AHOMNEDOeP 
 
 Qa 
 
 B 
 
 ry 
 
 } 
 
 e (short) 
 C 
 
 n (long) 
 6 & 
 
 l 
 
 K 
 
 ¥\ a 
 fe 
 
 Vv 
 
 c 
 
 o (short) 
 T 
 
 p 
 
 oS 
 
 5 
 
 Vv 3 
 
 X 
 
 W 
 
 w (long) 
 
 NAME. 
 
 ava 
 ne 
 Yopnpia. 
 deATa 
 
 € Widov 
 Ciro. 
 nTa 
 Onta 
 i@Ta 
 Karo. 
 
 alpha 
 beta 
 gamma 
 delta 
 epsilon 
 zeta 
 
 eta 
 theta 
 zota 
 kappa 
 lambda 
 mu 
 
 nu 
 
 oe 
 omtcron 
 pi 
 
 rho 
 sigma 
 tau 
 
 upsilon 
 phi 
 cht 
 pst 
 
 omega 
 
 LATIN. 
 a 
 
 b} 
 
 ( 
 vs 
 
 i 
 ph 
 ch 
 ps 
 O 
 
 as in father 
 
 as in get 
 
 as in met 
 
 as in they 
 as in thing 
 
 as in machine 
 ork 
 
 as in example 
 as in obey 
 
 French z or 
 German z# 
 as in phase 
 as in chasm 
 as in Zips 
 
 as in fone 
 
 1 Letters without equivalents are pronounced as in English. 
 2 ¢ in the middle of a word; s at the close. 
 
 137 
 
 3 See 11, 2 
 
ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 138 
 
 “2p ySiLSu UL PuNOS JUSTeAIMDS OU SEY AD _ 
 
 2902 0 2 D ysyjsuq se * » «agorduz “Ir (AM al) © ii v 
 
 9 € z I OAS ee ee 
 dzoi8 P7227} 1170 [20 }Y82ay o[SZ2v yst|suq ur se poounouoad ‘sSuoyiydip +agorg ‘ao ad av 10 13 170 
 9 $ v € z I >. Sin oe eae 
 
 :SMOT[OJ Sv SSuwOYZYGIp WAIOJ pure OUT] JY} 19}Fe STAMOA 
 95079 94} YyM suIquios Kay} “wago o1¥ DUT] 94} D1OJOG S[OMOA OY TL “F§ 
 ar|mokoanv 
 “STAMOA AO NOILLOVULNOS) 
 
 mk vo ‘s7amoa suo, uado 
 
 a D ‘s7amon SUOT 
 0 > v0 ‘syamor p4oys uIGQ a 
 
 0 ‘S790 J4OYS 
 ‘JOYS SOWIJaWOS ‘SuOT SoWIjOWOS Iv A 7 “MW $ Suo] sAeM[e © ‘h 
 ‘q1oys skemye oie 0 9 asay1 JO. a 7 ‘m ‘0 ‘9 “M aIB S[OMOA DUT ‘E § 
 
 “STAMOA JO AIEV 
 
 ku 
 a 1 ‘s79an20% 9S019 pea 
 0123 
 
 yaSuv (SQ-[23-Bue) SoyrrAv -F7 Su ay] poounouosd st X 10 ‘A ‘y a10jaq A pv 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Selo Si SV yy |S X K ~ » syeyepeg (A) 
 0Q 10 QD 5 2 fa) Q 2 srensuiy 41 0 Vv oO 
 Sp 10 ‘spf ‘su wo ft p “ sfeiqey w 
 | | | *sTeseNy ies 
 *SLNVNOS ‘ysnoy “eIPPI]T “Yours ‘spinbry "JUETIQIS 
 -NOd) ————_—— ae aide 
 ic tt Seley @ § “SALNYL “STHMOAINAS G § 
 
 “SLNVNOSNO’) HO WIdV.T. 
 
139 
 
 CONTRACTION. 
 
 (=lio) ao=a03 m=a00 D=lin D=190 
 ; i ; “ * :poddoip st [amon 
 puosss oy} 7 Jou JI {ydisosqns se pourejzoI st 7 st yt Jt “Suoyjydip oy} 
 JO [OMOA PUOdS 9Y} PUL ‘5770202 JO UOTJOVIJUOD OF SALT BY} 0} SUIPIOIIV 
 p9}0¥1}]U0D OI OM} DY} “[2AMOA JSIY OY} DYITUN st [aMOA oy} Udy 8 § 
 10 = 100 19 = 133 710 = 700 
 : & : : paqiosqe SI [OMOA 
 oy} ‘oylfe ore Suoy Arp oy} Jo [MOA 4s1y 9} pue fOMOA dy} UIYMA “YZ § 
 
 ‘ONOHLHdI(q{ HLIM TAMOA AO NOLLOVALNO?) 
 
 19=33 ‘OX l=vo Ub=lad bask ole v=ho 0 
 
 L 9 ai F € Zz 
 : sjreaoid Ws0F Buoy UT [aMOA 4S1Y OY} PUL 4OVI]UOD sjaMoA asoyT, “9 § 
 
 390 
 
 4 |] 
 
 lin aaD 
 ©o=m0 oko ™=070 (M=3M) M=O>9 (‘9x7 20 =00 ‘30 ‘09 
 ZI II OL 6 9 Z 
 ‘(m= o=n1M ook m=ol.) m=ov =o” 
 9 S 4 c z I -@ ST 
 
 ynsor oy} pur “19}Je 9sOY} YI 9L.1]UOS OUT] OY} V1OJoq sjaMOA DYT “C § 
 
 mol|luoan 
 
I40 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 § 9. There are three kinds of accent in Greek . 
 
 The acute ; as in tls, who ? 
 The grave ; “tis, Some one. 
 The cercumflex; “ avto, to him. 
 
 There are two fundamental laws of accent: 
 VERBAL, explained in 3, 6; and NoMINAL (includ- 
 ing nouns, adjectives, and participles), given in 
 57. 
 
 BREATHINGS. 
 
 § 10. Every initial vowel or diphthong has a 
 breathing mark over it: 
 
 (’) is called the smooth breathing, and is not 
 pronounced. {6d10s, avras. 
 
 (‘) is called the rough breathing, and gives the 
 sound of &. apa, héra, avtod, hautou. 
 
 Note that the breathing is placed over the 
 second vowel of the diphthong. 
 Initial p always has the rough breathing. pha. 
 
 MOVABLE vr. 
 
 § 11. Movable vy may occur at the end of the 
 following : 
 
 1. All dative plurals in -ov(v). maow(v), axov- 
 gact(v). 
 
APOSTROPHE ; CRASIS. 141 
 
 2. All verbs with the ending -ov. ‘ornou(v), 
 AVovat(V). 
 
 3. After -e of the third person singular of 
 verbs. édaBe(v), HKovce(r). 
 
 4. After éori; as éori(v). 
 
 So also o is movable in o#rws, thus. Before a 
 vowel, aS ovtws v; but before a consonant, 
 oi'T@ Kal.) 
 
 APOSTROPHE. 
 
 $12. In the prepositions a short final vowel 
 may be dropped before a word beginning with 
 avowel. £L.g. am attod, from him, éf’ @, at 
 which; we? nav, weth ws. 
 
 Note that the elision is marked by an apos- 
 trophe, and that a smooth mute, as 7, 7, changes 
 to the corresponding rough mute, ¢, 0, before a 
 rough breathing. 
 
 arrd, but, also suffers elision ; as adn’ epol. 
 
 CRASIS. 
 
 § 13. When two vowels, or a vowel and a diph- 
 thong, come together in two words,.as Kai éyw 
 or To évavtiov, they are usually joined together ; 
 as Kay or tovvavtiov. This is called craszs 
 (mixture), and is indicated by the coronzs over 
 the contracted form. 7 
 
 1 But in the New Testament often s before a consonant. 
 
142 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 § 14. The Greek has four punctuation marks : 
 the conima and the period, as in English; the 
 interrogation mark (;), as the English semi- 
 colon; and the point (*) above the line. which 
 equals English colon or semicolon. 
 
 
 
 2. ACCIDENCE. 
 
 § 15. Accidence treats of NOMINAL Znflexion, 
 the declension of nouns, adjectives, and partici- 
 ples, and of the conjugation of verbs. 
 
 INFLEXION. 
 
 § 16. In Greek ALL nouns, adjectives, and par- 
 ticiples have zzffexion ; z.e. an ending or suffix 
 which is added to the stem or substantial part 
 of the word. There are three sets of endings or 
 suffixes, and according as a noun takes one set 
 or the other it is said to belong to the frsz, 
 second, or third declension. 
 
 § 17. Nouns of the first declension have the 
 stem ending in-a. This is therefore called the 
 A-declension. 
 
 Nouns of the second declension have the stem 
 in -o. O-declension. 
 
GENDER AND NUMBER. 143 
 
 Most nouns of the third declension have 
 stems ending in a consonant, hence the term 
 Consonant Declension is used. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 § 18. All nouns in Greek are either mascu- 
 line, feminine, or neuter gender. 
 
 Nouns denoting male persons are masculine. 
 
 Nouns denoting female persons are feminine. 
 
 § 19. Outside of these ser rules the gender 
 may be determined very largely by the declen- 
 sion to which the noun belongs: 
 
 1. Nouns of the A-declension ending in a, 7, 
 a@ are feminine. ‘Those ending in -s are mas- 
 culine. 
 
 2. Nouns of the O-declension in -os are mostly 
 masculine ; those in -ov are neuter. 
 
 3. In the third declension the gender varies 
 according to the ending of the stem. See 
 Lessons ‘XV, XVI; XVIIL, and AIX. for the 
 discussion of these caine 
 
 NUMBER. 
 
 § 20. In the Greek of the New Testament 
 there are two numbers, singular and plural, as 
 in English. 
 
144 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 CASE. 
 
 § 21. There are five cases in Greek : 
 
 1. Nominative, as in English. 
 
 2. Genitive, SOURCE Or WHENCE-CASE. Eng. 
 lish possessive or objective with of. 
 
 3. Dative, WHERE-CASE, TO or FOR which any- 
 thing Is or Is DONE. English remote or zzdzrect 
 object. 
 
 4. Accusative, WHITHER-CASE. English drect 
 object. 
 
 5. Vocative, case of address. 
 
 § 22. First oR A-DECLENSION.' 
 apxh, 7, Ceginning. cota, xy, wisdom. adpa, y, hour. 
 Stem apxa-- Stem coguia- Stem wpa- 
 S.N.V. apxq copia apa 
 G. apxfis codias apas 
 D. apxq codia dpg. 
 A. &pxqv codiayv apav 
 P.N.V. dpxat codiat apat 
 G. dapxav codiay apav 
 D. apxats codpiats apats 
 A. 4apxas codpias apas 
 S6£a, 4, elory. 
 : Stem dofa- 
 S.N.V. 86§a P.N.V. 8飀ar 
 G. 86s G. So0fdv 
 D. 86€y D. S6€ats 
 A. 8d€av A. 8d€as 
 
 1 Cf. 55 for table of endings in the A-declension. 
 
SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 
 
 tTpopyrys, 6, PROPHET. 
 Stem mrpogyra- 
 
 mpopytns | 
 TpoPHTov 
 mpodtiry 
 TpopyTHv 
 TpoP> Ta 
 
 <Pouoz 
 
 P.N.V. 
 
 G. 
 D: 
 A. 
 
 145 
 
 Tpopyrar 
 Tpopyntav 
 Tpopyrats 
 Tpopyras 
 
 a. Most nouns of this declension have the nom. in a, », 
 
 or a, and are feminine. 
 
 6. Some end in -s, and are masc. Eng. pabyrns, atsct- 
 
 ple; veavias, young man; KpiTys, judge. 
 
 Cc. yh, 9, earth, contracted from yéa, is declined through: 
 out as dpxy, but with the circumflex accent. 
 
 § 23. SECOND OR O-DECLENSION. 
 Adyos, 0, word. So0ddos, 6, servant. 
 Stem doyo- Stem dovdo- 
 S.N. Adyos SodXos 
 G. Adyou SotvXouv 
 D. Adyo SovAw 
 A. Aédyov SotAov 
 V. Adye Sotrc 
 P.N.V. Adyou SodAor 
 G. Adyev SovA@V 
 D. Adyots SovAots 
 A. Aédyous SovAous 
 vids, 507. 
 SN. ités Stem vio- 
 G. viod 
 D. vie 
 A. vidv 
 V. vié 
 
 1 See 51 and 54. 
 
 ” 
 avOpwiros, 77071. 
 
 Stem avépwio- 
 
 ” 
 avOpwrros 
 avOpatrov 
 avOporw 
 mv 
 avOpwirov 
 avOpwrre 
 
 »” 
 avOpwrrot 
 avOporwy 
 avOpaois 
 avOpatrovus 
 
 P.N.V. viol 
 
 G. vtdv 
 D. vtots 
 A. vtots 
 
146 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Sapov, 76, g7/t. 
 Stem dwpo- 
 S.N.A.V. 8apov P.N.A.V. 86pa 
 G. Sapov G. S8apev 
 D. S4peo D. Spots 
 
 a. "Inoots, Fesus, is Inoov in the gen., dat., and voc. 
 
 § 24. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE. 
 
 Mase. fem. Neut. 
 
 SiN; 0 7 TO 
 
 G. Tod THs Tov 
 
 D. te TH Te 
 
 A. Tov THY 76 
 
 P.N. ot at Ta. 
 
 G. Téav TaV TOV 
 
 D. ois Tats Tots 
 
 A. tots Tas Ta 
 
 § 25. ApyECTIVES OF THE A- AND O-DECLENSION. 
 
 Kadés, 200d. 
 
 S.N. Kadds Kady Kaddov 
 G. Kadod KaA TS Kadov 
 D. Karo Kady Kado 
 A. Kaddév KaAHV Kadov 
 V. Karé KoA} Kadov 
 
 P.N. Kadol Kkadat KOAG 
 G. Kartdav Kadav KaAav 
 D. Kadois KaXais KaXots 
 A. kadots Kaas KaAG 
 
PRONOUNS IN -os. 
 
 WStos, o7e’s own. 
 
 S.N. tos i8{a Sov 
 G. tdSlov t&las iSlov 
 D. Ble 8a Slew 
 A. WWiov i&iav  iBrov 
 V. Wee iSia = YSov 
 P.N.V. ror rar téza 
 G. istev iStov iSlov 
 D. idfois Slats iSlors 
 A. (Blovs iSias Sa 
 § 26. PRONOUNS IN -os. 
 
 147 
 
 piKpds, sazad/, 
 
 pLKpdS  pLLKpd 
 PiKpoD —LLKpGs 
 Bikp@ = Keg 
 PLKpOv pLKkpdy 
 BLKpe puKpd 
 Bikpot = ukpat 
 PLKp@y = LLKp@v 
 HLKpots puLKkpais 
 PiKpovS pLKpas 
 Cf. 62-64, 
 
 HLKpOV 
 puKpod 
 piKkp@ 
 
 HLLKpov 
 PLKpoy 
 
 BLKpa 
 PLKpa@v 
 PuKpots 
 pLuKpa 
 
 ovtos, ¢iis (one) ; éxeivos, that (one) ; autos, he, himself. 
 
 S.N. otros 
 
 TOUTOU 
 TOUTW 
 TOUTOYV 
 
 OvTOL 
 TOUTMV 
 TOUTOLS 
 TOUTOUS 
 
 v 
 POONA PON 
 
 iJ4 
 auTH 
 
 TAVTNS 
 TAUTY 
 TAUTHY 
 
 avTat 
 TOUTWY 
 TAvVTALS 
 TavTAS 
 
 TOUTO 
 TOUTOUV 
 TOUTW 
 TOUTO 
 
 TAavTA 
 TOUTWY 
 TOUTOLS 
 TavTa 
 
 a. avros and éxetvos are declined like xaAds, above, 
 except the neut. sing. of each is airé and éxetvo in nom. 
 
 and acc. 
 
 b. avros is used as the pers. pron. of the 3 pers., he, 
 she, it ; but in the od/igue cases only. When used with a 
 noun in any case, it means Azmself, etc.; ¢.¢. 6 avnp avtos, 
 the man himself. But when the art. precedes the pron., as 
 6 avTos avyp, it means ¢he same (man). Cf. 69-10. 
 
148 
 
 § 27. RELATIVE PRONOUN. 
 6s, who. 
 oS 1 6 ot ai 
 ov 7S ov ov av 
 @ 1 rn ots ais 
 ov av o ovs as 
 
 § 28. Consonant OR THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 MutTeE STEMS. 
 
 Xapis, q, Lace. 
 
 Stem yapir- 
 S.N. xépts 
 G. yxdprros 
 D. xdpute 
 A.  xdpw 
 V. xdpts 
 P.N.V. xdputes 
 G. xXapltrev 
 D.  xaptor 
 A. yxdptitas 
 vve, yn, 2zght. 
 Stem vuxr- 
 S.N.V. vté 
 G. vuktds 
 D.  vuxrt 
 A. voxra 
 P.N.V. vixres 
 G.  vuKtav 
 D.  vvét 
 
 A. vt«tas 
 
 Cf. 127-132. 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 LINGUAL 
 
 éXtis, 1, hope. 
 Stem eA.d- 
 
 éXtrls 
 éX1rldSos 
 éXmrlBu 
 édrrlda 
 éArrl 
 éX1ridSes 
 éXTrid8ev 
 
 éXtriot 
 éA1r (Sas 
 
 apxav, 0, ruler, prince. 
 
 Stem apxort- 
 
 apXov 
 apXovTos 
 
 ww 
 
 apXovTe 
 apXovTa 
 apXovrTes 
 apxdvTev 
 apxovert 
 apXovTas 
 
NOUNS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 149 
 
 § 29. Neurer Nouns or THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 STEMS IN -ar. Cf. 106. 
 cdpa, 76, Jody. 
 
 Stem owuar- 
 
 S.N.A.V. capa _P.N.A.V. copara 
 G. ceparos G. cwopartev 
 D. copate D. copacr 
 
 Ovopa, TO, 2a/1E. 
 
 Stem ovouar- 
 
 S.N.A.V. dvopa P.N.A.V. ovépara 
 G. ovdparos G. ovopdatev 
 D. ovépare D. ovépace 
 
 § 30. Neurer Nouns or THE Tuirp DECLENSION. 
 STEMS IN -eo. Cf. 135. 
 
 yévos, T6, race. 
 
 Stem yeveo- 
 S.N.A.V. yévos P.N.A.V. yévn (yevea) 
 G. yévous (yeveos) G. yevdv (yevewv) 
 D. yéve D. yéveor 
 
 § 31. Srems IN -. AND -ev. THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 modus, 4, cety. Cf. 112. 
 
 Stem 7roX- 
 
 S.N. amddus P.N.V. éAets 
 G. mddews G. modeov 
 D. wmode D. wédAeor 
 A. éA.Ww A. éXeus 
 V. wor 
 
150 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Bactrets, 6, k77¢. 
 
 Stem Bacidev- 
 
 S.N. Bacvreds P.N.A.V. Bacrrets 
 G. Bacrtréws G. Bacréov 
 D. Baorr«Zt D. Bacrctor 
 A. Baciréa 
 V. Baotrcd 
 
 § 32. Liguip SreMs oF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 alov, 0, age. nyepov, leader. 
 Stem awy- Stem 7yeuor- 
 S.N.V. alov =P. aidves S.N.V. ryepev P. yepoves 
 G. aldvos aidvey G. ryepsvos — Hyepovey 
 D. aiave aidcr D. ryepove TYEpOore 
 A. alava aladvas A. 1yepova nYEROvas 
 § 33. SYNCOPATED STEMS IN -ep-. 
 
 mathp, 6, father. Cf. 113. 
 Stem marep- 
 
 S.N. aarp P.N.V. aarépes 
 G. ‘martpds (7raT€pos) G. mTatépwv 
 D. warpt (zarépt) D. warpdaot 
 A. tatépa A. tartépas 
 V. wartep 
 
 avqp, 6, wan. Cf. 114. 
 Stem avep- 
 
 S.N. dvip P.N.V. dvSpes (avépes) 
 G. dv8pds (avepos) G. avipdv (avepwv) 
 D. dvbpi (avépr) D. dvSpacr 
 A. avSpa (avepa) A. dv8pas (dvépas) 
 V. dvep 
 
ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. I 51 
 
 a. pytnp, mother, Ovyarnp, daughter, and yaorip, belly, 
 are nouns declined the same as TATyp. 
 
 § 34. The following are nouns of the third 
 declension that have irregularities of form or 
 accent. Only forms of the New Testament are 
 here given. 
 
 yovu, T6, kuee. Plur. yévara, yovarwv, yovacr. 
 
 yer}, 1, woman, yvvarkds, yuvaikt, yuvatka, yovor. Plur. 
 yuvaikes, yuvarkdv, yuvartl, yuvaikas. 
 
 Opié, 4, Zaz, tplxa. Plur. tplxes, tprxav, Oprki, tplxas. 
 
 kvov, dog. Plur. kbves, koi, kivas. 
 
 ovs, 76, car. Plur. @ra, aot. | 
 
 tovs, 0, foot, 7o8ds, woSt, wéSa. Plur. wé8es, woSav, root, 
 wodas. 
 
 UEwp, 76, water, Waros, VSaTt. Plur. vara, V8drov, Vacr. 
 
 xelp, 9, Zand, xeupds, xerpl, xetpa. Plur. xetpes, xeupav, 
 Xepol, xetpas. 
 
 § 35. ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT DECLENSION. 
 
 STEMS IN -eo- STEMS IN -p- 
 
 GAyOHs, fru. 
 Stem adynec- 
 
 adpov, foolish. 
 Stem adpop- 
 
 S.N. éAnOAs adndés adpwv adpov 
 G. dAnBots ad povos 
 D. det adbpove 
 A. adnO4 &AnbEs adpova adpor 
 V. dn Q€s adpov 
 P.N.V. dAnets adn OF adpoves adpova 
 OF dAnPav appdvev 
 D. aAnPéor adpoct 
 A. dAnfets dA OA adpovas cipova 
 
152 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 36. IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES OF THE CONSONANT 
 DeEcLENSION. Cf. 164-165. 
 
 mas, all. péyas, creat. 
 Stem rapr- Stems peya-, ueyaNo- 
 S.N. ads Tard Wav péyas peydrn péya 
 G. wavtés wacns twavTéds peyadov peyddns peyadou 
 D. wavti waon mavTl peyddw peyddy peyaro 
 A. TavTa Tacav may péyav peyadnv péya 
 V. av TATd Wav peya. peyardn péya 
 P.N.V. wavres madcat mavTa peyddor peyddar peydda 
 G. ravtTev Tacav mavrav pcyddkov peyadhov peyahov 
 D. waot Tacos Tact peydAous peydAats peyddous 
 A. mavtas mécas wavTra  peyddovs peyddas peyada 
 modus, 712Ch, many. 
 Stems 7oXu-, toAXo- 
 
 S.N. odds modAh trodd P. moddot amoddal moda 
 G. toddot rodAfs troAdod TOAA@Y troAA@v troAA@v 
 D. wodkdX® trodkAq TroAAG tmodXots troAAais trodXois 
 A. wodtv modAhv odd ToAAovs Todds ToAAd 
 § 37. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Add -repos for the compar., and -raros for the superl. 
 
 lox upds, lox up6-repos,! (lox vpd-ratos), 
 SLY ONE. StYVOng-er. strong-est. 
 2. Add -wyv for the compar., and -toros for the super. 
 ToXvs, ahe-twv, ahe-toros, 
 much. more. most. 
 
 1 When the penultimate vowel is short, as in codpés, the o 
 is lengthened before -repos and -raros; e.g. copds, copwrepos 
 
 (copwratos). Cf. 225. 
 
CARDINAL NUMERALS ; PRONOUNS. 153 
 
 
 
 
 
 § 38. IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 ayabds, cood Kpeloowv KpatTioTos 
 Kakos, dad Xelpov 
 Kahds, 200d KaAAlov 
 péyas, great pelLov péyto-ros } 
 piKpds, s7zall dcowy — €XaX LETS 
 mods, 721Ch telov aeto Tos 
 
 a. Comparatives in -wy are declined like dppwy, § 35. 
 
 § 39. CARDINAL NUMERALS. 
 eis, o7e. tpets, three. Téroapes, four. 
 N. eis pla év tpeis = tpla Téroapes Ttéccapa 
 G. évds pias évds TPLOV TETTAPOV 
 D. évi pid évi Tpicl TET T APL 
 A. €va plav év tTpeis tpia tércapas téccapa 
 
 a. The cardinal numerals from 4 to Ioo are indeclinable. 
 
 6. Ordinal numerals (ap@ros, etc.) in -os and -ou are 
 declined like adjectives in -os. 
 
 c. For the declension of otdeis (otd€, axd not, + eis, one), 
 see 221. 
 
 § 4u. Pronouns. Cf. 68 and 213. 
 
 éya, J. Personal. ov, you. 
 
 S.N. éyé S.N. of 
 
 G. p00, pov G. cod 
 
 D. pol, por D. got 
 
 A. épé, pe A. oé 
 P.N. pets, ewe P.N.  dpets 
 
 G. tpev G.  tpdav 
 
 D.  ypiv D.  vptv 
 
 A. mpds A. wpds 
 
 1 Occurs but once, 
 
154 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Reflexive. 
 euautod, mzyself. ceavtod, thyself. 
 
 S.G. €pavrot, -fs weavtod, -fs 
 D. €pavte, -F wEeavTH, -7 
 A. pavtov, -hv weauTov, -hv 
 
 P.G. jpav airav : UVpBaY adTav 
 D. piv adtrois, adtrais tptv adrots vpty adrats 
 A. 7pGs attots, airds teas aitovs wtyds aitds 
 
 éavtod, himself, herself, itself. 
 
 S.G. €avtod, -fs Ps EQUTaV 
 D. €avto, -F €avtois éavtais éavrois 
 A. éautév, -hv, -6 €avtots éavtds éavTa 
 § 41. luterrogative. Indefinite. 
 
 tls, who. tls, Some one. 
 
 S.N. tls ti P. tives tiva S.N. tls tl P. tives tid 
 G.  tivos tlywv TLOS TOV 
 Dy .rive Tio Til Tisl 
 A. tlva ti tlvas tiva Tia Th Tivds TLVG 
 
 a. Tis, some one, is an enclitic. Cf. 196-198. 
 
 § 42. The indefinite relative éatis (65, who, 
 and tis), whoever, has the following forms: 
 
 S.N. doris, WTIs, 6,7.  P.N. oirives, attives, dtiva. 
 § 43. PaRTICIPLES. 
 Avo, Loose. 
 
 Present Active. 
 
 S.N. Atvov Avovra Atov 
 G. Avovros Avotons AdvovTos 
 D. dAdvovte Avotioy AvovTt 
 A. dtovra \vovray Atov 
 
PARTICIPLES OF Avw. 155 
 
 P.N.V. Avovtes Atvovoat Atvovra 
 G. Avovrov Avove dv AuévTev 
 D. Avover Avotoats Avover 
 A. XAvovras Avotoas Avovra 
 
 a. For the pres. part. of eiuc, az, see 183 and 184. 
 
 Aorist Active. 
 
 S.N. Atoas Avoaca Atoav 
 G. XAtoavtos Avodons AvoavTos 
 D. Aboavti Avedon Avoavre 
 A. XAbocavra Atoacayv Atoayv 
 P.N.V. Atoavres Atoacar Atboavra 
 G. Avoedvrov Avcacav Ave avTey 
 D. YAtoacr Ave dcats Atoact 
 A. YAtboavras Avedoas Aicavra 
 Perfect Active. 
 S.N. AeAvKds AeAvKVia AeAUKOS 
 G. XeAuKSTOS AeAvKulas \eAUKOTOS 
 D. dedAvKéti AeAvKvia. AeAuKOTL 
 A. XedAvKOTa AeAuKuiay AeAUKOS 
 P.N.V. XedAuKétTes AcAvKviat AcAuKOTA 
 G. XeAuKOTeV AcAvKULOV AeAUKOTAV 
 D. Aedvedor AeAvKvlats AeAvKOoL 
 A. XeAvKOTas AeAuKulas AeAUKOTA 
 
 6. So likewise the 2 perf. act.; as éords, éorvia, éards, 
 standing, from torn, Co make stand. 
 
 Aorist Passive. 
 
 S.N. AvBets AvOetora Avdev 
 G. Avbévros Avdetons Avvévros 
 D. AvOévre Avdeloy Avdévre 
 is 
 
 Avbév Avbeio-ay Avbey 
 
156 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 P.N.V. AvOé€vrtes Avbetoar Avbévra 
 G. dAvévrov Avbero dv AvvévTwv 
 D. AvOetor Avbeioats Avbeior 
 A. Avbévras Avbeloas Avbévra 
 
 c. So likewise the 2 aor. pass.; as omape’s, orapeica, 
 orapev, from oreipw, sow. 
 
 § 44. Participles in -ewy and -awy contract as 
 follows : 
 
 Aar€wv 1 Ladéovra Aahéov, speaking 
 become Aadév Aadotoa Aadotv 
 
 Aadotyros Aahovons AadodvtTos 
 
 fawv 2 {aovca taov, Living 
 become {év {aca Lav 
 
 {Lavtos toons {avtTos 
 
 § 45. Seconp Aorist PARTICIPLES OF IRREGULAR 
 VERBS. 
 
 SiSwpr. — Sots, ovving. Baive. — Bas, going. 
 S.N. S0is Sotca Sv S.N. Bas Baca. Bav 
 G. 8dvros Sovcns S6vtos = G. Bavros Baons  Pdvros 
 ere. etc. 
 a. So the pres. part. 880%s. 
 
 riOnpr. —Oels, lacing. wintw.—trerav, falling. 
 S.N. Beis Oetora Bev S.N. werdv mecotca trecdy 
 G. B€évros Belons PévTos G. mrexdvTos tmerovans merdvTos 
 etc. etc. 
 6. So the pres. part. rvBels. ¢. So all 2 aor. ptcs. in -év. 
 
 1 See §§ 5, 8; 8, 4. 2 See §§ 5, 1, 2; 8, 3. 
 
THE VERB. 157 
 
 - ° O ° 
 lornpr. — otras, Standing. yiwaokw. — yvots, krowZng. 
 S.N.oras otdoa ordv S.N. yvots yvotoa (yvdv) 
 G. ordvtos oraons otavtos G. yvdvTos yvovons yvovTos 
 etc. etc. 
 
 § 46. All participles in -wevos are declined 
 like xaXdos, § 25. 
 
 THE VERB. 
 Voice. 
 
 Si4(m bhere are: tutee voicessin, Greek <sthe 
 active, middle, and passive. Of these the active 
 and passive are the same as the active and 
 passive in English. 
 
 The middle voice represents the subject as 
 acting upon itself or in some way that concerns 
 itself. 
 
 1. The Direct Middle where the subject acts 
 directly upon itself; ¢.g¢. Novw, J wash; Novopan, 
 I wash myself. 
 
 2. The Indirect Middle where the subject is 
 represented as acting in some way for itself ; 
 e.g. ayopatw, I buy, ayopafoua, [ buy for my- 
 self; vinta, I wash, virtopat Tas xetpas, [ wash 
 my own hands. 
 
 § 48. The uses of the middle voice are numer- 
 ous, and are best learned from the lexicon. 
 
158 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Often the sense of the verb changes in the 
 middle; e.g. weiOw, [ persuade; welOopat, I per- 
 suade myself, I obey. 
 
 Mood. 
 
 § 49. There are five moods in Greek: the In- 
 dicative, Subjunctive, Optative, Imperative, and 
 Infinitive. The Indicative, Imperative, and In- 
 finitive correspond very closely to the same 
 moods in English. The Subjunctive is most 
 often translated by the English fotential. The 
 principal uses of the Subjunctive are explained 
 in 87, 95-97, 158. See also under Syntax. 
 
 The Optative mood is rare in the New Testa- 
 ment, and hence is not given with the para- 
 digms. For the forms that occur and the uses 
 of the same, see § 70 and § 71. 
 
 Tense. 
 
 § 50. The tenses of the Indicative mood are 
 seven. The present and zmperfect denote con- 
 tinued or repeated action; the aorzst and future 
 denote an indefinite action; the perfect, pluper- 
 fect, and future perfect denote completed action. 
 
 §51. The tenses of the subjunctive are the 
 present, aorist, and perfect; the latter is very rare 
 in the New Testament. 
 
THE VERB. 159 
 
 § 52. The tenses of the Indicative are distin- 
 guished as primary and secondary. 
 
 PRIMARY: = Present, future, perfect, future perfect. 
 SECONDARY: /wiperfect, aorist, pluperfect. - 
 
 § 53. The principal parts of a Greek verb are 
 the first person singular of the present, future, 
 (first or second) aorist, (first or second) perfect, 
 indicative active; the perfect middle, and the 
 first or second aorist passive ; e. g. 
 
 Avw, Atdow, é€Avoa, A€éAvKA, AeAupor, eAoOnv 
 Kplvw, KpivO, éxpiva, KéxpiKa, Kekptar, éxplOnv 
 
 § 54. There is no difference in meaning nor 
 in translation between a first aorist and a second 
 aorist, between a first perfect and a second 
 perfect. 
 
 $55. The tenses of the verb are divided into 
 nine classes or tense systems, each having a 
 distinct tense stem. 
 
 . Present including present and wiper fect. 
 
 . Future “future active and middle. 
 
 . first aorist “ — first aorist active and middle. 
 
 . Second aorist “ second aorist active and middle. 
 
 _ first perfect “ first perfect and pluperfect active. 
 
 . Second perfect “ second perfect and pluperfect active. 
 
 . Perfect middle“ perfect and pluperfect middle and 
 passive and future perfect. 
 
 . first passive “ first aorist and future passive. 
 
 . Second passive“ second aorist and future passive. 
 
 WO co N AWM BW DN 
 
160 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 56. 1. ACTIVE VOICE OF dive. 
 Present. Imperfect. Future. 
 INDICATIVE. I. Avo éXvov iow 
 S. 4 2. Aves éAves —— NDoeLS 
 3. Aver eAve voee 
 [ I. AVopev éXvopev vcopev 
 ite 2. vere évere cere 
 | 3. Avovar éXvov Avrovet — 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. | I. Avo 
 S. 4 2. Adys 
 3. Avy 
 I. Avopev 
 P. 4 2. Avnre 
 3. Avoor 
 IMPERATIVE. s, | 2: Abe 
 "| 3. Avéro 
 2. AVETE 
 P. 4 3. Avévrev or 
 Avérooav 
 INFINITIVE. Aveuv More 
 PARTICIPLE. Atav, Nicov, 
 Atovra, - AVorovca, 
 
 Atov (§ 43) Adcoov 
 
INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 ” 
 
 S: 
 
 IMPERATIVE. S 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE OF Avo. 
 
 161 
 
 I Aorist. Lier ject. 1 Pluperf. 
 [ t. ed\voea ALUKA (€)AeATKeELV 
 / 2. €Xvoas AéAUKAS (€)AeAUKeLS 
 a edvoe héXuKe (€)AeADKEL 
 I. &Lvoapev AeAtKapey (€ )AEADKEL- 
 pev 
 } 2: éXvoare AeAVKaTe  (€)AcAUKEL- 
 ; TE 
 ee éX\voav AeAVKaor  (€)AEAUKEL 
 or -kav cay 
 I. \vrw [AeAUK@ 
 2. Avoys AeAYKYS 
 | 3. Avoy AcADKY 
 | I. Avowpev AehdKopev 
 2. AvoHTE Ach vKyTE 
 | 3. Avowor edKoot] 
 [ 2. Atoov [A€AuKeE 
 | 3. Avodart AehuKéro 
 (2. Nurare AeAvKere 
 3. Avodvrev or 
 [ Avedtacav edvKéTorav] 
 Atorat AeAvKEevat 
 AVeas, AeAvKebS, 
 AVoaca, AeAvKvia, 
 
 Atoav ($43) DAeduKds (§ 48) 
 
162 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEk. 
 
 2. MIDDLE VOICE OF Avo. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Future. 
 [NDICATIVE. | T. Avopar éLvopny Avoopar 
 S. 4 2. Noy, Aver éX\vov voy, Avoret 
 L 3. Averar éXveTO Avoerar 
 | I. Avopeba €Avopeda Avodpeba 
 P. | 2. Aver Oe evec be vorer Ge 
 3. AVovTaL éX\vovTo Avoovras 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. I. Avopar 
 2. dvy 
 3. AvHTaL 
 
 ( 
 Sal 
 ies Avaopeda 
 P. / 2. Adobe 
 Ls. 
 
 + 
 AvovTaL 
 
 IMPERATIVE. S (2. Avov 
 3. Avér Ow 
 
 2. Aver Ge 
 P. { 3. Avér8wv or 
 Avéc8woav 
 
 INFINITIVE. Aver Oar Atoeor Par 
 DARTICIPLE. Avdpevos, \vodpevos, 
 
 Avopevn, -y; -OVv 
 AVSpevov (§ 46) (§ 46) 
 
INDICATIVE. 
 J 
 | 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. /[ 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 2. 
 sf 
 
 MIDDLE VOICE OF Avo. 163 
 I Aorist. Perfect. Pluperf. 
 . Xvodpnv éAvpaL, éLeXDp nv 
 . vow AeAvora éhéXvo-0 
 . voato AéAvTAY éXéXuTO 
 » Avodpeba AceAdpela EherATpEBe 
 . Avoacbe AéAvO-Ge éhédvuo Ge 
 . &X\voavTo AeAvvTar éXéXuvTo 
 » AVowpar AeAvpEvos w 
 . Noy AeAvpevos 1S 
 . Adonrar AeAvpLEvos 7 
 . Ave dpeba AeAvpévor Gpev 
 . Avono Ge AeAvpévor HTE 
 . AVrovrat AeAvpEvoL Wore 
 doar [A€Avero 
 3. Avedcbw AceAto Ow 
 . Avoacbe Avo Ge 
 . AvodoOwv or AcdAtoOwv or 
 Avedobwoav Achicbworav]} 
 Avoac Bat Aeddo Bar 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Avordpevos, -n, AeAupEvos, -1, 
 
 -ov (§ 46) 
 
 -ov ($ 46) 
 
164 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 3. PASSIVE VOICE OF Avo. 
 
 fut. Perf? 1 Aor I future} 
 
 INDICATIVE. I. [AcAvoopar  éAvOnv AvoAcopat 
 S.{ 2. Aedkvog,-cer EADONs AvOyoy, -cer 
 3. AeAvoerar e0On Avoqoerar 
 | I. AeAvodpeba eXVOnpev Avoynodpe8a 
 P.} 2. AedvoerOe eADONTE AvoAcer Ge 
 3. AcAvoovtTar] eAkvAncav  AvoAcovrar 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. Avbd 
 
 I 
 a AvOqs 
 3 Av0q 
 I. AvOdpev 
 ie pet Avo Are 
 a Avdaore 
 L 
 | 
 
 IMPERATIVE. s, {2 AVOnte 
 a. AvOqTe 
 2 MONTE 
 s Avbévrwv or 
 
 AvOqTecav 
 INFINITIVE. AeAboer Bar Avdjvar AvoAcer bax 
 
 PARTICIPLE. AcAvordpevos, Avdels, AvOnodpevos, 
 1, -Ov Avbeiora, -1), -Ov 
 
 (§ 46) Avdev ($43) (§ 46) 
 
 1 All other tenses of the passive voice are the same in form 
 as the middle. 
 
SECOND AORIST, PERFECT, ETC., OF Air. 165 
 
 $57. Srconp Aorist (ACTIVE AND MIDDLE) AND 
 SECOND PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT OF hkeltro. 
 
 2 Aor. Act. 2 Aor. Mid. 2 Perf 2 Pluperf 
 INDICATIVE. 
 (I. €Autrov euro env AAoura ~=—S [ENA ary 
 S./ 2. dues éXltrou AéAoutras = ENA ars 
 | 3. €dutre éXlarero héXoutre éhedoltrer(v) 
 I. €Alrropev eAuré we8a AeAoltrapev éXeAolrrepev 
 P. 1 2. édtaere éX treo Oe NeAoltratre €NeAOltreTE 
 L 3. @durov éXltrovto AeAolitact  édeAolrrecav, 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 (I. Altra Altrapar [AeAoltrw 
 S. 2. Alarys Alay AeAolmrys 
 3. Alwry Alarnrat AeAolrry 
 (I. Altropeyv Avie pela AeAolrapev 
 P. | 2. Ntiwnre Alaryno Ge AceAolanre 
 L 3. Alarwort Alrrovrar Aedoltroct | 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 5, {2 Altre Autrod [ AéAourre 
 "| 3. Auréro Autréc Bw AeAouTrérw 
 (2. Alcrete _ Altrec Ve AeAoltreTe 
 P./ 3. Aurévrov or AurérPwv or AeAouréroorav] 
 Aurétocav dArrécOwcav 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Aurretv Aurréo Bat [AeAourrévar | 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 Aurrev, Aurépevos, -n, AeAoutreds, 
 Autrotoa, -ov (§ 46) Aeourrvta, 
 
 Aumdy (§ 45, c) -w6s (§ 43) 
 
166 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 58. FUTURE AND FIRST AORIST ACTIVE AND MIDDLE 
 (LiguID FORMS) AND SECOND AORIST AND 
 SECOND FUTURE PASSIVE OF ¢atve. 
 
 ful. Ac. 
 
 I. dave 
 5. 2. daveis 
 | 3. pavet 
 
 I. havotpev 
 P./ 2. haveire 
 
 | 
 
 | 3- pavotor 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. [ I. 
 se a 
 
 & 
 Ie 
 Pe 2; 
 L 3: 
 IMPERATIVE. s, { 2: 
 3: 
 ze 
 Pia: 
 (NFINITIVE, davety 
 PARTICIPLE. davdv, 
 davoica, 
 davoty 
 (§ 44) 
 
 Fut. Mid. 
 
 pavodtpar 
 davet, dav 
 daveirar 
 havovpeba 
 daveio Ge 
 pavotyrar 
 
 daveto bar 
 
 davovpevos, 
 
 ya eames 
 
 ($ 46) 
 
 1 Aor. Act. 
 
 éedyva 
 éedynvas 
 ednve 
 edt vapev 
 eprvare 
 Edyvav 
 
 djve 
 barns 
 Paya 
 djVvopev 
 bjvyre 
 diyvect 
 
 dijvov 
 dnvarw 
 bivate 
 
 dynvavrev or 
 dynvatocay 
 
 pivar 
 divas, 
 ojvaca, 
 
 divav 
 
 (§ 48) 
 
FULURES AND AORISTS OF ¢aivw. 
 
 167 
 
 VAC. Wid. “2, Aor. Pass. 2L/0b Lass. 
 INDICATIVE. I. ébnvapny éhdvyv davycopar 
 S.4 2. ébyve ehayvns pavyce, -o7 
 i éptjvaro ehavy davyioerar 
 [ I. Epyvapeda éhavynpev cavynodpeba 
 Le 2. éprvacbe éehavyte  havycec be 
 | 3. €bhvavto éhavycav davycovrat 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. I. Phvopar have 
 S.4 2. oqvy davis 
 (3. dhynrar davyj 
 (I. hyvdpeba davaepwev 
 P. + 2. pyvynobe pavite 
 3. Pyvevrar pavace 
 IMPERATIVE. 5 {2 bivar pavybe 
 3. dynvacbw davyto 
 (2. divacbe pavyre 
 P. { 3. dyvac8wv or davévtwv or 
 myvac8wrav davytacav 
 INFINITIVE. bjvacbar davqvar havycerOar 
 PARTICIPLE. byvapevos, davels,  chavyocpevos, 
 1, -OV davetoa,  -y, -oVv 
 (§ 46) davev (§ 46) 
 
 (§ 43, c) 
 
168 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 IGYU 
 Sioylig 
 
 oylg 
 
 1.0200\lg 
 aLaoylg 
 Aasriaoylig 
 yoylig 
 Sioylig 
 oylig 
 
 (“oylig) 
 (sloylig) 
 (moylig) 
 
 (,0n00yiQ ) 
 (2490yL@) 
 (ast/ooyig) 
 
 (20ylk) 
 (s290\iQ ) 
 (moylig) 
 
 Lyip 
 Sly 
 oy 
 
 (lay) 
 (sliayip ) 
 (my) 
 
 *H2UIUNLQNGS JuUdSIAT 
 
 1.0L0\Ip 
 3La3zyIp 
 asnaoyid 
 
 ayid 
 
 S23YIh 
 OV 
 
 (2.0203\1 ) 
 ( 3L339\ Ip ) 
 (43r02\1p ) 
 (192\1 ) 
 (si92\1) 
 (mv ) 
 
 "WL1WIIPUT JUISA4Y 
 
 "AAILOY 
 
 drat 
 sori 
 ons 
 
 ~ = 
 
 r1oonhe 
 ston. 
 Asdoris 
 
 brie 
 
 sdrie 
 oie 
 
 (linrht) -€ } 
 (sliorhs) +z 
 (mors) “1 
 
 (ana0nriL) °€ ] 
 (s199N1L) +z + * 
 
 (aavloprht) +1 | 
 
 (axnr12) °€ 
 | 
 
 (sprit) -z fs 
 (mp1) *1 | 
 
 fal 
 
 : payopur snyy oie Ysafzuvue “(-oylug) Moyle pue 
 ‘B20; “(-32XKIP) MIXIP “ouoy ‘(-vTIL) OTL JO SaSsUd} dSdU J. 
 
 ‘yoojsod ut 
 
 pue juasaid oy} Ul payoeij]U0D oe M0 pue ‘w> ‘oo Ut saIoA ‘EG § 
 
 “SdYaA LOVYLNO’) 
 
169 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 aoy lige 
 Saoy lige 
 Anoy lige 
 
 amylig 
 
 Agoylg 
 
 AvOMLAo\ylig 
 10 
 AmLAno\ylig 
 aLaoylig 
 mLaoylg 
 aovlig 
 
 r0V\lig 
 aio lig 
 Arm ylig 
 
 (20493) 
 ( s30yliQ3 ) 
 (200y 492) 
 
 (amoyg) 
 
 (a1320\LQ ) 
 
 (4n00.130\Ui9 
 
 10 
 Am1LAo0y lig ) 
 
 Rees) 
 (mapoylig) 
 (20Vhg) 
 
 (,0moylie) 
 Cee eg 
 ( arrlmoyle ) 
 
 9X)? (32V7P?) 
 
 Sy? (S297?) 
 
 anoyy2 = (409? ) 
 9afsaGuy 
 
 agoyrp (4m2\1p ) 
 
 eet 
 Sorli19 
 Aon113 
 ‘ 7 
 
 Aon. 
 
 ‘(pp § 998) yG2I27,40q yuasatd 
 
 Apyid (4193Y1 ) 
 ‘anigwuUyuy guasadg 
 
 Avoid (Av0M13939\IP 
 
 IO 10 
 AmLAnOYIp AMLA02V1) 
 IL13VYyIp (2139\71p ) 
 OLY (m133\71p ) 
 VIP (22V/P) 
 
 ‘aLUypDOAIG~Uly JuasSadd] 
 
 10M YI (.0mayip) 
 atlyid (ethayip) 
 aaoyip  (aarlmvip) 
 
 aon. 
 
 Anoop nis 
 10 
 AMLAg IL 
 
 aLonie 
 oun, 
 one 
 
 1.0071. 
 aLoTiL 
 asnoris 
 
 (907/2 113) FoF 
 (s>01/ 113) °Z 
 (Aonrl 113) I 
 
 (amp) 
 
 (4190721) 
 
 oii se 
 
 Rare 
 
 (9230712) 7, | 
 (msa0M12) °€ 
 
 (aompi1) - 
 ( atlivrlt) 
 
 } 
 | 
 \ 
 J 
 
 ef 
 
 | 
 
 a 
 
 (aarloprae) *1 
 
 Gury2) zJ 8 
 
NTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 = 
 4 
 vy 
 
 ESSE 
 
 170 
 
 warmyug  (imtAmoyke) 
 39Dmylig (epnloylie) 
 ngrtimylig (cprrlmoylie) 
 imim\lig (m2hoylig) 
 yoylig (“oye ) 
 rvrlm yg (ivrlmoylig) 
 wiraoylig (1900 lig) 
 39-0n0ylig (29.090YLiQ) 
 wgrtgoylg (ngsr/ooylig) 
 wLAoylig (1130VliQ) 
 yoylig (ioylig a20\e) 
 wnaoyle (10700) 
 anoylig? © (aooyligs) 
 2LA0ylgs (31390VliQ9) 
 Astaoyligs (431lo0ylig>) 
 
 WLAMYIp  (MLAM>2VIp) 
 39olyip  (390liayid ) 
 nerroyip (vg2ImM2\1P) 
 wmilyid (roLk2yi) 
 Lyi (“ayip) 
 wieyip  (rnrImay7p) 
 "91 IUNQNS Juasahf 
 wiaaoyip — (1N.LA09V1 ) 
 90BYIP  —(99.:099VI) ) 
 vestaoyip (npar/0xyip) 
 MLIIVIP (10433\7 ) 
 
 Lid aayid (liayip aay) 
 
 iriaoyid (1nl02\1 ) 
 
 "WLUOIPUT JUISIAT 
 
 “ATACIW GNV HAISSV G 
 
 anoyjg2 = (40373) 
 32913 (2139y7p2) 
 aadaoyih? — (437/091) 
 
 WiAoML, (MLAMDIL) °f | 
 spore (2p0livr2) Z | 
 wgeriothe (npsrmnnr2) °j | 
 woth, (slr) °€ | 
 brie (lions) +z 
 rotors (vorlm vrs) ry 
 voLiwtia (12400712) *€ ) 
 sgnnmi, = (99.0907/1L) *Z L 
 verdors. (nperlowrit) *1 | 
 wore (roL30V1L) °€ 
 brie (inns aavrliz) +z | 
 were (arovrt) +] | 
 Aone, (4ovr149) °€ 
 
 320112 (22901119) +z 
 astomity (asrov119) +7 | 
 
 
 
O1dnoylige (o1s00ylig> ) oLanoyis (0.10913 ) oLamrit, (01007113) e | 
 
 3g0noylge (99.090 Lie>) sgorVIh2 «= (39.099V71P>) sgovrisg § (99.0907119) *Z +g 
 neetaoylgs (vpsrlooylies)  wgrtaoyid? (vgrrosyip2) — gari—prir4g (wgrvovrts) *1 | 
 
 171 
 
 
 
 oL1noyligs (0130Y4Q>) oL3aYi9 (0133913 ) ovo. (orapri13) *€ | 
 aoylge = (aooyliga) gore (209713) ody = (noprht?) *z 5S 
 Alrigoylgs (alirlooylig>) — alurigoyr? = (alirloayi? ) Auroriisg (abrloorhs) +1 j 
 p9afraguey 
 
 Soastinoylig (soasriooy ig) Soaatinoyid (soastioayip ) soasdothas (soasvlows) 
 mgimjlvd puasadd 
 
 wgonoylg  (109.030ViQ) meoByip  (7109.093\7 ) wgonth,  (17p9.090T/72) 
 “a2IygwUyuy yuasadg 
 
 CONTRACT VERBS. 
 
 amponoyug  (Ampo0s0ylig Amgopyip (Amp0ryIp = amgonTlra (Amp.0>011i2 
 10 10 iO 10 10 IO 
 anomgonoylg An0mp.0z0ylig) avomgop ip A009 0291p) AvOMgoODTIL ADOMB020MIL) “f° +g 
 sgoaoylg (39.0309) govyid = (99.0927) sgnnrit = (99.0907/L) *z | 
 @gonoylg  (mp0z0\liQ) agopyip  (M9.929VI) mgopti,  (Mg0>0rNIL) “f) 
 goylig (acy) aoyid (aor ) connie (aoprhs) -z) © 
 *anipposaguly quasarg 
 
172 
 
 2 Aor. 
 
 Pres. and Impf. 
 
 ere OT 
 
 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 
 
 § 60. Verbs in we differ from verbs in w in 
 the Present and Second Aorist Systems only. 
 See Lessons XXXI. and XXXII. 
 
 § 61. Synopsis of fornpt, TiOnus, and SiSapi, 
 in the Present and Second Aorist Systems. 
 
 L[nadic. 
 lornpe 
 
 torny 
 
 TlOnpe 
 
 ér(Onv 
 
 S(Sapu 
 
 ” 
 
 edlSouv 
 
 eoTHy 
 
  ( iorapae 
 
 
 
 
 
 a, 
 & torauny 
 rg | Tenor 
 
 = > D 
 
 a er Oéuny 
 y | Si8opnar 
 
 a €5.86pny 
 che | @éunv 
 Q = | ed6pnnVv 
 
 Sub). 
 
 ict® 
 TL00 
 
 $18 
 
 oTe 
 6a 
 $a 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 Lmper. 
 torn 
 
 TiPer 
 
 S(dSov 
 
 ore 
 Bés 
 S65 
 
 Lnjin. 
 
 € , 
 iorava. 
 TiBévar 
 
 Sr86vat 
 
 oTThVat 
 Octvat 
 Sovvat 
 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 
 io T@par 
 TIWOGpar 
 
 SSap.ar 
 
 OGpar 
 Sapar 
 
 ictaco 
 
 Ti8eco 
 
 Sidoco 
 
 
 
 toracbar 
 
 Tiber bar 
 
 8800 6a 
 
 
 
 Béo Bar 
 
 SocBar 
 
 Fart. 
 
 ioras 
 TiBels 
 
 Sid0%s 
 
 oTas 
 
 Beis 
 
 Sovs 
 
 e lA 
 ioTapevos 
 
 TWEWLEVOS 
 
 8186 evoc 
 
 
 
 Bénevos 
 Sd6pevos 
 
§ 62. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 
 
 PRESENT SYSTEM. 
 
 » torn 
 . lorns 
 . lornoe 
 I. torapev 
 Plur. 3 2. 
 3 
 
 . toract 
 
 lorarte 
 
 [ I. loryny 
 Sing. 1 2, 
 | 3. tory 
 
 lorns 
 
 . lordpev 
 . orate 
 . toracav 
 
 I. tore 
 Sing. 2: 
 2 
 
 . tora 
 
 ec Ca 
 LOTS 
 
 | I. tordpev 
 Plar3.2; 
 3 
 
 . toraoe 
 
 iorHTe 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present Indicative. 
 
 TlOnpe 
 +TlOns 
 TlOnoe 
 
 7 Oenev 
 +(Oere 
 Tibéact 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 érlOnv 
 ér Bes 
 ériBer 
 
 érlOenev 
 > , 
 éeriOere 
 éribeoav 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 
 TiOd 
 TOs 
 T.On 
 
 TUWGpev 
 TiOnTeE 
 
 TiQact 
 
 173 
 
 S(Sap- 
 Sides 
 
 Sidoct 
 
 SiSopev 
 Sidore 
 
 Si8dacr 
 
 edlSouv 
 é5(S0us 
 é(S0u 
 
 e5(Sopev 
 ed5idSore 
 @i8ocav 
 
 $184 
 S805 
 S180 
 
 S.SGpev 
 S.sare 
 
 Si8act 
 
174 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Present Imperative. 
 
 . (2. tory TBer Sidou 
 Sing. ) , , 
 | 3. toratre TiWéTo Sidote 
 | 2. lorate T(Bere S(Sore 
 Plur. 3. tordvrey or TWévTwyv or S.86vTev or 
 L tordtecav TWéTor av S.86Twcay 
 Present Infinitive. 
 ioravar Tiévar Sr8dvar 
 Present Participle (§ 45). 
 torus TBels Sd0vs 
 PASSIVE AND MIDDLE. 
 Present Indicative. 
 | I. torapar Tear SiSopnar 
 Sing. } 2. teracat TiBerar SiSocar 
 3. lorarar TiBerar SiSorar 
 (1. tordpeba TiOéne8a 8.86.00 
 Plur. { 2. torace TiBer Be dido00Ge 
 | 3- toravrar TiOevrar SiSovrar 
 Lmperfect. 
 I. lorapny eriBéuny eS pv 
 Sing. | 2. tcraco érlBeco €S(8000 
 3. terato ér Beto €8(S0To 
 
| [. 
 Patty 4.2. 
 L 3. 
 
 Sin 
 
 gg 
 
 eT a 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. | 
 
 Plur. 
 
 —S 
 
 OQ NO = 
 
 WN 
 
 2 
 
 Oe N WwW 
 
 CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 
 
 C , 
 toTrapeba 
 eo 
 
 iorac Qe 
 
 toravTo 
 
 Present Subjunctive. 
 
 . LoTowar 
 . org 
 . lorATar 
 
 . toraneda 
 
 e a 
 . totnobe 
 
 . totovTat 
 
 Present 
 
 loTraco 
 4 , 
 ioracw 
 
 . toracbe 
 
 . totacwy or 
 
 c , 
 toracQwcav 
 
 TO aor 
 T.OH 
 TiOnTar 
 
 TW ampe0a 
 TiOno Ve 
 TWovTar 
 
 Lm perative. 
 
 TiVero 
 
 Ti0éc Bw 
 
 7T(Ber Be 
 TiécOwv or 
 TWWéc Bworav 
 
 Present Lnfinitive. 
 
 toracbat 
 
 Present Participle (§ 46). 
 
 ioTapevos 
 
 TBer Bar 
 
 TBEnevos 
 
 a 
 
 €5r56 e800 
 €5(S00-0e 
 é5(SovTo 
 
 SS apa 
 S180 
 
 SiSarar 
 
 S.SHpc8a 
 S800 8 
 
 SidavTar 
 
 d(80c0 
 
 $1860 8a 
 
 d(500-be 
 $18608ev or 
 8.860 0wcav 
 
 SlSo0cAar . 
 
 SBdp.evos 
 
176 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 63. SECOND AORIST SYSTEM. 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 Second Aortst Indicative. 
 
 | I. ony €0nka 1 €5oxa 
 Sing. / 2. €orys €Onkas éSwkas 
 Ss erry eOnke eSwxe 
 I. €oTnpev eOHkapev eSoKapev 
 Plur. 4 2. €ornre eOqkate eSdkare 
 a eoTyncayv e8nkav éSwKav 
 Second Aorist Subjunctive. 
 Cr. ord Say ra) 
 Sing. 7 2. orqs Qqs 805 
 3. ory 07 o 
 (I, oTapev Qaopev Sapev 
 Plur. tpi orTire Ofre Sare 
 3. TTATL Vac Sact 
 Second Aorist Imperative. 
 : 2. orHOe és 86 
 Sing. Y, : : 
 3. oTHTH Sérw S6Tw 
 Zs TE Qێre d6Te 
 Blots on poe 
 3. oTHTacav Vérwoav Sotacav 
 or oTavTeV or Vévtwv or S6vTev 
 Second Aorist Infinitive. 
 oriva. Vetvar Sovvar 
 
 Second Aorist Farticiple. 
 cords (§ 45) Qels (§ 45) Sots (§ 45) 
 
 1 No 2 aor. ind. act. of ré@nuc and dldwue occurs —so the 
 I aor. in -ka is given. Cf. 285, 3, note. 
 
Sing. | : 
 
 . Béueba 
 
 Plur. 
 
 Sing. | 
 
 Plur. | 
 
 CONJUGATION OF pt VERBS. 
 
 Second Aorist Middle Indicative. 
 
 . €erbe 
 ” 
 . €VevTo 
 
 Second Aorist Middle Subjunctive. 
 . Oapar 
 
 04 
 . OFrat 
 
 . Odpe8a 
 
 . O08 
 . Gavrar 
 
 Second Aorist Middle 
 
 . Gov 
 
 . bér0w 
 
 2. Oéobe 
 
 3. Ber bworav 
 
 or 9écbwv 
 
 eSdpnv 
 éSo0u 
 €S0To 
 €S6pe00, 
 €500-0e€ 
 ” 
 €dSovTo 
 
 dovrar 
 
 Linperattve. 
 Sov 
 d600w 
 
 S6ae 
 S6c8wcav 
 or 86c8av 
 
 Second Aorist Middle [nfinitive. 
 
 Gér Bar 
 
 d600ar 
 
 Second Aorist Middle Participle. 
 
 Bénevos (§ 46) 
 
 N 
 
 Sdpevos (§ 46) 
 
 eh 
 
178 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE pt FORM. 
 
 § 64. The verbs efui, am, inus (compounded 
 with azo, ctv, ava, and xara), eit, go (only in 
 compounds), oida, know, pnt, say, are all irreg- 
 ular. 
 
 § 65. eit (stem eo-), a7. 
 PRESENT. 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. Imperative 
 [ IT. ety o 
 Sing.{ 2. ns tobe 
 3. . orl n ETT, TT 
 I. éopév ay.ev 
 Plur.; 2. éoré ne eore 
 ie 3. elo wort eotwoav 
 
 Infinitive. elvar 
 
 Participle. dv, ovva, ov; gen. dvtos, ovens, etc. (183). 
 
 IMPERFECT. FUTURE. 
 Indicative. Indicative. Infinitive. 
 | I. vy (qpnv)! Evopar ever Par 
 Sing.{ 2. ys (joba) eve, eon 
 t 3. WV eorar Participle. 
 | I. npev (qpeOa) érdpeba éo-djrevos 
 Plur. +33 nTe eve Oe 
 3. qWorav EvovTar 
 
 + Ch 18.0 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE pt FORM. 179 
 
 S$ 66. adinue (stem €-), revzzt. 
 The following forms of this verb occur in 
 the New Testament: 
 
 INDICATIVE ACTIVE. — (Pres. adeis, as though from adéw ) 
 Adina, adbiewev, Apiopev, adiere, aplovor. Imperf. 
 noe. Fut. dpfjow, adqoes, etc. Aor. apiKa, adfj- 
 Kas, etc. 
 
 INDICATIVE MID. AND PAss.— Pres. dplepor.! Fut. ade- 
 Ojropat. Perf. 3 per. plur.ddéovrar. Aor. pass. &béOnv. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE ACT.—2 aor. af, ddapev, abate. Pass. 
 Aor. &e0q. 
 
 IMPERATIVE ACT. — Pres. dptérw. 2 aor. des, dpere, 
 
 PARTICIPLE ACT. — 2 aor. adels, adévres. 
 
 INFINITIVE ACT. — Pres. ddvévar. 2 aor. act. adetvar. 
 
 
 
 a. In® compounds with ovv, the pres. ind. 3 per. plur. 
 has ovvidot, and ovviover. Subjv. cvvioot and 2 aor. 
 guvect, and with ava 2 aor. ave. Aor. pass. ind. dvéOn. 
 
 6. Pres. part. cvviets and ovviwv are found. The former 
 is more regular and occurs in cuviévros, ovvidyres. dvévres 
 2 aor. act. part. also occurs. 
 
 § 67. etut (stem t-), go. 
 But few forms of this verb occur, and always 
 in compounds. 
 
 INDICATIVE. — Pres. -taov.  Imperf. -qeu, -yeoav. 
 INFINITIVE. — -lévan. 
 PARTICIPLE. — -lév, -mtoa, -idv, regular like dv, otea, 
 ov (183). 
 
 1 Conjugated like the mid. of ri@nu. 
 
 2 Such forms only are here given of the compounds of tinue 
 as might be difficult to recognize. The lexicon ought to be 
 consulted for all verb forms 
 
180 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 68. vila (stem 1-), now. 
 
 This verb is a second perfect and conjugated 
 regularly ofa, oidas, etc. The 3 per. plur. has 
 icact once. tote in 2 per. plur. is also found. 
 
 IMPERFECT. — 7Seuv,! qSets, etc. 
 
 FUTURE. — el8qoovet. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. — €160, elSdpev, eidfre. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. — tore, know ye (occurs once). 
 
 INFINITIVE. — el8évav. 
 PARTICIPLE. — elSds, elSvia, elds, like AeAuKds (§ 48). 
 
 § 69. ypl (stem ga-), say. 
 
 This verb is found in pres. ind. dni and 3 
 per. sing. and plur. dyot and gaci. Imperf. édy, 
 he sata. 
 
 § 70. The following forms of the optative 
 mood occur in the New Testament: 
 
 Tic Presented Cnse. 
 €xol, Jédor, Exovev, ely, Suvvaiunv, SvvatvTo, TAO XOLTE. 
 2. Furst Aorist. 
 mAEovdoal, TEpiacetoal, KaTevOtvat, moupoatey, Wyra- 
 pyoeiay, evgaiunv. 
 3. Second Aorist. 
 payor, TYXoL, dwn, EVpotev, dvaiunv, yévorto, Aa Bot. 
 4. Furst Aorist Passive. 
 TAnOvvOein, AoyiHecy. 
 
 1 In fact a 2 pluperf., but the perf. and pluperf. have in this 
 verb the sense of the pres. and imperf. 
 
OPTATIVE MOOD. TENSE SYSTEMS. 181 
 
 It may be noted (a) éyou, Oédor, duvatuny, Svvawvro, 7Ae€- 
 - ovacan, TEeplogevoat, KaTevOvvar, evEalunv, payor, TUXOL, 
 TacxorTe, dvalunv, yévorro, form the Optative by the ad- 
 dition oft, which, with preceding vowel, forms a diphthong ; 
 this diphthong is always long. (6) etn, rAnBuvOetn, Aoyt- 
 aGety form the Optative by adding ww; in the case of dd 
 the iota is subscript. (¢) €xouev, evporey, rroujoaev are 
 also made by adding ty, the in the third person plural 
 changing toe. (2) Wyradyjoeay differs from rouoaev 
 in that e and a have changed place. 
 
 § 71. The following examples will illustrate 
 the uses of the optative: 
 1. The Optative of Wishing. 
 Rom. 15:5. 6 de eds . . . Ody duty, now may God 
 grant unto you! 
 2. The Potential Optative. 
 Acts 26:29. eifaiunv av 76 Oe, J could wish to God. 
 3. Lndirect Question. 
 
 Luke 1:29. dtedoyitero rorards ely 6 domacpds ovTOS, 
 she was discussing what manner of salutation 
 this might be. 
 
 4. The Conditional Optative. 
 1 Cor. 14:10. ei rvxou, ef zt should chance. 
 
 TENSE SYSTEMS. 
 
 § 72. No one verb has all nine tense systems, 
 but the following table shows the various tenses 
 (as far as found in the New Testament) in Ava, 
 
182 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 loose, BarXw, cast, ypahbo, write, and Pbeipa, 
 destroy. 
 
 Present .... w%&- BarrA%- ypap%- pberp%- 
 Future .... dwo%- Bare%- ypab%- hbep%- 
 I Awrist. ... dAvea- ypaya- d0epa- 
 BOF ish ct she Bar %- 
 
 1 Perfect ... XedvKa- PBeBAnKa- 
 
 a EEL ACL Rs tio ke yeypada- 
 
 Perfect ( Perf.  dedv- BeBAn- yeypap- 
 Mid. | Fut. P. d\duve%- 
 
 ty ae eae Avbe(y)- PBAnde(n)- 
 Fut. pono %- BrnOno %- 
 
 | 
 
 SEP MOAaT ypade(n)- pbape(n )- 
 ‘ Fut. p8apno %- 
 § 73. PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
 Active. Middle and Passive. 
 Primary. Secondary. Primary. Secondary. 
 I. pe v pear nV 
 Oiie2.as3 (rt) s oat co 
 | seat, Te a TOL TO 
 [ I. pev BEV pela pela 
 | SP die bi TE oe oe 
 | 3. vou, aoe v, cay VT vTO 
 § 74. The personal endings of the imperative 
 rac Active. Middle and Passive. 
 | 2. O 2. TE as oo 2. oO 
 S./3. To P.;3. vrevor S.j 3.000 P.+ 3. cOwv or 
 { |  Tecav obwoay 
 
AUGMENT. 183 
 
 § 75. The endings of the infinitive are: 
 
 pele i ev, contracted with € to ew. 
 | var, evar. 
 
 Mid.and Pass. o®ar 
 
 § 76. The tenses of the indicative are formed 
 by adding to the verb theme, with certain modi- 
 fications, the following suffixes. 
 
 Pres. Fut. Aor. PAypeo0 LUpery. 
 
 Active: -%- -0 %- -oa- -Ka- -KEL- 
 
 Middle and Passive have the same suffixes 
 except in perf. and pluperf., where there is 
 none. The aorist passive has -@e- for I aorist 
 and -e- for 2 aorist. 
 
 AUGMENT. 
 
 § 77. 1. When the verb begins with a con- 
 sonant the vowel e is prefixed to the theme in 
 the imperfect and aorist; ¢.g. €Av-o-v, €-du-ca. 
 This is called syllabic augment. In the perfect 
 the initial consonant is placed before the aug- 
 ment; ¢.g. AéAv-«a. This is called reduplication. 
 In the pluperfect the reduplicated form may be 
 augmented ; ¢.g. é-Ae-AU-KEL-V. 
 
 2. When a verb begins with a vowel this 
 vowel is lengthened in all past tenses: a=%, 
 
184 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 €=n, o=o. Such an augment is called temporal 
 augment; eg. ayo, lead, ijyov; Epyouat, come, 
 npxKouny; axovw, hear, hxovoa. An initial diph- 
 thong may lengthen the first vowel; e.g. airéw, 
 ask for, ntnoa; vyoua, pray, nvyomny. 
 
 3. Verbs beginning with two consonants ora 
 double consonant (¢, &, yr) have the augment and 
 mo reduplication in the perfect and pluperfect. 
 A mute (§ 2) followed by a liquid X, yp, », p, is an 
 exception to this; ¢.g. cpive, judge, has perfect 
 Kéxpixa, and caréo, call, has perfect KéxdnKa. 
 
 4. Verbs beginning with a rough mute 4, y, 8, 
 have the corresponding smooth mute 7, «, 7, in 
 the reduplication; e.g. $iréw, love, we-hirn-xa ; 
 Oedopmat, behold, re-Oéa-wat. 
 
 THE EiGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 
 
 § 78. It is necessary in the study of the Greek 
 verb to determine the theme or root, for on this, 
 with certain modifications mostly of tense and 
 mood signs, the various tenses are built. This 
 theme may or may not correspond to the theme 
 as seen in the present indicative. More fre- 
 quently the present stem is a strengthened form 
 of the theme; ¢.g. Wa, Joose, has theme and 
 present stem Av- the same, while xrérTe@, steal, 
 theme x«der-, has present stem «Xerr-. Aap- 
 Bava, receive, theme XaB-, present stem Nap Bar-. 
 
THE EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 185 
 
 With reference to the relation of the theme 
 to the present stem the verbs in Greek are 
 divided into eight classes : 
 
 § 79. First CLass.—Verb stem remains un- 
 changed throughout. The present stem is formed 
 by adding simply the variable vowel % to the 
 theme : 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. 
 Aێyw, Say dey- rNey% 
 viKdw, comguer vika- yiKa% 
 
 § 80. SEconp Crass. — Strong vowel forms. 
 Some verbs have a theme ending in a mute, § 2, 
 preceded by a short vowel, principally «¢ or v. 
 The present theme of these verbs is formed by 
 lengthening this vowel, « to e, v to ev, and the 
 addition of % : 
 
 Theme. Pres, stem. Fut. 
 melOw, persuade  m6- me % Trea % 
 hevyw, fice vy- hevy% hevé% 
 
 § 81. Tuirp Crass. — Verbs in -rtw or the 
 T-class. Some verbs have the theme in a labial 
 mute z, 8, ¢, that form the present stem by 
 adding 7% to the theme: 
 
 Theme. Pres, stem, Bute. 9 
 KNérta, steal kXer- KAentT% = KxAeW% 
 Kpitre, Aide Kpug- Kputt% = kpup% 
 
 a. Kpvr-tw is for kpvd-re. 
 
186 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 § 82. FourtH C Lass. — Jota class. 
 
 I. Some verbs having a theme ending in a 
 palatal mute «, y, x, add « % to form the present 
 stem. This «% with the mute gives oo%, rarely 
 Ce. 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 
 Kynpicow, Preach  KypuK- Knpvao%  — knpvE% 
 maracow, smite  maray- mataco%  matag% 
 
 2. When 1% is added to a theme in 6- the 
 present stem ends in €%: 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 
 Bamrite, baptize Barrid- PBanril% Barric% 
 cwlw, save owo- Tvl % cw % 
 
 3. A theme in a liquid, X, pw, v, p, may add 6% 
 for the present. A% becomes AA% : 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. Fut. 
 
 ayyé\dw, announce ayyedX- — aryryeAX% ayyerc% — 
 Badrdrw, cast Bad- Barrx% Bare% 
 
 4. But with vy and p the « usually passes over 
 to the preceding vowel and with a or e forms a 
 diphthong : 
 
 Theme, Pres, stem, Fut. 
 alpw, take away —ap- aip% dpe% 
 haive, sow cav- paw % pave% 
 
THE EIGHT CLASSES OF VERBS. 187 
 
 § 83. Firra Criass. —n-class. The present 
 stem of some verbs is formed by adding v% to 
 the theme: 
 
 Theme, Pres, stem. 
 tive, drink Tt mriv% 
 
 1. The suffix may be -av%. 
 
 Theme. Pres, stem. 
 ¢ , ° ec e (0) 
 Gpaprave, 5272 o.papT- apaptav% 
 
 2. Under this class (1) come several verbs 
 that insert a nasal yp, v, y, before the final mute: 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. 
 AapPdave, rece’ve Aa f3- Aap Bav% 
 tvyx ave, happen TUX- Tuyxav% 
 
 3. The suffix may be -vusgu, after a vowel 
 -VVUMLL. 
 
 Theme. Pres. ind. 
 Selkvupi, show deuK- SecKVUpL 
 Lovvupe, o7rd Cw- Coovvupe 
 OpvuUpL, Swear op- (00) OpVUpL 
 
 § 84. Sixtu Ciass.—Verbs in -cxw, the tn- 
 ceptive class. A few verbs form their present 
 stem by adding ox% or iox% to the theme: 
 
 Theme. Pres. stem. 
 ywooke, know yvo- ywwok% 
 evpicke, find eup- evplak% 
 
188 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 85. SEVENTH CLASS. — ue added to simple 
 stem. This class includes most of the verbs of 
 the s-Conjugation, which form their present 
 and imperfect tenses zwzthout the use of %. 
 
 Theme, Pres. ind. 
 ternpt, make stand = ora- (-OT HAL 
 dypt, say pa- pyc 
 
 § 86. EigutnH CrLass.— Mixed class. Verbs 
 of this class are among the irregular verbs and 
 form different tenses on entirely distinct stems, 
 See the list of irregular verbs. 
 
 Themes, 
 éoOiw, cat echi- ay- 
 Opdw, see 6pa-  om- to 
 TPEXW, UN TpEX- Spap- 
 hépw, dear pep- Ol- — EVEK- 
 
 § 87. The following verbs may be classified 
 according to the principles laid down above. 
 
 dogalu, dKove, dAcihw, TUTTw, AavOdvn, xalpw, Kpalw, 
 orehiw, ViTTW, ApXojat, dyopale, dvotyu, TEOn pt, ddaoKw, 
 eyelpo, dyyehru, pbavw, Caw, amroKreiva, TPE, $eiBopua, 
 Exo, EpwTaw, Paryvopt, pavOaver, aepinp UTOTATTW, [LEVW, 
 Jedw, mouvOdvopat, KaTadyvupt, exreive, avgavw, aoOvncKw, 
 airéw, €vTéAAOpat, Sidwpu, ExKOTTW, ypadu. 
 
 § 88. The following table gives the principal 
 parts of the most common irregular verbs in the 
 New Testament. The aim is to give only such 
 forms as occur. A rare compound or a variant 
 reading may in some few cases present a form 
 that is not given. 
 
184 
 
 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 "40913 = 40Q19 20L3\)9 
 = ony? ‘S7 *% ‘lo’ ZT IY} OJ punoj usyo st v ‘low I oy} “Burpvor syIOF{ pue 309389 UY 7 
 
 Alipao WLAMIPD pulp mokono anissof ‘rdlado 
 Ce ee Pee moligyo as 471 ‘map 30 
 nord 0300 aspayg *».02d0 
 (z) Alrloyoup .03YOLD 
 (z) PYmYoup “DO3sXpup ‘myoup = Ao.agsap ‘“Mayyoun 
 alipavLy3uD 1DA19L49.LD AILMOLD ]2y ‘AI9LNOLD 
 aligXo3a0 n3m210 
 AligX male (z) vhm3ap ‘n3maal 
 aligXioale ‘o>10Ale 31000 uago ‘mAi0av 
 (‘y1ed) ‘marog 998 ‘marog/oad 
 soasrlonpull. aygop9 ‘laaariprlo 
 (2) Aosdonl 
 pulsdorlle ‘polsdorl lt oolsdorp urs ‘oanrdorln 
 Alig.onowl. (z) poxluwp poaowle .020¥D ADIY ‘ROMY 
 Aligdu rvorldle oad. volt dp Avarw aynz ‘ody 
 (Z) 40x | OV2- 
 aligrd li. WOR AEN) es Ge 2707000 1 
 AliyX te (z) aoknhle 30 poa ‘oko 
 ‘soy top *ssvq ‘fsa pp fred "78140 ‘ANIM "JUasadgd 
 
 "suIIOJ oY} Jaye (z) Butoejd Aq pajousp useq aavy sjoayiod 
 puoods pu” sjsiiov puosas ayy, ‘Aluo uoTysoduoo UI sind90 }T }eY} Sa}OUSpP WOJ B a1ojaq uay gly 
 
 ‘SdNaA UVINOANAT AO ATAVT, 
 
ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 190 
 
 aligaX339 vorlaX a> 
 
 aligdrh. vorldah lids 
 Aliglangs 
 den res 
 
 LEE MURR 
 Beer emo Ore 
 
 alighags 
 
 (1.1ed) $799X23Q 
 (z)akpodds rrlrindhad 
 aligomaks rorlomahs 
 alighashs rorlluarhoh 
 
 alighynog]» 
 alighyg reriliy 2g 
 
 "ssDq “AOP ‘ssod ‘fsa 
 
 omhrle 
 
 PHAR 
 
 (‘y1ed) $m»3999 
 
 ( z)opndhad 
 numaks 
 
 (z)vao0had 
 
 valiysog) 
 mil? 
 
 2p fred 
 
 et 
 
 ndr9Ale 
 nokrluu 
 
 0309? 
 DMQI 
 n.oligs 
 
 1001393 
 
 ntERT 
 oiprodda 
 
 (z) amaha 
 (z) alrloashs 
 
 (z) aoyng2 
 (z) alig}a- 
 
 "S140 
 
 m3Xm9> 
 
 vorlo.02 
 mdsha 
 monks 
 rorlooliang 
 
 M009 
 
 [ool | 
 
 (-ssed z) 
 rvorloolidng 
 
 372Q 
 opodd 
 vorloomah 
 rvorlooliasd 
 
 oye 
 ronlo.olig)- 
 
 "IANINT 
 
 ( ‘maaXm> 
 ANODE See ae 
 | SoaXn9 
 
 . é 
 anh gas ‘aoy9 
 wap ‘rir 
 Gn astvs dish 
 Avau ag ‘ozikhs 
 agp ‘rorlnang 
 UL29S ‘O3M0Q 
 
 / 
 7 ‘ 
 
 9218 ‘1VIMQI9 
 
 Pu1g *M3Q 
 
 ypaq ‘039 
 juvar ‘071039 
 a2oys ‘raaw13Q 
 agra ‘opndd 
 mouy ‘oromark 
 autojag vorloark 
 ysum ‘rorloyaog 
 aorsyy “oyyng 
 os ‘marg 
 
 "JUaIsatg 
 
Ig 
 
 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 aligid™ > vorhd3» D109 
 Alip.ovyn9 
 aligns ronlliya> oly 
 (29s 
 ‘alignnma- : 
 (-y1ed *jor) 
 Align.103 (z) Sm1.03 
 “onl.t.02 
 pwliag>. 
 (z) alpp.a 
 (xed) Soasrlom9- 
 pliX.o2 
 Alipsdas oulidas 
 (z) mgoyleye 
 ‘SSO0q ‘AOP "SSUq ‘fad 2K fred 
 
 vAid > 
 oo kk 
 rareye) 
 DY 
 pon 
 OADYM 9 
 
 (-afqng ) mapeda» 
 
 ‘noligdama 
 4 c 
 DOIYDMI 
 
 DOVDM a= 
 
 (nur) (z) alto» 
 ‘(suery ) nolto> 
 
 (z) AoAng?- 
 
 (z) a0pyle 
 
 "75140 7 
 
 maid» * 
 ~~ 
 
 MOND 
 mADQd>» 
 
 ‘moligda 
 
 030M 
 
 MDVD ~ 
 
 moo 
 rorlaoanp- 
 mokyrx9 
 
 0093 
 
 G23 
 
 moldas 
 ronlodn 
 
 vorlo.onay3> 
 4 c 
 
 *IANIN 
 
 adpnl ‘maidn 
 yvaAg “ODXm 
 Jaan ‘oroym 
 
 unos ‘mamgdam 
 ¢ 
 1102 "M2\0m 
 
 UANG ‘770 
 
 gas ‘rb107 
 aip ‘or.oliag 
 11102 SON?O 
 Ang ‘MLL 
 pais ‘rlaaamd 
 avy ‘OX 
 
 ‘ 
 pur ‘oxoidas 
 ‘ 
 $0, Ole 
 os ‘vorloXda 
 
 "YUasadg 
 
ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 192 
 
 (qed) 
 (z)aldn.0> Soasldnz.09 
 ror'rhdd > 
 
 (‘yed) 
 soasrlAnd.u3 (z}vXvd.u3 
 
 0013.11.03 
 oipadds 
 n3lidd > 
 
 (z) Alirloga.scs 
 pz0d.3 
 D.ONIY1L3- 
 
 DYMO LIL (z) 10.031t3 ‘0.0313 
 / k «& 
 
 (jared) DM L9.L 
 Aligoliy.2a Soarv oly 23. 
 (zed ) Soa 
 aliglrlrsida dlr 1a1id>x 
 Aligoi32z39 ornare (7) VM IOUrL 
 (z) npAou2L 
 nwvdo> 
 Aliya ‘pwndm 
 
 Alig.olarl > voruarlarl 
 (1d) soxlgorlar 
 ror oly>y- 
 soasrirlliy3- (z) oplyrs 
 
 "SSD *40P Se aay way *Lbay 
 
 (z)Aoin> 
 poly23 
 « 
 
 (z) Aor!3139103.2 
 0.01919 
 k 
 
 (z) Aogv.L3 
 
 (z) 10Q13 
 
 po0nm 
 
 (z) aogor's 
 (z) aogny2 
 (z) aogoy2 
 
 "St40 
 
 ogled 
 omz0d.u 
 
 ror!n0.032 
 vorloi.z 
 
 0s ‘00131L.0 
 
 sv ‘oruid 
 
 yvasg ‘aakid 
 usvay ‘rovloanpAns 
 op ‘mond 
 
 710s ‘may 
 
 [vf OL 
 
 YULAP ‘MAIL 
 
 Uy ‘mMlyurlre 
 
 as2mungii17 ‘oars 113 
 
 O079L 
 
 aponssag ‘npr 
 Aafjns ‘oXovn 
 
 Amdms ‘jrod UII 
 4? . 
 
 ‘yorlopo 
 
 rorloprlluy 
 
 "PANIMT 
 
 aas ‘odo 
 
 Avans ‘rnaarlo 
 Aaguamas ‘orolartrdl 
 wsvay ‘mangaor 
 uUapply ag ‘MADgAvY 
 ayn ‘mang rloy 
 
 ‘WUasI4d 
 
ANS, 
 
 TABLE OF IRREGULAR VERB». 
 
 (‘ssed z) 
 (z) aldnXs vorloolidX a2tolas ‘d10X 
 (z) aldvpps> ndr39p2 mdrs9p hossap ‘mdianp 
 aligsdd a rorll.drs pwldry Ao.L13 md3 Aps ‘rll 
 (z) aohap2 r0rloZaap aayf ‘oharsp 
 
 (z) aowhaale 
 
 AligXzale (z) vXoalap- ‘paale ©.070 Avaq ‘dah 
 
 (‘ssed z) 
 
 ronloolanp 
 (z) alana ‘rorlaoan vag gv ‘oamp 
 
 (z) vXasr2 
 ‘(z) vXnri92 (z) aoXa13 uaggvy ‘mavXhar 
 (-y4aed) (z) aorlodgs uns ‘oX3d4 
 (z)akpnd1s- soarrriodgs1 pip2dp2 ysiinou “op3dn 
 AligX3.13 (Z) 4ova23 = rl 394 ADIQ ‘OLMIL 
 AMEE 
 
 alig>19 ronl3p>L 0413994 ‘puliga molg 290g ‘rluipis 
 Alipory213  wrlory2134 = oY3.194 DO3V2L2  .03V34- pula ‘mrvrt 
 align.o3 ro11.00.03.0 010.03.0 0.0.03 00.0 ALDS ‘M90 
 (z)alndt03 —wrlrnd1.03- pp2d102 mMp2d10- w4nz ‘Op32dL0 
 (z)alyp103- mryn103- ~— vwyvL.03- DY19.1.03- MY3L0- Puas ‘OYY2L0 
 
 ‘SSOJ “AOP ‘ssuq ‘sad ep ed Oe g "78140 ‘2ANINT ‘JUISIAT 
 
194 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREKFK. 
 
 § 89. To locate a verbal form at once is the 
 most difficult thing a beginner has to learn, 
 It is intended, therefore, that in the following 
 pages the student shall have a special oppor- 
 tunity for mastering a large part of this main 
 difficulty. Of the most common irregular verbs 
 there are here gathered into small space the 
 forms that occur, and by a mastery of these 
 pages a great deal will be done towards gaining 
 a rapid and easy understanding of the Greek, 
 read as Greek. 
 
 After a thorough acquaintance with the 
 paradigms and the principal parts of the ir- 
 regular verbs, nothing may prove of greater 
 profit than repeated drill on these forms. 
 
 § 90. akovw,! hear. 
 
 HKOVOV, aKOVOUGL, AKiKOa, akovon, akovcw, 
 akovaas, akovav, akovoducba, AKkovELs, AKNKOACL, 
 axovabn, aKoveTe, akovcOnceTal, nKovcaper, 
 akovovtas, akouvcOeiot, akovom“er, aknKearTe, 
 AKOUGNTE, AKOVE, AKOVGEL, AKOUVTATE, HKoVCA, 
 AKOVOVTOS, HKOVGTON, AKNKOOTAS, AKOVGETAL, AKOVEL, 
 QKOUGUTW, AKOVTWCl, AKOVTOVTAL, AKOUGAL, AKOv- 
 
 1 The aim is to give a// forms of these verbs, but such com- 
 pleteness can hardly be expected. The various editors give 
 often a different form for the same passage, and no concordance 
 is, as yet, published which gives W. and H’s. reading. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 195 
 
 TATWTAV, AKOVTAVTES, NKOVTATE, UKOUCETE, TKOUE, 
 akovoecQe, a&KovovTt, AKOUGAVT@V, GaKOVOVTES, 
 aKovGoVal, akovoVTAa, HKoVoAaS, aKoUcacl, aKov- 
 gacda, KOVoE, akovodyTwY, aKovELY, aKoOvETO, 
 AKOVOVTMV, GKNKOAMLED. 
 
 § 91. AVITTHLL, 7AzSe Uf. 
 
 avéoTN, aVacTas, avaTiCETal, dvacTH, aviota- 
 Tal, AVATTMOCL, aVacTICwW, avdoTa, AVATTHVAL, 
 avecTNTaY, avaoTICEl, avacTicas, avacTdvTeEs, 
 avictacbat, avactncovta, avdornbi, avéotyoe, 
 AVIOTAMEVOS, aVacTaca, avacTday. 
 
 § 92. avotyw, open. 
 
 avolka, avovEov, nvolyOnaar, avepyora, nvoiyn, 
 avolyel, avox Oban, avoléavtes, avery pevas, 
 dvewxOnoar, avolynoeTat, avolEas, avepy evn, 
 _ dveex On, dvewye, avolEn, avolyw, davewyLévos, 
 ivoike, dvewypever, avolEoat, avéwée, nvoly On, 
 dvewyuevor, jve@x On, dive gryperns, vee Onoar, 
 ave~ypLerny, volynoav, avewypévous, davoiyar, 
 nuéwee, avoryOncerat, avoiEar, avewy Ojvat. 
 
 § 93. atrobvickw, de. 
 
 > / 2 if > / b] / 
 aTéGavov, aroOvicKkav, anobvicKe, amroOvi- 
 
 / , ’ 
 oKopmeV, aTobvncKev, aToOavoytos, ameOdvere, 
 
196 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 aToOvncKkoval, aTobadvapev, atrobavoertes, atroba- 
 veital, aTréOvnoKev, aTroOaverTi, aTobavn, atrobvn- 
 oKovTes, aTobavety, atroOvncKopev, atroPavovTa, 
 avréGave, atofavev, amobavobvta, amebavoper, 
 atroQaveta Oe. 
 
 § 94. atréddupi, destroy, kz. 
 
 aT@\eca, aToAAUpEéVNY, aTrONéT AL, ATTOANTAL, 
 aToNow, amo\AUMAL, aTrOAOMEVOU, ATOAWADS, 
 AT@NETO, aATOAEITAL, aTwWAETwWoLY, aTror\écbaL, 
 aToN€oas, ATOANVE, ATOA@, aTroAAVMEOA, ATrO- 
 Neon, ATroAAVMEVOL, ATOAETEL, ATTOAETNTE, ATTO- 
 AetoOe, aroAdNvmEVOIS, ATwWAOVTO, aTwXECED, 
 ATONOVYTAL, ATWANVYTO, ATONWAGS, ATTOAWAOTA, 
 GATONAUMEVOU, ATOAWVTAL. 
 
 § 95. ATOoTEAXNW, send. 
 
 ’ / 3 / > / -_ > 
 aTéEgTANKA, ATOTTEAAN, ATTOTTELAAS, ATTOCTA- 
 / an / 
 NEVTL, ATOTTEAM, ATréoTELNAa, aTEcTAApéEVOS, 
 an / : / 
 ATECTAANV, ATOTTAADMG!, ATOOTENAELV, ATTOOTEL- 
 / 
 AavTEsS, améoTE\Nas, ATOoTENNEL, ATrOTTELAN, 
 / val 
 ATOCTELNAVTL, ATOCTELAOY, aTrTOTTENEL, aTrO- 
 / > / > / > / 
 OTEANXW, ATETTAAKALEV, ATTETTAAN, ATETTAXAKAS, 
 / 
 ATETTAAMEVOL, ATETTAAKAGL, aTrooTENNOMEVA, 
 / 
 ATETTANKATE, ATETTANMAL, ATETTANKE, ATETTAA- 
 / > ’ b] 
 MEVOUS, ATOOTENAOUGI, CTETTELAAY, ATTOOTELAAL. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 197 
 
 § 96. adinpt, remzt, forgive. 
 
 abyaes, abes, apfjxas, apletar, Hie, addéwv- 
 
 Tal, aya, adels, adiévai, apieto,  adhiy 
 adinaw, apijcw, adapev, adévtes, abéOncar, 
 apixapev, adbete, adjoe, adpyxate, adie, 
 adiycovet, apeOy, aleuev, adjxav, adiere, 
 abeOncetar, adetvat, adel. adnKes = -xKas, 
 agpiovot, adlopev. 
 
 § 97. -Baiva, 20, come, dva-, KaTa-, €u-, weTa-. 
 
 Baivor, EBnv, Biocetat, Baivérw, Balverv, Bas, 
 BeBnxa, Batvovtos, éBnuev, Baivw, &Bacvor, 
 avtwov, Bawovtwv, Bn, Bavti, BéBnkxe, EBarve, 
 Ba n Ba Bnke, € 
 aivovot, Bivat, Baivovaa, Bion, Balver, Baivere, 
 p Bivat, B jon 
 Baivovaay, Baivovras, &8n, Bavra, BeBnxKorTos, 
 Bav, Baivouerv, eBnoar, BeByjKxawev, PBavtes, 
 BHO, PBaivov, Bato, Bite, Balvovtes, dvdBa 
 (for avadBn0.). 
 
 § 98. Barro, cast. 
 
 BarXovtwv, Bareiv, Baro, BddreE, éBEBXANTO, 
 BePBAnpévos, Bare, BeBrnKOTOS, Bairropev, Bardo, 
 éParov, BadrXovtes, BEBAnKE, Baddopuevorv, &Bar- 
 Nov, BdddreTat, BéBAntat, Baddete, PBAnNOeion, 
 Barwor, Badrdovot, Barodci, BrNOr, Barodca, 
 BeBrAnuévov, BrnOijcerar, BddrdXovtas, &Bare, 
 
198 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK, 
 
 EBrIjOn, Bary, BANOHvat, BarXrovaear, EBAHOncay, 
 
 Barnte, BeBrAnpEevnv, BrAHOnTL, BrnOEv, BNOnon, 
 Brnréov (a verbal, Luke 5 : 38), BaddAcpeva. 
 
 § 99. yivopat, de, become. 
 
 Eyev On, YEVOMEVOS, YLVOMLEVOL, YEYOVA, YEVOMEVOL, 
 ylvovTat, éyévovTO, yivwvTal, yévovTal, yivomevn, 
 éyéverbe, yeyevnuévov, yeyévnabe, yeyovaper, 
 ryevomev@v, eyeyovelt, yevntat, yivov, yevomevn, 
 ylivetat, yeyovas, yévnobe, yiverPat, yevéoBar, 
 yeyovévalt, yeyevnoOar, yevnOhvar, yevnoopevor, 
 yevnbévtes, éyevnOncav, yivécOw, yivopevor, 
 ryevomevov, yevnbévtas, eyevouny, yévapmat, ywo- 
 peOa, yevoueda, yevnOitw, éyévov, éylveTo, 
 ylvomeva, yeyovact, yevoméevols, yevnOnTte, yevo- 
 Mévns, YEevioeTat, ylvouévav, yéyovas, yevopéevonr, 
 ryeyovoTt, yéyovav, yeyovate, éyéveTo, yevouévnr, 
 yevérOw, yiverOe, yeryovel, yevomevat, yeyovuta, 
 yevnacabe, yevopeva, yeyovotes, éeryevniOnte, yeryo- 
 vos, yéyove, yevnOévtwv, yévoito (optative, mostly 
 in the phrase pa) yévorto, may tt not happen, 
 God forbid). 
 
 § 100. Yyiwookw, Luo. 
 
 yvooOnceTal, ylvOoKwV, YyVO, ylvwoKeETat, 
 yLvarKo, yVOOL, yvool, ywwacKev, EyvaKa, yVver 
 TOMAL, EYLVOTKOY, YLVOTKEL, YVOTW, YYMDoVTAL, 
 éyvaKe, yvooOértes, eyvMKaTE, ywWOoKETE, YLVO- 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 199 
 
 TKNTE, YIVOTKOMEV, YLVHTKOLAL, Eyvov, eyvoaOn, 
 yvous, VOTE, YVOS, yLvackels, yYooONTA, yVaVAL, 
 EyVO, YUOTN, YVO, YVOTETAL, EYLVWTKE, EYVMKELTE, 
 EyYWOTAL, YVOVTA, YiWOTKwMOL, YLYwWoOKOVTES, 
 yVOVTEs, ylvwoKomevn, Eyvocar, yvoocedbe, éyve- 
 Kav = -Kacl, éyvoKeval. 
 
 § 101. SiopL, 7ve. 
 
 eédaxapev, Sid0v5, Sovs, Sd, b0@, Siddact, &d(60- 
 cav,' SHcove1, édwxav, Sacv, SoOncetat, dédHKe, 
 deda@xet, Siddpevov, dedwoxercav, Sédaxa, €didour, 
 édwxas, Sidotar, d@c@, 6007, Sdiddvat, Sodvat, 
 d00Avat, dn and dof, irregular forms for d@, 6:60, 
 did, dan = optative doin, dacets, SdTw, edidov, 
 did@at, ddan, Sidote, SiddvTL, Cd@xKaTE, Sedopuévor, 
 déd0Tat, Sobelaon, Sedopévny, Edwxe, dace, Sdper, 
 éaxa, diddvra, €500n, dobeians, Sovtos, SM@copmeED, 
 Sate, Sobetcat, Sidov, das, So0cicav, édoOncar, 
 Sovra, déSmxas, Sid0vtes, Sorte. 
 
 § 102. EPXOPAL, COME, LO. 
 
 EOw, epywopat, epyopuat, €devoomat, éAndrvGa, 
 ArOov, Epyopevos, HpYovTo, EO, EOwv, EMOodaa, 
 Abeta, épyéoba, édevoovTat, 1)dOeTe, ér\nrvOas, 
 epyomeba, Epyn, éXOetv, Epyntat, EpyovTat, EXOwat, 
 érjrvbe, EXOovans, Epyou, édevVcETal, EAnAVEeL, 
 énOdvros, HAGE, EXOovTL, EAXNAVOELcaV, ENOOVTOD, 
 
 1 Cf, similar form in @w, § 104, latter part. 
 
200 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 EpyerOar, édOov, édndvOviav, €dOovta, epyeobe, 
 ENOovtes, ENModaat, eknArAvVOoTES, HAOomEV, EANXv- 
 Odra, ArAOes, EXOovTas, EOE, Epyouévyn, EpyeTat, 
 épyomevns, MpxeTo, EAOns, Hpyou (a commonly 
 occurs for % in the 2 aor.; as 7A@av, éato. 
 A few forms in -evos are omitted.) 
 
 § 103. | evpiokw, fizd. 
 
 evpnans, EUpiaKovTes, EUpnKa, EvpicKw, EvpnOn- 
 coueba, evpéOnv, evpebeis, evpeOa, evpioKor, 
 evpicxel, epyn, ebpetv, evpov, evporevy (opt.), 
 evpiaxomev, eupav, evpes, EvpéOn, EvpyceLs, Evp?)- 
 Kamev, evupe, evpéOnaav, etpapevos,! evpeOaor, 
 evpisxopcba, eUpmpev, evpeOivat, EeEvUploKETO, 
 EUpyaouval, EevpNTe, EvpoVTES, EUpomEr, EUpPHCEL, 
 eipeOn, etpnkévat, etpovoa, etpwot, evpaper," 
 espotoat, evpeOnTe, Eevpycomer, EUPNCETE. 
 
 § 104. é€xo, have. 
 
 eye, e&eus, Exel, Exyov, Exynka, TY, Eyxety, 
 v 7 5 Vv na be J v 
 eyo, Eyomev, Elxe, EaXNKE, TYMmEv, Elyov, EXD, 
 eyéerw, Eymper, C&er, eyouev, EoxXNKapev, €XO- 
 pévais, Exyes, E£eTe, Eyovtas, EyeTe, EEovar, eyou 
 and exovev (opt.), EXNTE exover, EYE, EXELS: 
 éyomeva, EaXNKOTAS, ExWaL, EYWV, EXOVTA, EXOD; 
 
 1 Cf note, p. 189. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS: STUDY OF FORMS. 201 
 
 eiyav, eiyooav, both = eiyov, eiyauev = elyoper, 
 éaynxora (nearly all the forms of the pres. act. 
 part. occur). 
 
 § 105. toTnp, cause to stand. 
 
 (CTOMEV, LTTNGL, TTHTEL, TTAS, ETTNKAS, EGTNGE, 
 éoTws, oTabels, oTioal, oTHONS, TTI CATES, TTI- 
 GOVTal, GOTHGNTE, GTAaVTOS, cTAOHVal, EcTavat, 
 OTHVal, oTHoETE, OTHOL, EoTHKaAMEV, ETTNKOS, 
 EsT@TOS, oTADHGETAL, EcTNTAV, ETTNKOTES, EOTH)- 
 Kaol, otabévta, elotnKel, éoTadnv, éEaToTa, 
 aotabncecbe, eiatHKeLcav, éoT@TEs, aTabévTes, 
 EsTNKOS, TAaGa, oTAOH, EaTHY, ETTHKE, ETTATAS, 
 ETTNKOTWY, EOTN, OTHTE, ETTWTMV, ETTAON, ETTN- 
 cav, éaTabnaav, eiaTi Keay, TTITn, ioTAVOpMED, 
 éotos. W. and H. give ior- throughout the 
 plupf. instead of elar-. 
 
 § 106. AapBav, Zake, receive. 
 
 eiAnha, AauBavev, éhaBov, AaBETo, AdBa, 
 AapBdavyn, AapBaverv, AaBeiv, AamBave, éXap- 
 Bavov, AnpreTat, A\dBeTe, auPavers, nmrropca, 
 AdBwot, AapBavete, AaBov, eraBes, ecidAndas, 
 AaBotcat, AapBavovot, éXaBeTe, eiANndos, ap- 
 Bavovtes, AjprrecOe, EXaBe, einde, NaPBovrTes, 
 AaGBn, AapwBaver, AnprAovTat, EXaBopev, NapPa- 
 vopevos, AaBovdaa, AAByTE, NapwPavopevov, NaBor 
 (opt.), eiAndes = -das. 
 
202 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 107. tivo, drink. 
 
 [wérwxe], midv, river, Tivo, Tio, Tivel, 
 mieTal, ele, erLVvov, TiveTe, Tlecal, TINTE, TIVELY, 
 miei, Telv, TivovTes, Tin, Tivyn, Tivoval, TiV@dL, 
 mice, Lov, Tie, TiWMEV, TLVETW, ErrlOpeEV, TLETE, 
  rlovaa, TIWaLD. 
 
 § 107 a. TwintTe, fal. 
 
 TENTWKAV, CTETA, ETETOV, TEIN, TETWV, TET OY, 
 TWIMTEl, TWETELTAL, ETETE, TETOVTAS, TETTWKOTA, 
 €TETAV, TETETE, TETELV, TWETOUVTAL, TeETOVTA, 
 TITTOVTWVY, TWEeTNTE, TETOVTES, TETTMKULAV, Té- 
 cwot, TéemTmxes (for -Kas), Emumrtev. 
 
 § 108. TION WL, Put, place. 
 
 téOeixa, Deis, TiOévat, TIOnml, OH, TEAR, é7/Oet, 
 Onow, €Onka, ov, TeberKas, OévTes, Peivar, Ofoeis, 
 Ay, , / a , / 
 étiGovv, TiPéact, TiOnot, On, TLCéeT@, Oépevos, 
 reOnvat, Octo, Onoe, TiPerat, Oadpmev, OécOe, 
 TiOeis, €Onxav, EbecOe, éTéEAnV, TeAaat, TLOEVTES, 
 4 ” , ” 597; , 
 eOnxas, eOevto, Oére, EOnKke, é7EOn, TEOcixarTe, 
 éTeOnaav, TéEOerTaL. 
 
 § 109. haive, show, appear. 
 
 : / / fa f / 
 éehavn, phavicetat, pavact, dhaivetar, paivy, 
 havopev, phaiver, paveira, dhaivov, daiverbe, 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS: SYNTAX. 203 
 
 éhavynsav, daivopuévov, pavn, daiwopévwr, dai 
 vovTt, Paivovtat, paivouivy, pavns, paivoct. 
 
 § 110. hépw, dear. 
 
 v > , ” » eee 4 > , 
 nveyKa, évexGetons, oloer, évéyKxate, nvéyOn, 
 , by ; 
 pépete, Epepov, pepwpeOa, hépe, pépovaar, hepo- 
 4 
 mevot, héperv, hépyn, pépovar, Edepe, -HnvéeyKare, 
 dpepomevns, hépynte, Peper, olaovar, evexOeioar, 
 , yA / td ’ , - is 
 -pepeTat, epepdpeba, hepecOar, -evéyKas, -pépns, 
 nveyKe, ebepovto, -pépovtTat, Hveyxav, bépovtes, 
 4 > A 
 pepomevnv, veyKas, evexOnvat, pépov, pépovaat, 
 éveyKn, -evEeyOcis, -pépwot, -eveyKe. 
 
 
 
 3. SYNTAX. 
 
 § 111. It is not the purpose of this introduc- 
 tory work to deal largely with Greek syntax. 
 No study, however, of the New Testament, in 
 the Greek, can be prosecuted without at least a 
 modicum of knowledge of the Greek syntax. 
 It is therefore within the scope of this little 
 work to furnish that modicum. 
 
 It is believed that the examples and prin- 
 ciples here set forth will prove of great value 
 in assisting the beginner to keep his bearings 
 
204 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 amidst the various forms of construction which 
 render the Greek so rich a Janguage, and at the 
 same time make it appear so difficult to the 
 learner. 
 
 The inductive study of syntax is valued by no 
 one more highly than by the author, and I hope 
 that the following principles may not be looked 
 upon as vues that are to serve as pegs upon 
 which the student is to hang his subjunctives, 
 infinitives, genitives, and datives. The study 
 of the syntax should begin with the examples 
 and not with the principles, with the Greek text 
 and not with a work on Greek syntax. 
 
 The New Testament, written as it was by 
 several different persons, cannot but present 
 the peculiarities of style that belong to these 
 authors. This variety of style often passes 
 over into a different syntactical expression. 
 Accordingly, what is a very common form of 
 construction in the writings of Paul may not 
 be found in the Gospels, and Luke may use 
 expressions that do not occur elsewhere. 
 
 The aim has been in the following examples 
 to give those that are representative of the 
 language as used by all the writers of the 
 New Testament. 
 
SYNTAX : SUBJUNCTIVE. 205 
 
 THE Moops IN INDEPENDENT SENTENCES. 
 
 § 112. The indicative in independent sen- 
 tences is the natural one and needs nothing 
 said about it here. 
 
 Subjunciive. 
 
 § 113. The first person plural of the subjunc- 
 tive, either present or aorist, may be used to 
 denote a command or exhortation. ‘The nega- 
 tive is pn (1 Cor. 15: 32), daywpev Kal miwper, 
 Let us eat and drink. 1 John 3:18, pi) ayatre- 
 pev Royo, Let us not love in word. 
 
 § 114. The distinction between the present 
 and aorist is that the present denotes what is 
 continued, extended, or repeated, while the aorist 
 denotes the fact simply without any continued 
 or extended action. This distinction is generally 
 true of the present and aorist in all moods 
 except the indicative. The aorist subjunctive 
 and imperative do not refer to fast time, but 
 to the present or future. The aorist infinitive 
 may refer to past time. 
 
 115. In questions of doubt or uncertainty the 
 subjunctive is used in the first person, rarely in 
 the second or third. Mark 12:14, ddpuev 7) py 
 dapev; Shall we give or shall we not give ? 
 
206 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 $116. The aorist subjunctive is used with 
 the double negative ov Ha), to express a strone 
 negation. ipa 6:35, 0 Epxopevos 7 pos Ee OU 
 pn Tevdon Kal 0 TLaTEv@V eis ewe OV [2 bu- 
 cet, he who comes unto me shall not hunger, 
 and he.who believes on me shall not thirst. 
 Note that the future indicative is thus also 
 used. 
 
 § 117. The aorist subjunctive may express a 
 negative command. Matt. 7:6, 1) d@Te TO ayLov 
 Tois KuaiVv, unde BadnTe TOs papyapitas Luav eu- 
 Tpocbev TaV yoipwr, give not that which is holy 
 to the dogs, nor throw your pearls before swine. 
 
 Optative. | 
 
 §$ 118. The optative is used to express a wish 
 that refers to future time. Luke 20:16, py 
 yévorto, may this not happen. See § 71. 
 
 In DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 $119. Final clauses denoting purpose are intro- 
 duced by iva or 67s and take the subjunctive, 
 more rarely the indicative; negative uw. Mark 
 \ D] / / es 9S , 
 
 3:14, Kal éroincey dwdeKa... Wa Mow pmeT 
 avtTov kal iva amoatéXXn avTovs Knpvocev, and 
 
SYNTAX : CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 207 
 
 he chose twelve in order that they might be wrth 
 him, and that he might send them to preach. 
 Acts 9:17, 0 KUptos amréotanrKkév me... OTS 
 avaBréWns Kal wAncOAs mvevpatos aylov, the 
 Lord has sent me that you might look up and be 
 filled with the holy spirit. 
 
 $120. Object clauses after verbs of exhorting, 
 commanding, and entreating, take the subjunc- 
 tive with fa, more rarely é7ws; negative ux). 
 Matt. 14:36, apexaddovy a’tov iva movov 
 axpwvrat TOU Kpactédov Tov iwatiov autor, they 
 entreated him that they might but touch the hem 
 of his garment. Mark 13:18, mpocetyeode dé 
 iva pry yévntar xeyw@vos, and pray ye that tt 
 happen not in the winter. 
 
 CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 $121. A condition stated szmply without any- 
 thing being implied as to fulfilment has in 
 Greek, as in English, the simple present, future, 
 or past (aorist) indicative in the condition, with 
 the same tense in the conclusion. 
 
 Matt. 4:6, ef vids ef Tod Oeov, Bare ceavTov 
 Kato, tf thou art the Son of God, cast thyself 
 down. Matt. 26:33, e¢ wavtes cxadadicOnoov- 
 Tat €v Gol, éym ovdémoTe cKavdariaOjoopat, tf 
 
 all men shall be offended in thee, I never shall be 
 
208 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 offended. 2 Cor. 5:16, ef kal éyvmxapev Kata 
 , ’ > \ an 5° 7 , 
 
 capka XpioTov, adXa voy OVKETL yLVOTKOLEV, ANA 
 
 if we have known Christ according to the flesh, 
 
 yet now we know him no longer. 
 
 § 122. Conditions Contrary to Fact.— When dv 
 is added to the conclusion where e¢ appears in 
 the condition, a non-fulfilment is implied. The 
 same tense of the indicative is used in both 
 parts. 
 
 § 123. The zmperfect denotes present time, 
 and the aorzst or pluperfect denotes past time. 
 
 Imperfect: John 5:46, ef yap éructevere 
 Mavoet, émictevete av éuoi, for tf you were now 
 believing in Moses, you would now be believing 
 in me. Implying that they are not believing in 
 Moses. ? 
 
 Aorist or pluperfect: 1 Cor. 2:8, ef yap 
 Eyvooav, ovK av Tov KUpiov Ths dSdEns éectatpo- 
 aav, for if they had known it they would not 
 have crucified the Lord of Glory. 1 John 2: 109, 
 el yap €& nuav noav, wewerynKkercay av pe? Hud, 
 Jor of they had been of us, they would have re- 
 mained with us. 
 
 § 124. Future Conditions. — Clauses that refer 
 to future time are introduced by éav, which is 
 followed by the subjunctive (vavely the indica- 
 
SYNTAX : RELATIVE CLAUSES. 209 
 
 tive). In the conclusion the future indicative © 
 accurs or the present with future sense. 
 
 Matt. 9:21, €av povoy apopat tod iwariov 
 avtod cwOijcowat, If L shall but touch his gar- 
 ment, [ shall be saved. John 15:10, édv tas 
 evTohds fou THpianTe, peveite ev TH Aydt pov, 
 if ye shall keep my commandments, ye shall re- 
 main in my love. 
 
 §125. The negative in the condition is 
 usually ju, in the conclusion always od. 
 
 RELATIVE CLAUSES. 
 
 § 126. Clauses introduced by relative words 
 as os, who, and ozrov, where, follow the same 
 principles as conditional clauses when referring 
 to present, past, or future time. The relative 
 word stands as the conjunction in the room of 
 et. Where an éap-construction is implied, the 
 relative word usually takes the place of the eé 
 and the ay remains, as 6s av. More rarely ds 
 éav is found. 
 
 Luke 8:18, 05 av yap éyn, SoOjcetas ait, 
 whoever has, to him shall it be given. Mark 
 14:9, Ovov éav KnpvxOn TO evayyédovy,.. . 
 erroinaev aitn AadnHOnceTa, wherever the Gospel 
 shall be preached, that which she has done will 
 be told. 
 
210 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 TEMPORAL CLAUSES. 
 
 $127. Temporal Clauses introduced by OTE, 
 when, ws, until, are followed by the same con- 
 struction as relative conjunctions, § 126; 67e ap 
 is always written ora. Mark 6: 10, éxet pévere 
 fos dv eEEXOnTe exeiOev, abide there until you 
 go out thence. Matt. 21:40, 6rav obv €XOn oO 
 KUpLOS TOD ApTEXOVOS, ri mrounoer; when there-- 
 fore the lord of the vineyard cometh, what will 
 he do? 
 
 § 128. More rarely ews appears without ap. 
 Luke 22:34, od dwvycer onpepov GnéxTop Ews 
 Tpls pe arapyion eiSévat, the cock shall not 
 crow to-day until you deny three times that you 
 know me. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 129. The infinitive is used to complete the 
 meaning of such verbs as bre:v, wish, divacbat, 
 able; @dmitew, hope; &yreiv, seek. This con- 
 struction is the same as in English. If this 
 infinitive has a subject different from that of 
 the principal verb, this subject must be in 
 the accusative. ebr. 6: 11, émOvpodpev oé 
 écactov buoy tiv avtiy évdetxvuc Gat OTrOUOND, 
 we moreover desire each one of you to exhibit 
 the same earnestness. 2 Cor. 11:16, uy Tis pe 
 
SYNTAX: INFINITIVE. 21II 
 
 Od—&y addpova eivat, let no one think me to be 
 n dbp 
 
 Joolish (that I am foolish). 
 
 § 130. When the subject of the infinitive is 
 the same as that of the principal verb, this 
 subject is not commonly expressed, and _ all 
 attributes are in the xominative case. Rom. 
 1:22, dacKxovtes eivar cogol éuwpavOncar, they 
 were made foolish by declaring themselves to 
 be wise. 
 
 § 131. Words of saying and in general ex- 
 pressions of thought may be followed by the 
 infinitive with the cases as above. See last 
 example in $129 and in $128. 
 
 § 132. The infinitive may be used as a sub- 
 stantive, and in this construction may take the 
 article in any case. This substantive phrase 
 (while keeping its verbal force) is governed as a 
 noun, and often takes a preposition. 
 
 I Cor. 14 : 39, TO Narely on K@AVETE YAWoCALs, 
 forbid not the speaking with tongues. Acts 
 14:9, €yet wiotiw Tod cwOhvar, he has faith 
 that he will be healed, lit. faith of being healed. 
 John 1 : 48, rpo tod ce Piturov hovica, before 
 Philip called you. 
 
 § 133. The infinitive is frequent after éyévero, 
 at came to pass, where the infinitive, with or 
 
212 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 without a subject accusative, is the subject of 
 the éyévero. Luke 6:1, éyévero dé év caBBat@ 
 SvatropeverOar adtov, it came to pass as he 
 journeyed on the Sabbath. Luke 3:21, éyévero 
 df EV TO BarriaOjvar admavtTa TOV NaOV . . . AVEW- 
 xOfivae TOV ovpavov Kal KataBhnvat TO TvEdpa TO 
 dytov ér avtov, and when all the people had 
 been baptized (ev to BarticOjvat) tt happened 
 that the heavens were opened, and that the ae, 
 Spirit descended upon him. 
 
 § 134. dote, so that (to be distinguished from 
 adore as an introductory word, and so, therefore), 
 takes the infinitive (indicative twice), negative 
 
 / a] / ¢ \ \ ¢e \ 
 pn. Mark g: 26, éyéveto mael vexpos WaTE TOUS 
 modrovs eye OTL ATéBavev, he became as one 
 dead, so that the most said that he was dead. 
 
 § 135. The infinitive is common after mpiv or 
 mpw 1}, before. Matt. 26:34, mpiv adéxTopa 
 dovijca, before the cock crows. Acts 7:2, mpi 
 ) Katoukhnoat avtov év Xappay, before he dwelt in 
 Charran. 
 
 PARTICIPLE. 
 
 § 136. Verbs of hearing, seeing, knowing, and 
 perceiving, may be followed by the participle. 
 This construction is a form of indirect discourse 
 
SYNTAX : NEGATIVES. 214 
 
 and is rendered by such a clause in English. 
 Acts 7:12, axotvoas &é€ “lax@B évta oitia els 
 Aiyurtov, and Jacob having heard that there 
 was corn in Egypt. Luke 8: 46, éyw yap éyvev 
 diva éEedXnrAvOviav am éuod, for [ know that 
 power has gone out from me. 1 John 4:2, 
 Tav TVEdpa 0 OmodXoyet Incotv Xpiotiv év capKi 
 EXnrvOoTa, every spirit which confesses that Jesus 
 Christ came in the flesh. Yor some other ex- 
 amples of the participle see 190-193. 
 
 NEGATIVES. 
 
 § 137. wx) is the usual negative in the condi- 
 tional, relative, and temporal clauses, ov the 
 negative of the main clause. 
 
 § 138. ju) is the negative of the imperative, 
 pe) Oavpatete, marvel not. 
 
 § 139. ju) is used in asking questions where a 
 negative reply is expected. John 21:5, zravdia, 
 pn TL Tpoadayov éyete; Little children, have ye 
 aught to eat ? 
 
 § 140. od is used in questions where an 
 affirmative answer is expected. Luke 17:17, 
 ovy of déxa éxabapicOncav; were the ten not 
 
 purified ? 
 
214 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESIAMENT GREEK. 
 
 § 141. The double negative ov pm is used to 
 express a strong negation. See §116. Matt. 
 24 : 34, ov pn TapérOn 1) yeved avTn Ews Av TavTa 
 tadta yévnta. This generation shall not pass 
 away until all these things come to pass. 
 
 § 142. When a strong emphasis is desired 
 several negatives may occur in a_ sentence, 
 provided the simple negative as ov or py be 
 followed by the compounds, as ovdé, ovdév, or 
 pndé, wndév. 1 John 1:5, oxotia ovK éotu €v 
 avT@ ovdepia, no darkness 1s in him at all. 
 Mark 1:44, épa pndevi pndev eimns, see to tt, 
 speak née er a word to any one. But where the 
 negatives are simple, the effect is as in English. 
 
 § 143. In general, ov is the negative of state- 
 ment or fact; while wy is the negative of con- 
 ception, possibility, or contingency. 
 
 USES OF THE CASES IN GREEK. 
 
 § 144. It is supposed that the student is 
 already acquainted with the simpler uses of the 
 cases that have come up in the course of the 
 
 _ lessons. 
 Genttive. 
 
 § 145. Time within which is put in the geni- 
 tive. Matt. 28:13, vueros éXOovtes éxrevrav 
 autov, they came in the night and stole him. 
 
SYNTAX : USES OF THE CASES. 215 
 
 § 146. The agent after a passive verb, usually 
 a voluntary agent, is expressed by d7é and the 
 genitive. Mark 1:9, éBarric@n bd “Iwdvou, 
 he was baptized by John. Matt. 11:7, caXapov 
 UTO avés“ov aarevopevorv, a reed shaken by the 
 wind. 
 
 § 147. The genitive may be used as a fpred- 
 tcate after eiwi. 1 Cor. 1:12, éym pév eps 
 IlavAov... eyo dé Xpiotov, [ am of Paul... 
 and [am of Christ. 
 
 § 148. Verbs of ‘touching, begging, hearing, 
 tasting, and the like, are usually followed by the 
 genitive. Luke 5:13, #ato avtov rXéyov, he 
 touched him, saying. Mark 8: 23, cat ériiaBo- 
 Levos THS yeElpos Tov TuProd, and he took hold of 
 his hand. Luke 5:12, éde7@n adtov r\éywr, he 
 begged him, saying. Matt. 17:5, axovere avoid, 
 hear ye him. John 8: 52, od pi yevoetar Oavatou 
 els TOV ai@va, he shall not taste death forever. 
 
 § 149. Words denoting fulness, deficiency, 
 plenty, and want, take the genitive. John 
 1:15, wAnpns yaptTos Kal arnOelas, full of grace 
 and truth. Luke 1:53, rewavtas évérdnoev 
 ayabav, he filled the hungry with good (things). 
 James 1:5, e¢ dé Tis buwv AElTETAL Todias, and 
 af any of you ts lacking in wisdom. 
 
216 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 $150. The genitive follows the comparative 
 degree of the adjective. Mark 12:31, pelfov 
 TOUT@V AAAN é€vTOA) OK EaTLV, no other com- 
 mandment ts greater than these. 
 
 § 151. The genitive follows verbs of accusing, 
 condemning, and the like. Acts 19:40, xal 
 yap Klivduvevomev éyKaretobat otacews, for we 
 are in danger of being called to account for the 
 disturbance. Mark 15:3, kal katnyopouy atov 
 ol apxtepels Toda, and the high priests accused 
 him of many things. 
 
 § 152. The genitive follows most adverbs, as: 
 yopis, péxypt, ws, omicw, eumpocbev, éyyus. 
 John 1:15, 0 dmlcw pou épyomevos éutrpoabév 
 fou yéyovev 6TL Tpa@Tos pov Hv, he who comes 
 after me was before me, because he was prior 
 Zo me. 
 
 Dative. 
 
 § 153. The dative is used after words signi- 
 fying /keness, agreement, or their opposites. 
 John 8:55, €copar dpotos vyiv wevorns, [ shall 
 be like you, a lar. 
 
 $154. The dative follows verbs of appreach- 
 ing, joining, following. Luke 15:25, Kal as 
 Epxouevos nyyloev TH oixia, and as he went he 
 
SYNTAX: USES OF THE CASES. 217 
 
 drew near to the house. Mark 2:14, axorovde 
 pot, follow me. 
 
 $155. mictevo, believe, and trpocKkuvéw, wor- 
 ship, are commonly followed by the dative. 
 Matt. 21 : 32, ovx emiotevoate avTo, ye believed 
 him not. John 9:38, cal mpocexvynoev avo, 
 
 and he worshipped him. 
 
 $156. The dative is used after efué and yivo- 
 pac to denote the possessor. Acts 8: 21, ov« 
 gotiv cou pepls, no part ts to you (you have no 
 
 part). 
 
 § 157. Cause, means, manner, degree, and 
 instrument are put in the dative; the latter 
 usually with a preposition. Rom. I1:20, 7H 
 amtiatia é£exrdaOnaar, because of their unbeltef 
 they were broken off. Rom. 8:24, TH yap erwior 
 écwOnuev, for we are saved by hope. Mark 
 10:48, 7oAA@ parrov Expatev, he cried much 
 more, lit. more by much. Luke 22:49, Kupee, 
 ev TataEomenv ev payaipn ; Lord, whether shall we 
 strike with the sword ? 
 
 § 158. Time when and place where are in the 
 dative ; more commonly with ev. Luke 12: 20, 
 TAUTN TH VUKTL THY ruXY cou aiTovaLW a7ro God, 
 this night they ask from thee thy soul. 
 
218 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMZMN@ cREEK, 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 § 159. Verbs of motion zowards require the 
 accusative case. The motion may be odjectzve or 
 subjective, still the same case occurs, and with 
 a preposition, as es, wapd, or mpos. Luke 1:56, 
 uméctpeev eis tov otxov, he turned into the 
 house. Mark 5:23, wimres mpos tovs mddas 
 avtov, he falls at his feet. John 1:1, 0 Adyos Hv 
 mpos Tov Beov, the Word was with God. 
 
 § 160. Extent of ¢27e and space is put in the 
 accusative. John 7 : 33, ts ypovov pixpov pe? 
 vpov eipi, yet a little while 1 am with you. 
 John 6:10, éAndakoTes odv WS TTadloUs elKooL 
 mévte, when then they had gone about twenty-five 
 furlongs. 
 
 § 161. Zzvo accusatives may follow verbs of 
 saying or asking something of some one; also 
 doing something to some one. Matt. 7:9, 
 Ov alTnoel oO vids av’Tov aptov, whom shall his 
 son ask for bread. Matt. 4:19, Toijowm vas 
 anreeis avOporov, I shall make you fishers of 
 men. 
 
 § 162. The infinitive has the subject in the 
 accusative. See § 131. 
 
SYNTAX : PREPOSITIONS, 219 
 
 § 163. PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 avrt, zstead of. 
 amd, from. 
 
 éx, out of. 
 
 apd, before. 
 
 Genztive only. 
 
 év, 272. 
 
 Dative only. : 
 es ae with. 
 
 Accusative only. ets, znto, to. 
 
 Sud, through. Gen., Dat., { él, upon, at, to. 
 
 era. Kata down. and rapa, from, by, to. 
 tg 5 : 
 ae peta, wth, after. Accus. | mpds, fo, at. 
 n 
 mepl, about. 
 ALCUS:. AOL); 
 vmép, above. 
 e , 
 v16, wader. 
 
 § 164. dvti, zvstead of, oddvTa avti Tod ddovTos, 
 a tooth for a tooth. 
 
 aémé denotes SEPARATION, amo Tns TadiAalas, 
 from Galilee; avo waons apaptias, from every 
 sin. SOURCE, padete am’ émod, learn of me. 
 
 Sua, eenzt7ve, THROUGH, eloepyomevos Sta THS 
 Ovpas, entering through the door. MEANS, o 
 Koopos bt avtov éyéveto, the world was made 
 through him. Accusative, ON ACCOUNT OF, FOR 
 THE SAKE OF, 61a TO dvoua pov, for my name's 
 sake ; 81a tobdto, on account of this. 
 
 eis denotes motion toward, either real or 
 
220 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 implied, avéBn eis TO dpos, he went up into the 
 mountain. TIME, eis ai@va, for everlasting. 
 
 Used metaphorically to denote REST or a 
 CONDITION, 0 @v €ls TOV KOATTOV TOV TraTpOs he 
 who 1s tn the bosom of the Father. 
 
 ek denotes motion ouT oF, where there has 
 been a close union, dav) é« TOV obpavar, a Voice 
 out of heaven. TIME, é€x Tovtou, after this (time). 
 PLACE, €« deEtav, on the right hand. 
 
 év, IN, €v TH ayopa, in the market-place ; &¢8o- 
 Lévov €v avOporois, given among men (so often 
 with plural nouns). INSTRUMENT, wata£oev 
 ev TH payalpn; Shall we strike with the sword? 
 
 éti, with the genztive, UPON, with verbs of 
 RESTING, GOING, STANDING, é€7rl THs yNs, upon the 
 earth. TIME, émt Kndavédiov, in the time of 
 Claudius. 
 
 With the dative, WHERE, éwi mpupuvy, at the 
 stern; éwt Tivakt, upon a charger. 
 
 Accusative, motion toward, tiOéacww él Tip 
 Auxviav, they put it upon a lampstand, cvvnxOn 
 OxNOs Todds er’ avTov, a great multitude was 
 gathered to him. 
 
 KaTGd, motion FROM ABOVE DOWNWARD. Gevt- 
 five, Opunoe KaTAa TOD Kpnuvod, they rushed down 
 the steep place. An opinion or judgment AGAINST 
 any one, ei Tu éyete KaTa TLVOS, if you have any- 
 thing against any one. 
 
SYNTAX : PREPOSITIONS. 221 
 
 Accusative, ALONG, THROUGH, ACCORDING TO, 
 Kata Tas Yopas, throughout these places; Kata 
 Tov vomov, according to the law. 
 
 eTA, ASSOCIATION WITH. Genitive, 0 twatip 
 pet e€mov éeotiv, the Lather ts with me. 
 
 Accusative, AFTER, denoting succession, pera 
 Sé tavta eirev, and after this he said. 
 
 Tapa, gewitive, FROM THE SIDE OF. From, 
 always of a person, AauPavopev trap’ avTod, we 
 receive from him. 
 
 Dative, BY THE SIDE OF. Something is or 
 is done by some one or something, zap’ aUT@ 
 éwevav, they remained with him. 
 
 Accusative, TO, CONTRARY TO, #AGe mapa THY 
 @drvaccay, he went to the sea; Tapa tiv bidayny, 
 contrary to the teaching. 
 
 tepi, genitive, ABOUT, CONCERNING, yéypamrTae 
 Tepl avtou, tt 7s written concerning him. 
 
 Accusative, ABOUT, AROUND, qrepl O€ évdexaTny, 
 and about the eleventh hour, wep Tipov, around 
 Lyre. 
 
 mp6, BEFORE, 7po T@v Oupar, before the doors ; 
 mpo KataBorns Koopov, before the foundation of 
 the world. 
 
 tpés, accusative, after verbs of motion, a7nAGe 
 mpos avtovs, he departed to them. Where the 
 motion is not objective, éuayovto ody mpos adX7- 
 hous, and indeed they contended with one another. 
 
222 ESSENTIALS OF NEW TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 PROXIMITY, 0 Adyos Hv pds Tov Ocdvr, the word 
 was with God. Dative, NEAR, wpos T@ dpe, by 
 the mountain. Genitive but once, Acts 27: 34, 
 Jor the advantage of. 
 
 GUV, WITH, €vropeveTo ory avTots, he proceeded 
 with them. 
 
 Umép, genitive, FOR SAKE OF, Wuy7v jou vrrép 
 cov Onow, [ shall lay down my life for you. 
 
 Accusative, ABOVE, 0v6€ Sodros Urrép TOV KUpLoD, 
 nor ts the servant above hts master. 
 
 t16, genitive, always with the passive voice 
 to denote the AGENT, ¢Barrtic@n b76 “Iwavov, he 
 was baptized by John. 
 
 Accusative, UNDER, U7r0 THY ouKHY eidov oe, T 
 saw you underneath the fig tree. 
 
 The student should by no means consider this 
 short treatment of the prepositions exhaustive. 
 Many of them occur more than 1000 times in 
 the New Testament, and often with varying sig- 
 nificance. Only the most fundamental uses have 
 here been indicated. 
 
 In all cases constant reference should be made 
 to the lexicon. | 
 
INDEXES. 
 

 
GREEK 
 
 N.B.—All references are made to pages. 
 
 INDEX, 
 
 Occasionally more particular 
 
 reference is made in parenthesis. 
 
 A, in contraction, 139; @ 
 changed to 7, 15; to a, 48 
 (note). 
 
 aya0ds, comparison, 15 3. 
 ayyéddw, class of verbs, 186. 
 dyw, 2 aor., 118 (v. 13). 
 
 at, short in endings, 23 (top). 
 
 aipw, 186. 
 
 dxovw, 2 perf.,67 (top) and 112 
 Cee): 
 
 adnO7s, decl., 151. 
 
 dv, in apodoses, 208 ; in temp. 
 clauses, 210; in rel. clauses, 
 200. 
 
 dvnp, decl., 45. 
 
 avolyw, forms in N. T., 195. 
 
 amd, w. gen., 219. 
 
 dméddum, forms in N. T., 196. 
 
 amooré\\w, forms in N. T., 
 196. 
 
 dmrrTouat, w. gen., 215. 
 
 avTds, pers. pron., 30 (top); 
 intensive pron., 29 (bottom); 
 position and meaning with 
 art., 29, 30, 147. 
 
 avrov for éavrod, So. 
 
 
 
 
 
 apinut, conjugation, 179; prin. 
 parts, 189; forms in N. T., 
 107. 
 
 -aw, contract form in, 168. 
 
 B, the 
 
 euph. 
 
 classification among 
 MOUtes oe FO g cron les 
 changes before a, 49. 
 Baivw, prin. parts, 190; forms 
 TN ae O's 
 Baddow, prin. parts, 190; forms 
 AEN cond te 1) 7s 
 Baovrevs, decl., 150. 
 IT, classification among the 
 MULES Wel SO) U2) 5a 0 euDn, 
 changes before o, 49; before 
 My 117 (top). 
 yaornp, decl., 151. 
 yevouat, w. gen., 215. 
 ylvouat, 89 (bottom); prin. 
 parts, 190; forms in N. T., 
 198. 
 yivwoxw, 89 (bottom); prin. 
 parts, 190; forms in N. T.. 
 198. 
 
 Q 225 
 
226 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 
 
 ypdgow, 2 aor. pass. éypagny, 
 69 (bottom). 
 
 A, classification among the 
 
 mutes, 138; dropped before 
 
 a, 49; euph. changes before 
 
 a liquid, 69 (mid.); inserted 
 
 in dvnp, 45 (bottom). 
 
 dé, 30. 
 
 det, impers., 9O. 
 
 déouar, w. gen., 215 (mid.). 
 
 dn\ow, conjug. of contract 
 forms, 168. 
 
 did, Ww. gen. and acc., 219. 
 
 dldwut, conjug. of, 173; verbs 
 in -m, 87, 88; redupl., 89 
 (bottom); aor. in xa, 88 
 (note); prin. parts, 190; 
 forms in N. T., 199. 
 
 K, in contraction, 138; in aug., 
 15; lengthened to 7, 48; in 
 aor. of liquid stems, 79; 2 
 aor. pass., 69 (bottom) ; 
 fut. liquid stems, 78; -ew, 
 conjug. of ¢iAéw, 168; vari- 
 able vowel, 4, 13 (top), 15 
 (mid.), 48 (top); contraction 
 OF €a6;.1°2: 
 
 -eal, for -eoat, 13. 
 
 édv, w. subj., 39, 208, 209. 
 
 éauTov, decl., 154. 
 
 éyelpw, fut. of, 78. 
 
 éy, decl., 29, 153. 
 
 ec for e€ in aug.,16 (note). See 
 
 under e. 
 
 TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 el, 7f, 207, 208. 
 
 eidov, 57 (bottom). 
 
 eiul, conjug., 178; w. dat. of 
 poss., 217; -enclitie; 31. 
 
 eiut, go, in composition only, 
 179. 
 
 eirov, forms of, 58 (top). 
 
 els, W. acc., 219. 
 
 els, decl., 151; compound, 83. 
 
 éx or €&, w. gen., 220. 
 
 €xetvos, 27. 
 
 é\doowv, 147 (a). 
 
 édmls, decl., 51, 148. 
 
 éuauTov, decl., 154. 
 
 éumpoobev, w. gen., 216 (mid.). 
 
 év, w. dat., 220. 
 
 érl, w. gen., dat., and acc., 
 220. 
 
 épxouat, prin. parts, 191; forms 
 in N. “Ic, 190: 
 
 evploxw, prin. parts, 191; class, 
 187; forms in N. T., 200. 
 
 éxw, prin. parts, 190; forms in 
 N. T., 200. 
 
 -ews, -ewv, in the gen. of the 3d 
 decl., 44, 45. 
 
 €ws, construction of, 210. 
 
 Z, double consonant, 12 (a); 
 verb stems in -fw, 186 (2). 
 
 H, see under e. 
 
 -ns, adjs. in, 84, 85. 
 ©, classification among the 
 mutes, 138. 
 
GREEK 
 
 Oe, in aor. pass., 68. 
 
 OvycKkw (Oav), only w. prep. 
 aro-; prin. parts, 191; class 
 of verbs, 187 (bottom). 
 
 Oplé, decl., 151. 
 
 duyarnp, decl., 151 (top). 
 
 I, close vowel, 138 (3); added 
 to pron. and adv., 52 (note) ; 
 in redupl., 89; sign of the 
 opt., 181. 
 
 Unut, see ably. 
 
 -wv, in acc. sing., 51 (bottom). 
 
 iva, conj., construction w. final 
 clauses, 206; w. object 
 clauses, 207. 
 
 tornut, redupl., 89; inflection 
 of forms, 173; prin. parts, 
 191; forms in.N. T., 201. 
 
 “Lwy, -\tTOS, Comp. and superl., 
 
 86. 
 
 K, for classification of mutes, 
 138; before a, 49; before p, 
 117 (top). 
 
 -ka, in verbs, 88 (note). 
 
 kakés compared, 153. 
 
 kahés compared, 153. 
 
 kaTd, w. gen. and acc., 220. 
 
 kAalw, prin. parts, 191. 
 
 A, 138; verbs in -AAw, 186. 
 
 AauBdvw, class of verbs, 187; 
 prin. parts, 192. 
 
 Aelw, 2 aor. of, 165. 
 
 Aw, Conjug., 160. 
 
 INDEX. 227 
 
 M, 138. 
 
 méyas, decl., 152; compared, 
 153. 
 
 peta, W. gen. and acc., 221. 
 
 “yh, neg. in cond,, rel., final, 
 temp. clauses, 213; in wishes, 
 206; w. imp., 213; w. dubi- 
 tative subj., 205 (bottom); 
 double neg. od uy, 206 (top) ; 
 in asking questions, 213. 
 
 mnTnp, decl., 151 (top). 
 
 N, 138; in 5th class of verbs, 
 187. 
 
 v, case ending, 51 (bottom). 
 
 -vat, infin., 76, 183. 
 
 -vot, in 3d per. plur., 4. 
 
 &,, double consonant, 4 7 (top). 
 
 O, in contraction, 139; length- 
 ened to w, 48; to ov, 52(132); 
 connect. vowel, see under e. 
 
 6, 9, Td, art. decl., 146; pro- 
 clitics, 21 (note). 
 
 o, diphthong, 8, 4. 
 
 oida, conjugation, 180. 
 
 buvuue (ou-, omo-), class of verbs, 
 187. 
 
 bvoua, decl., 42. 
 
 éricw, w. gen., 86 (note). 
 
 daws, in obj. clauses w- subjv., 
 207. 
 
 dpdw, prin. parts, 192; aug: 
 ment, 112 (v. 1). 
 
 8s, rel. pron., 33 (bottom). 
 
228 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 
 
 8oris, forms in N. T., 154. 
 
 ov, ovK, ovx, 28 (note 2); see 
 under “7. 
 
 ovdels, decl., 83. 
 
 ovs, ear, decl., 151. 
 
 ovros, decl., 147; use and mean- 
 ing of, 26, 27. 
 
 -ow, verbs in, 168. 
 
 II, for classification, 138; be- 
 fore ¢, 49; before 6e in aor. 
 pass., 69. 
 
 wapd, W. gen., dat., acc., 221. 
 
 was, 64. 
 
 mwarnp, decl., 45. 
 
 mepl, w. gen. and acc., 221. 
 
 mlvw, class of verbs, 187; prin. 
 parts, 192: formis-in°N. 1, 
 202. 
 
 misrevw, foll. by dat., 217 (top). 
 
 modus, decl., 44. 
 
 modus, decl., 152; 
 ef 
 
 mous, 51 (top); decl., 151 (top). 
 
 amply, w. infin., 212. 
 
 mpés, w. gen., dat., and acc., 
 220. 
 
 mpbabev, w. gen., 216 (middle). 
 
 mMp@Tos, W. gen., 216 (middle). 
 
 compar., 
 
 P at beginning of a word, 140. 
 
 2, forms of, 3 (note); classifi- 
 cation, 138; euph. changes 
 w. mutes. 49; linguals change 
 to o before a lingual, 69; 
 
 TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 dropped in nouns, 53 (bot- 
 tom); in eva, eco, and ago, 
 13 (a), 17 (@), and 56 (a); 
 movable o, 141 (top). 
 
 -oat and -co, see under o. 
 
 -cav, 3d per. plur., 15 (top), 
 88. 
 
 geauTov, decl., 154. 
 
 o7Té\Xw, prin. parts, 193. 
 
 ob, decl., 153. | 
 
 T, for classification, 138; euph. 
 changes with other linguals, 
 69; dropped before c, 49. 
 
 -TNs, Masc. nouns in, 22, 23. 
 
 TlOnu, see 8g and go. 
 
 Tis, decl:, 1543" see. 95. 
 
 ris, déecl., 1546 tee 7G, 
 
 Tpets, decl., 153. 
 
 TUYXavw (TVX) class of verbs, 
 187 (mid.); prin. parts, 
 193. 
 
 Y, close vowel, 138 (3). 
 vdwp, decl., 151 (top). 
 
 vu, diphthong, I0 (¢). 
 
 vids, decl., 145. 
 
 brd, w. gen. and acc., 222. 
 
 ®, classification, 138; euph. 
 changes, 49, 69 (178). 
 
 galyw, conjug., 166; class of 
 verbs, 186; prin. parts, 193; 
 forms in N. T., 202. 
 
 pépw, 188 (mid.); prin. parts, 
 193. 
 
GREEK INDEX. 229 
 
 X, see reference under ¢. 
 xelp, decl., 151 (top). 
 
 xelpwv, see Kakds. 
 
 Q, see under o. 
 
 w, augm. for o, 15 (36). 
 
 wy, part. of elul, 70. 
 
 -ws, in adverbs, 86. 
 
 W, double consonant; 19 (a) | wore, w. inf. and ind., 212, 80 
 and 138. (note I). 
 
ENGLISH INDEX. 
 
 See remark, page 225. 
 
 Absolute gen., 74 (note 3). 
 
 Abstract nouns, w. art., I12 
 (v. 1, latter part). 
 
 Accent, nominal, 24; verbal, 2; 
 gen. and dat. of oxytones, 20; 
 monosyllables of 3d decl., 42; 
 in contr. syllables, 78 (top) ; 
 in enclitics, 29 (note). 
 
 Accusative case, 144; uses of, 
 218. 
 
 Accusing, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
 216. 
 
 Active voice, 157. 
 
 Acute, see under Accent. 
 
 Adjectives, compar. of, 85; 
 agree w. nouns, II; attrib. 
 and pred., position of, 27 (64). 
 
 Adverbs, formation of, 86 ; foll. 
 by gen. case, 216. 
 
 Agent, see under Genitive. 
 
 Alphabet, 137. 
 
 Antecedent, assim. of rel. to 
 case of anteced., 115 (v. 24). 
 
 Antepenuit, 2 (0). 
 
 Aorist, 158, 159; use of, mean- 
 
 ing of, 55, 56; 2 aor. diff. 
 
 from I aor. in form and mean- 
 ing, 57; aor. in ka, 88(note); 
 Attic redupl. in aor., 118 
 (v. 13) ;)saccent of 2 acr, 
 part. and inf., 62; aor. pass., 
 suffix of, and act. endings, 
 68, 69; sense of aor., 61 
 (mid.) and 205. 
 
 Apostrophe in elision, 141. 
 
 Article decl., 146; proclitic, 27 
 (note); w. atrés, 29, 30; w. 
 adjs. to give position, 27. 
 
 Augment, 15 and 183. 
 
 Believing, verbs of, foll. by dat., 
 25 (note 2). 
 
 Cardinal numerals decl., 153. 
 
 Cause expressed by dat., 217; 
 by part., 72-73 (top). 
 
 Classes of verbs, 184. 
 
 Close vowels, 138 (3); stems 
 of nouns ending in, 51 (bot- 
 tom). 
 
 Command expressed by imp, 
 83. 
 
 230 
 
ENGLISH 
 
 Comparative, see Degree. 
 
 Comparison of adjs., 85; of 
 advs., 86. 
 
 Compound verbs, 32, 33; nega- 
 tives, 214. 
 
 Condition and conclusion (pro- 
 tasis and apodosis) syntax 
 of cond. sent., 206-208. 
 
 Conjugation of w-verbs, 160; 
 of mut-verbs, 172. 
 
 Consonants, division of, 138 
 (top); euph. changes of, 49 
 and 69; movable consonants, 
 140; at end of words, 42 
 (note); consonant stems of 
 3d decl., 53. 
 
 Contraction, 138, 139; of verbs 
 in -aw, -ew, -ow, 168; in parts. 
 of same verbs, 156. 
 
 Coronis, 139. 
 
 Crasis, 139. 
 
 Dative, meaning of, 144; uses 
 of, 216-217. 
 
 Declension of nouns, 7 and 142; 
 A-decl., 19-23; O-decl., 6-11; 
 3d decl., 41-46 and 50-54; 
 irreg. nouns of 3d decl., 151; 
 of adjs., 26-27; adjs. of 3d 
 decl., 85; of participles, 
 154-157; of pronouns, 153- 
 154. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns, 26, 
 27: 
 
 Dependent clauses, syntax of, 
 206-210. 
 
 INDEX. 231 
 
 Deponent verbs, 32. 
 
 Diphthongs, 138 (4); contr. 
 w. vowels, 139 (8); in aug., 
 15. 
 
 Double consonants, 138 (2); 
 negatives, 214. 
 
 Doubt, questions of, exprs. by 
 subjv., 205. 
 
 Elision of vowels in prep., 141 
 (mid.). 
 
 Enclitics, 29 (note). 
 
 Endings, pers. end. in verbs, 4, 
 182; case endings in nouns, 
 2B Ae, AG? ST. 
 
 Exhortation exprs. by subjy., 
 205. 
 
 Extent, see Accusative. 
 
 Feminine gender, 143. 
 
 Final clauses, 206. 
 
 Following, joining, approach- 
 ing, verbs of, foll. by dat., 216. 
 
 Fulness and want exprs. by 
 gen., 215. 
 
 Future, formation of, 47-49; in 
 liquid verbs, 77-78; syntax 
 of fut. w. od uy, 214 (top). 
 
 Gender, 143. 
 
 Genitive case, meaning of, 144; 
 accent of oxytones, 20; in 
 3d decl., 41 (bottom) and 51; 
 syntax of, 214-216; prep. w., 
 219; gen. abs., 74 (note 3), 
 
 Grave accent, 9 (note), 
 
232 ESSENTIALS OF NEW 
 Hearing, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
 II (note). 
 
 Imperative, 82, 83; endings of, 
 182; used in commands, 83. 
 
 Imperfect tense, meaning of, 
 14; aug. in, 15; secondary 
 tense, 159; used in cond. 
 sent., 208. 
 
 Impersonal verbs, 90. 
 
 Indicative, 158; in cond. sent., 
 207-208; w. Wore, 212; pers. 
 end. of, 182; suffixes in, 183. 
 
 Infinitives, 76; 2 aor. inf., 62; 
 syntax of, 210-212; endings 
 of, 183. 
 
 Inflexion, 142. 
 
 Irregular, nouns of 3d decl., 
 151; comparison, 153; verbs, 
 189-193. 
 
 Labial mutes, 138. 
 
 Likeness, words of, foll. by dat., 
 216. 
 
 Liquids, 138; verb stems in, 
 Jisig: 
 
 Manner, see Dat.; exprs. by a 
 
 part:, 72 (2). 
 Means, see dat. 
 ut-verbs, 87-90; 
 
 of, 172. 
 Middle mutes, 138 (2). 
 Middle voice, 157. 
 Moods, 158. 
 
 conjugation 
 
 
 
 TESTAMENT GREEK. 
 
 Movable consonants, 140-141 
 
 (top). 
 Mutes, 138; euph. changes, 
 49, 69, 117 (top); verb 
 
 stems, 186. 
 
 Nasals, 138 (2). 
 
 Negatives, 213; see under od 
 and m7. 
 
 Neuter, see Gender; neut. plur. 
 w. sing. verb, 18 (note); 
 neut. acc. of adjs. as advs., 
 86 (mid.). 
 
 Nominative case, 144; of 3d 
 decl., 41. 
 
 Number, 143. 
 
 Numerals, 153. 
 
 Objective case, 144. 
 Open vowels, 138 (3). 
 Optative, 180-181. 
 Oxytone, 20 (bottom). 
 
 Palatal mutes, 138 (2); verb 
 stems in, 186 (top). 
 
 Participle, 70-73 and 37, 39- 
 
 Passive voice, 12, 157; second 
 pass., 69. 
 
 Penult, 2 (bottom). 
 
 Perfect tense, 65-67; primary 
 tense, 159. 
 
 Periphrastic forms, 112(bottom). 
 
 Personal endings, 4 and 182- 
 183. 
 
 Motion toward exprs. by acc., | Place exprs. by dat., 217 (bot- 
 
 218. 
 
 tom). 
 
ENGLISH INDEX, 
 
 Pluperfect tense, suffix in act., 
 89. 
 
 Predicate position of adjs., 64 
 (3d. sent.). 
 
 Prepositions, 219-222; suffer 
 elision, 141; in compound 
 verbs, 32. 
 
 Present tense, 3, 4; primary, 
 159. 
 
 Primary tenses, 159. 
 
 Principal parts of verbs, 159. 
 
 Proclitics, 21 (note). 
 
 Pronouns, pers. pron., 29; in- 
 tensive pron., avTés, 29, 30; 
 interrog. and indef. pron., 
 75; rel. pron., 33; refl. pron., 
 80, 81. 
 
 Pronunciation, 137 and 138 (4). 
 
 Punctuation, 142. 
 
 Purpose, exprs. by final clauses, 
 206. 
 
 Quantity of a syllable, 2 (4, 4). 
 Questions of doubt exprs. by 
 subjv., 205. 
 
 Recessive, see Accent. 
 Reciprocal pronouns, 81. 
 Reduplication in perf., 66; in 
 2 aor., 118 (v. 13); in pres. 
 system, 89-90; Attic redupl. 
 in perf., 112 (v. I). 
 Relative clauses, 209. 
 Result exprs. by wore, 212. 
 Rough breathing, 10 (c), 140, 
 Rough mutes, 138 (2). 
 
 233 
 Semivowels, 138 (2). 
 Smooth breathing, 140. 
 Subjunctive, 35-36, 38-39; 
 
 syntax of, 205-210. 
 Subscript iota, 7 (@). 
 Suffixes, 183. 
 Superlative degree of adjs., 85; 
 of advs., 86. 
 Systems, tense, 159, 181-182. 
 
 Tasting, verbs of, foll. by gen., 
 215 (mid.). 
 
 Tenses, primary and secondary, 
 159; tenses of ind., 158; of 
 subjv., 35; of inf, 76; of 
 part., 71-72. 
 
 Time, w7thin which exprs. by 
 gen., 214 (bottom); when, 
 dat., 217; how dong, acc., 
 218; use of part. to express 
 Hime, 372. 
 
 Touching, verbs of, foll. by 
 gen., 215. 
 
 Union and approach, words of, 
 foll. by dat., 216 
 
 Voice, 157. 
 
 Vowels, short and long, open 
 and close, 138 (3); contract. 
 of, 138 (4), 139. 
 
 Vowel declensions, 142 (bot- 
 tom). 
 
 Vowel stems in verbs, 48 (mid.). 
 
 Want, words of, foll. by gen., 215. 
 Wish, exprs. by opt., 181. 
 
 Printed in the United States of America, 
 

 

 
Date Due 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 a a ee 
 
 P wh 
 
 - ; ‘ 
 i ve 4 
 
 
 
 + 
 ¥ 
 * ba 
 y eS 3 
 2 4 BG 4 _ | 4 
 4 , . ig 
 ’ % “ . 
 . 4 
 3 
 
 
 
 Po 
 
 , my 
 z ) 7 
 S ; 
 5 
 hs 
 
 | 
 -— 
 ra 
 
 PRINTED|IN U.S.A. 
 
t 
 
 Hg 
 
 
 

 
 : il